JP7271460B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

In a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, a storage unit capable of storing game media supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media, and a guide passage forming portion that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by screw members. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP-A-2003-96050

In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame and the screw member attached to the inside of the game island are disengaged, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are disengaged. If the game medium falls into the part, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium. There was a problem that it may be paid out to

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a screw member from entering a payout portion.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3);
a starting region;
a storage section capable of storing game media (for example, a sphere tank forming section 201);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202 or a second guide passage forming portion 204) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage portion to the dispensing portion;
a screw drop limiting portion (for example, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, and third cover body 330) provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
with
The game control means is
Determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) for determining to set the advantageous state;
Determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is reached before the determination by the determination means;
Information transmission means (for example, production control command such as the CPU 103 that transmits the
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and the information can be transmitted based on entry of the game medium into the start area,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents the game medium falling on the screw drop-limiting portion from staying and the screw member dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to drop into the guide passage forming portion. It is configured to be able to stay on the restriction portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) having locking portions,
A screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is designed to fall outside the guiding passage forming portion even if the screw member is disengaged from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
A game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
Production execution means capable of executing production based on information from the game control means (for example, production control CPU 120 etc. for executing production based on production control command),
with
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, long hole 316A 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guiding passage forming portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (see FIG. 11). , FIGS. 12 and 27),
The game control means is
Determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) for determining to set the advantageous state;
Determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is reached before the determination by the determination means;
State control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025, etc.) capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control such as the CPU 103 that sends commands),
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
The determination means can determine that the state control means enters the special state before the state control means controls to the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed, etc.),
The information transmission means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determination means determines that the special state is reached (for example, display result designation of "loss (time reduction)" commands can be sent),
The production executing means is
When the determination result information is received, a prefetch effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed),
When the judgment result information is received after the special information is received, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the judgment result information is restricted (for example, if Yes is determined in step 059AKS082, the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304 ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in a game machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbols in the variable display game is completely stopped as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80649 becomes a specific display mode , an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state after the jackpot game state is over, and a special state without going through the jackpot game state. there was something However, in such a game machine, there is room for improvement in the control at the time of state transition, and in view of this point, to provide a game machine capable of improving the control of the state transition and enhancing the interest in the game. is required.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 etc. for executing effect based on effect control command) capable of executing effect based on information from the game control means,
The game control means is
Determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) for determining to set the advantageous state;
Determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is reached before the determination by the determination means;
State control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025, etc.) capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control such as the CPU 103 that sends commands),
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
The determination means can determine that the state control means enters the special state before the state control means controls to the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed, etc.),
The information transmission means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determination means determines that the special state is reached (for example, display result designation of "loss (time reduction)" commands can be sent),
The production executing means is
When the determination result information is received, a prefetch effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed),
When the judgment result information is received after the special information is received, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the judgment result information is restricted (for example, if Yes is determined in step 059AKS082, the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304 ),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and to improve the interest in the game.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a frame for a game machine to which a game board is attached; It is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame; It is an enlarged rear view showing the rear upper part of the frame for gaming machines. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 10A. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is an EE cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an FF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view along II of (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view along JJ of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the circumference|surroundings of the ball|bowl tank part in the back surface of the game frame from diagonally behind. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame from diagonally behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame. 21. (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view along PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along QQ in FIG. FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21; FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21; (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper when the ball stopper is in the second state. FIG. 10D is a UU cross-sectional view of FIG. 1C, showing a retained state of the screw member; It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage formation part which shows the movement condition of a screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming portion showing the movement state of the game ball on the cover portion. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the characteristic part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the state by which the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted in the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern branched from the data bus in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low-voltage components and high-voltage components mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state where the game control board in Example 1 was accommodated in the board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for the power supply formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed in the soldering surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2 in connection with the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit. It is a circuit diagram related to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit in the game control board in the second embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, (B) is a lower side of the specific electronic component 1 is a perspective view from . It is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of stop design decision processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example regarding a setting suggestion effect execution determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example and a setting example regarding a setting suggestion pattern; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the execution example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a time saving classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of a time saving fan production period. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the main production|presentation control commands. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of decoration design stop command transmission setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of a time saving start. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving end processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of remaining pending period end determination processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the command buffer at the time of starting winning a prize. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a pending change determination table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of a dropout. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stop design setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving fan effect setting processing. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a time saving fan effect pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of return effect setting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a timing chart showing each timing during the variable display when the pattern for time reduction is stopped and displayed otherwise. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation operation|movement in the case where the pattern for time saving is stop-displayed, and when time-saving fan production etc. are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation operation|movement in the case where the pattern for time saving is stop-displayed, and when time-saving fan production etc. are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation operation|movement in the case where the pattern for time saving is stop-displayed, and when time-saving fan production etc. are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation operation|movement in the case where the pattern for time saving is stop-displayed, and when time-saving fan production etc. are performed. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in information output processing. 4 is a timing chart showing output timings of various signals output in external information output processing; It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special figure display result. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation operation|movement in case the design for time saving is stop-displayed. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the characteristic portion 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structure of the special variable prize-winning ball apparatus based on the characteristic part 063AK in the state by which the big prize-winning opening was controlled by the closed state. (a) to (c) are diagrams for explaining the flow of game balls that have entered the big winning hole related to the characteristic part 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing a configuration of a distributing section related to a characteristic section 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration of a distributing member related to the characteristic portion 063AK. (a) to (c) are diagrams for explaining the flow of game balls that have entered the sorting portion related to the characteristic portion 063AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the operation of a distribution member related to the characteristic portion 063AK; It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the small hit start production time and the timing at which the game ball enters the sorting portion according to the characteristic portion 063AK. (a) is a timing chart of an effect corresponding to a small hit variation related to the characteristic portion 063AK. (b) is a diagram for explaining whether or not an effect corresponding to a small hit variation related to the characteristic part 063AK is executed and the effect mode. (a) is a timing chart of the time-saving suggestion production|presentation based on the characteristic part 063AK. (b) is a figure which shows the time saving suggestion pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (a) is a diagram for explaining the normal-time passing fan effect corresponding to the first special game related to the characteristic part 063AK. (b) is a diagram for explaining the normal-time passing fan effect corresponding to the second special game related to the characteristic portion 063AK. (c) is a figure for demonstrating the time-saving passage fan effect|presentation which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing concerning feature part 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first special figure display result determination table related to the characteristic part 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table related to the characteristic part 063AK. (a) is a figure which shows the list of the jackpot classification based on the characteristic part 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table related to the characteristic part 063AK. (a) is a figure which shows the list of the small hit classification which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit type determination table related to the characteristic portion 063AK. It is a figure which shows the list of the variation pattern based on characteristic part 063AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of variation pattern setting processing concerning characteristic part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot variation pattern determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the loss fluctuation|variation pattern determination table based on the characteristic part 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a normal state short working hours variation pattern determination table related to the characteristic part 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a time saving variation pattern determination table for time saving state according to the feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special design stop processing which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the small hit start production waiting time determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit opening pre-processing which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during small hit opening concerning feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the hit completion|finish designation|designated command determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the passage notification effect|presentation waiting time determination table based on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the small hit end processing concerning characteristic part 063AK. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 063AK; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a decorative pattern that is a small winning combination related to the characteristic portion 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a normal state small hit fixed decoration symbol determination table related to the characteristic portion 063AK. (c) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a final decoration symbol determination table at the time of a small hit for time saving state according to the characteristic portion 063AK. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing related to the characteristic portion 063AK; FIG. (a) is a flow chart showing an example of the special figure per waiting process related to the characteristic part 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit start effect time determination table related to the characteristic portion 063AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing during a small hit concerning feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit completion|finish production|presentation process which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (a) to (i) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a normal state related to the characteristic part 063AK. (a) to (g) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a normal state related to the characteristic part 063AK. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation in the time saving state related to the feature part 063AK. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation in the time saving state related to the feature part 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a normal hold change determination table according to a modification of the characterizing part 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a restriction-time pending change determination table according to a modification of the characteristic part 063AK. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation according to a modification of the characteristic portion 063AK. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of design process processing normally. It is a figure which shows an example of a normal design determination table. It is a figure which shows a normal figure display result and the number of times of reduction of working hours. It is a figure which shows a special figure display result and the number of times of time saving. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing at the time of normal symbol stop. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation control process processing of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of normal figure interlocking production control processing. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of special figure interlocking production determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving information setting processing. It is a timing chart which shows the content of the production|presentation at the time of time reduction transition of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 065AK. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotating display of a pending display in each pending display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) are diagrams showing the flashing mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of a chance up production|presentation. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β1; FIG. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 2nd reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open top surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
It is characterized by having

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover portion of the third cover body 330) provided to partially cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion 334),
The cover restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) dropped on the cover from falling to the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). Predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recesses 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 2,
The predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) are provided so that game media that have fallen on the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without staying there. It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion and the screw member can always be kept in a state of being able to stay, the screw member dropped onto the cover portion falls into the guide passage forming portion. can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restricting portion has a first retention portion (eg, long hole 316A) capable of retaining the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as the dispensing portion is approached, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
The dispensing portion (eg, dispensing device) of the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped into the guiding passage forming portion (eg, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) 200) are provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to drop outside the guide passage forming portion before reaching the dispensing portion. have (L11>L2, see FIG. 11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped out of the guide passage forming portion from the hole, so that the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion will not be mixed in the delivery portion. can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the guide passage forming portion from obstructing the flow of the game medium.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
A predetermined largest hole among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the dispensing portion (for example, the lateral dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the lateral dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. See Figure 12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing portion. .

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330, and There is an uncovered area (e.g., uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover portion 334 of
At least some of the plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage-forming portion from the uncovered region, it can be dropped out of the guide passage-forming portion through the hole.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The reservoir is
Arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first projecting portion 224) of the game frame,
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter between it and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A first board (e.g., main board 11, effect control board 12, etc.) attached to a lower position than the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202);
a second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion;
with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A and 12A are mounted using screw members). The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members. See Figure 17)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second board is an external output board (e.g., terminal board 210) to which a wiring (e.g., cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected,
The first substrate has a smaller number of wirings to be connected than the external output substrate (for example, the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide path forming portion 202). While the number of cables C that can be connected to is set to the first number (for example, 20), the second Each signal line is also connected to the substrate, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is likely to be subjected to an external force during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached with a screw member. It is possible to prevent it from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201);
a mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
with
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame restricting portion (for example, recessed portion 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member dropped onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, the attachment frame of the external output board can be used to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the dispensing portion.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) Special restricting portions (for example, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict dropping into the forming portion (Fig. 22(C), Figs. 23(A), (B), Fig. 24 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The special restricting portion moves the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. A special retention portion (for example, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached portion,
A threaded member that has been detached from the attached portion but has not been retained in the special retention portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 13 or 14,
The special retention portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the screw member,
The depth of the recess is the depth to which part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member retained in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 15,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the dispensing portion side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stop member 340) capable of retaining a screw member dropped onto the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side of the cover portion in the inclined direction (Fig. 15, Figures 26 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to form 16,
The specific part (for example, the ball stopping member 340) has a first state in which the game medium (for example, the game ball P) of the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202) can flow down; It can be changed to a second state in which the game medium in the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the standing position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. It is possible to change to a second state in which it is possible to contact the game ball and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down).) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member tends to stay more easily than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 16 or 17,
The cover part
A first cover portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) provided with a retention portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) that allows screw members dropped onto the cover portion to be retained on the cover portion ( For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
a second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided with the specific portion different from the first cover portion;
It is characterized by including
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, a screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, a flange portion F) (see FIG. 8 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) having locking portions,
A screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is designed to fall outside the guiding passage forming portion even if the screw member is disengaged from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is made difficult to come off from the game frame, and the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage formation portion falls outside the guide passage formation portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the threaded member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) Of these, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the game machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 20 or 21,
Screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, game machine frame 3) are provided for reinforcing the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, a metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the reservoir can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 22,
Screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to positions above the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are The screw member is different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 23,
A game board (e.g., game board 2) detachable from the game frame (e.g., game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) in the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, the upper part of the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board to bounce and be mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The guide passage forming portion is
a first passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) extending downward toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming portion (for example, a second guiding passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion;
has
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portion moves and falls outside the guiding passage forming portion from the lower end (Fig. 29 ( A) See)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2 to 25,
A wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided so as to cross the guide passage forming portion at a position near the predetermined restriction portion (for example, the concave portion 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1). (see FIG. 29(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and remain in the predetermined restricting portion.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is defined as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is defined as the rear. Also, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from a player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area Y is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot and struck in the game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided in the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), a guide rail 2b, etc., and a spacer member integrally attached to the back side of the board. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. may be configured

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y), special symbols (also called special symbols) as special identification information of a plurality of types are variably displayed (also called a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 . A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special game and the variable display of the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area), a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the first reservation display 25A displays the first reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, the variable winning ball device 6B includes a starting winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, thereby opening the second starting winning opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the starting winning opening door is in the open position, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (the second It is also said that the starting prize-winning port is in an open state.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. Also, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including general winning holes is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers representing "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area Y, there is provided an out port (not shown) into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the peripheral portion of the game area Y. It is The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area Y by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area Y, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be supplied to the ball launching device ( A batted ball supply plate (upper plate) for storage is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a payout port through which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. A hitting ball supply tray (lower tray) may be provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area Y by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start winning has occurred) If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, as well as the big hit type, the "small hit" may also be provided with a small hit type.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some big-hit types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as payout control board 37 (see FIG. 3), information terminal board, launch control board, power supply board 91 (see FIG. 3), etc. are arranged on the back of pachinko game machine 1. there is

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, a random value for special figure display result determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern determination, etc. , respectively, and stored (stored) at the top of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the special figure display result Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for judgment, whether or not the fluctuation display result of the special pattern and the production pattern is a "jackpot" is determined (predetermined) before the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. Symbol normal processing is executed. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the big win display result as the display result of the variable display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the rear structure of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a game machine frame to which a game board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. 5 to 7, illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 to which the game board 2 is detachably provided, and a left side of the game machine frame 3. A game hall having a glass door frame 50 provided so as to be able to open and close the front surface of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 supporting the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable about the left side thereof. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back of the game machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4) is provided from a circulation path of game balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls P) provided inside game islands (not shown). ), forming a ball tank forming portion 201 that forms a storage portion capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming portion 201, and forming a first guide passage that guides the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming portion 202 and a first passage forming body 203 extending in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the frame 3 for a game machine. A terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

The replenishing device 150 has a guiding member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the game balls on the circulation route of the game island, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. a sprocket (not shown) capable of driving the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) for driving the sprocket, and the game machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is closed by the game machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game balls sent out by the sprocket enter the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket is held so as not to fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 decreases while the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the drive source rotates the sprocket and the game balls are sent out by a predetermined number to the ball tank forming part 201. It is designed to be supplied to In the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guide path forming portion 204 that forms a second guide path that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide path forming portion 202 downward, and a game guided by the second guide path forming portion 204 A payout device 200 constituting a payout section capable of putting out balls, and a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 200 to the upper tray, that is, forming a payout passage for paying out the game balls to the player. Pachinko game for discharging the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball removing passage forming portion 206 that forms a ball removing passage leading to a discharge portion (not shown) provided on the lower back side of the machine 1 is provided in the gaming machine frame 3. It extends vertically along the left side of the back surface of the .

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has therein a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball) at a time, a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the passage of the balls between the paying-out passage and the ball-removing passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, a board case 91A in which the power board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower back of the gaming machine frame 3 .

In this embodiment, a ball break switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position of the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball break switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be paid out in the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200.例文帳に追加When the off state of the ball-out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that game balls are not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and payout is performed. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 displays a replenishment error, and by outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 displays the glass door frame 50. A game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined place on the front face is illuminated in an error mode, so that notification processing to the effect that a replenishment error has occurred can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in an opening 221 formed substantially in the central portion of the gaming machine frame 3 . The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a made up of the above-described board plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side, a production device having a movable body 32, a board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is stored, a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is stored, and a plate-shaped It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, a production device, electronic parts, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are configured so that each substrate can be housed therein by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. , are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the game machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or it is attached to the game board 2 . The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material in the shape of a box with an open front surface. part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, a first passage formation body 203 and a second passage formation body 207 provided on the back surface of the game machine frame 3, and a cover body 220 constituting the back surface of the game board 2 are It protrudes rearward from the outer frame 60 when the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3 . In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged behind the upper plate of the outer frame 60 on the upper back surface of the frame 3 for a game machine, so that the pachinko machine can be used for pachinko games. In a state in which the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 is fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 through the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. .

(Mounting Structure of First Passage Forming Body 203)
Next, a structure for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear portion of the frame for gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game machine frame 3 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and is provided with an opening 221 for mounting the game board 2 thereon. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the upper side portion 3A. A mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 is mounted on the back surface of the metal plate 222 .

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so as to be able to cover the metal plate 222 from the back side. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing each into a plurality of formed screw holes. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first projecting portion 224 protrudes rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C. A three-dimensional second projecting portion 225 projects rearward.

The first projecting portion 224 projects rearward from a lower position than the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. In addition, the first guide path forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225, and the board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 .

Thus, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first projecting portion 224 and the second projecting portion 225 projecting backward. Therefore, game balls supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from above the game islands are prevented from entering the game board 2 . That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

The first passage forming body 203 includes a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the rear side and a screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing into the screw holes. The screw member N12 attached to the mounting hole H12 also serves as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming member 203 to the first passage forming member 203. A first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. As shown in FIG. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing a screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into a screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. there is

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 8, the threaded members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 include a male threaded portion NS and a head portion NH. It is a flanged screw in which a flange part F as a locking part is integrally formed on the bearing surface of the screw, and by increasing the contact area of the bearing surface and increasing the frictional force, it is difficult to loosen compared to the screw members N3 to N6. It is considered as a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 4 to 7 mm. 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to those described above. The screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are flanged screws, are screw members integrally formed with a flange portion F (washer). may be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened. In addition, the locking portion includes a locking portion for the head NH formed unevenly on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage formation body 203 needs to receive and store the game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank formation portion 201, and the first guide passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open upper surface so that clogging of balls is unlikely to occur in the case of clogging of balls, and clogging of balls can be easily eliminated in the event that clogging occurs.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the portion where the game balls accumulated in the ball tank forming portion 201 in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the third cover body 330 is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the portion where the ball flows from the first guide path forming portion 202 to the second guide path forming portion 204, so that the game ball is rectified. However, although a part of the top opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered with the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, the sphere tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( 27) is open.

On the other hand, in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged. In addition, above the pachinko machine 1 fixed to the game island, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks constituting the game island, and various devices (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishing device 150, etc., to the frame or the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members are loosened and fall off due to vibration or shock generated in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they will roll due to the vibration or shock or the opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming part 201 or the first screw member will roll. There is a possibility that they fall inside from the non-covered area 350 of the guide passage forming part 202 and mix into the guide passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity directly above the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. , or when the game machine frame 3 is opened or closed, the replenishment device 150 is likely to vibrate, so a screw member ( (not shown), or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 are loosened due to vibration and fall off, the inside of the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 very likely to fall.

Then, when the screw member drops into the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game ball flows down, and finally enter the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or the switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, or the payout motor may be damaged due to the load caused by the ball clogging, or the screw member may be damaged by the player along with the game ball. There is a risk that the player will be paid out immediately, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 mixes with the dispensing device 200 and damages or breaks down the dispensing device 200, or the screw member is broken together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to suppress the payout to the player.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 11, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A. It is a diagram. 12, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). 13, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE of (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF of (A). 14, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). 15, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in (A), and (D) is a third cover member. 3 is a perspective view showing a cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. 16, (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows a guidance passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a vertical wall portion 203B erected on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape with an opening, and has a ball tank forming portion 201 arranged on the right side and a first guiding passage forming portion 202 arranged on the left side. The sphere tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed by an upstream portion extending obliquely rearward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The longitudinal dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 is longer than the longitudinal dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that more game balls than the first guide passage forming portion 202 can be stored. It is Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, The game ball naturally flows down toward the ball tank formation part 201 and the first guide passage formation part 202 to the left.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are formed in the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 261. . A mounting piece 265 projects from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the left standing wall portion 203B of the first guiding passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 protrudes forward from the outer surface of the front vertical wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 . A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and the mounting piece 263 is formed with a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. As shown in FIG. A concave portion 280 having a substantially square shape in a plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, hole portions 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the rear vertical wall portion 203B ( See FIG. 11(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at approximately the central position in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. In addition, a communication hole 272 is formed through the bottom wall portion 203A at the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to drop the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204 below. .

A meandering portion 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273 . By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the succeeding ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the front and rear vertical wall portions 203B and 203B lower portions of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and twice the diameter 2R (about 22 mm). (11 mm<L10<22 mm). That is, the first guide path forming portion 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the screw members N3 to N6 (L11>L2), as will be described later, the screw members N3 to Even if N6 enters the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can drop from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest lateral dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 272. can be reliably dropped outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching the .

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that dirt and dust other than the threaded member, or any other member can fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C, the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B extends. A mounting portion 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above, a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the right side of the mounting portion 311 toward the rear side, and a right side from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 (forming a ball tank). 201 side), a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side), and an attachment A plurality of engaging portions 315A to 315D elastically deformable are mainly formed on the front side of the portion 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner is configured such that the mounting portion 311 is attached to the sphere tank forming portion 201 while the vertical wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 . By fitting the upper end of the front standing wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203 . In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged to cover a portion of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is arranged to cover a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball tank forming part 201 is moved from the game island (not shown). Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to pile up in the vertical direction, the game balls are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball pressing portion 313 when flowing down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side. It is designed to be

In the cover portion 314, long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having the shape of a horizontally long rectangle in a plan view are formed vertically through the cover portion 314 while being arranged in parallel rows. Each of the long holes 316A-316C has the same longitudinal dimension L21, and the longitudinal dimension L21 is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1-N6 and N11-N16 mentioned above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). In other words, the long holes 316A-316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 from falling. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheries of the long holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIGS. In this case, the game ball P can move in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the second cover body 320 includes a plate-like cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion 324 and a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B which are elastically deformable. In the close state, the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B, so that the first passage forming body 203 Mounted on. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball (FIG. 9). reference).

On the upper surface of the cover portion 324, recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed in rows. The concave grooves 326A-326C have different front-to-rear dimensions L22A-L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A-L22C<2R). The longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). In other words, the recessed groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate game balls and that can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the long holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the recessed groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the recessed groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), and is sized to accommodate at least the externally threaded portion NS.

In addition, since the concave grooves 326A to 326C extend along the flowing direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, FIGS. 2, when the game ball P falls to the upper part of the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flowing direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C and 16, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-like cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. A plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D elastically deformable formed on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334 and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the rear surface are attached from above. A mounting portion 331 having a hole H15 and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. It is elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by inserting it. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a concave portion 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. Since the right part reaches the meandering part 273 , it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering part 273 . At a position corresponding to the concave portion 336, a horizontally long U-shaped slit 337 is formed in plan view, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side is elastically deformable so as to swing vertically. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 inclined downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked up and down are guided toward the bottom wall portion 203A and leveled. (See Fig. 16).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recessed portion 336 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the concave portion 336 extends along the flowing direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIG. When the game ball P falls on the upper part of 336, the game ball P is guided toward the flowing direction (left side).

In addition, since the longitudinal dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L24<L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ˜N16 do not drop from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-like front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the rear side of the front wall portion 341A, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a connected left wall portion 341C, a projecting wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334 to rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 . A slit 344 is formed through the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334 so that the front wall portion 341A can be inserted therethrough.

As shown in FIG. 16 , when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage formation body 203 , the downstream portion of the first guide passage formation portion 202 is covered by the cover portion 324 . Since the cover portion 324 is arranged to be inclined downward toward the bottom wall portion 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the game balls P stacked up and down in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are covered with the cover portion 324. While flowing down, it is leveled, and finally it is made possible to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. - 特許庁In particular, the straightening plate 338 is elastically deformable when a game ball comes into contact with it, so that it smoothes (rectifies) the game ball so as to press it downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16A, the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and a tilted position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right. is located in the standing position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204; The portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball in the first guide passage formation portion 202 cannot flow down to the second guide passage formation portion 204 (or difficult), that is, the ball-stopped state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 to the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage formation portion 204, so that the game inside the second guide passage formation portion 204 in this state It is possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened and consists of a front wall portion 341A, a rear wall portion 341B, and a left wall portion 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retaining portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained as described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 is tilted, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 17 with reference to FIG. 17, (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connecting portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is detachable on the back. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the ends of the cables C are provided inside the mounting member 232 at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 . A spring (not shown) is provided for biasing the connection pinch in the direction of closing it, that is, in the direction of clamping the tip of the cable C. As shown in FIG. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation portions 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is set to the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to a second board such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming portion 202, but the number of lines is less than the first number. It is set to the number (for example, 10).

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the respective connection holes 231, and have a substantially hook-like shape when viewed from the side, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end thereof as the swing axis. When opening the connection pinch (not shown), the operation portion 233 is pushed upward or downward to swing the operation portion 233, thereby releasing the connection pinch (not shown). When the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole portion 231 with the connection pinch opened and the pressing operation of the operation portion 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of the spring (not shown). Cable C comes to be held. The operation portions 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operation portion 233 is pressed, the adjacent operation portions 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. there is

The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 . Further, a horizontally long rectangular opening 234 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 .

On the inner surface of the substrate mounting frame 211, a plurality of restricting portions 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal substrate 210 by engaging with the periphery of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portions 235 prevent the terminal substrate 210 from moving forward. a plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose movement is restricted; have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and is elastically locked by the locking parts 236 in a state where forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restricting parts 235, thereby mounting the board. It is attached to the frame 211 . That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members (using a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Mounted.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, during wiring work for connecting a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, an operation portion 233 corresponding to each cable C can be operated. need to operate. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the game machine frame 3 is opened for inspection by a game hall clerk or the like, the cable C hanging down from the upper part of the game island is attached to the outer frame. It may be pulled around in front of 60 and tension may be applied to the connection. In other words, since the terminal board 210 is likely to be subjected to a load on the mounting portion, if it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 with a screw member, the screw member becomes loose and easily comes off. ing.

In addition, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operating portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17A). ). Further, since the plurality of operation portions 233 protrude substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation portions 233 arranged side by side as described later. A recess 242 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211 to accommodate the screw members N3 to N6.

(Mounting state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state where the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame. 22, (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. 23, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP of FIG. 21, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ of FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21. FIG. FIG. 26 shows (A) the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper in the second state. (D) is a UU cross-sectional view of (C). FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing movement of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 9, 18 and 19(A), screw members N1 to N1 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided on the sphere tank forming portion 201 and its periphery on the back surface of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. N2 and screw members N11, N12 and N15 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223 are mounted.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached forward from the back side at a position away from the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low. .

The screw members N11 and N12 are attached forward from the back side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached downward from the upper side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw member N15 loosens due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1 and falls upward, the possibility of falling into the sphere tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12 and N15 receive and store the game balls supplied from the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island and form a ball tank on which the load of many game balls is applied. Vibrations and impacts are likely to occur due to being arranged around the portion 201, so a screw member with a flange is used, which has a large contact area with the attached portion and is less prone to loosening.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the sphere tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the sphere tank forming portion 201 even if they are loosened and fall off, that is, at the upper surface opening of the sphere tank forming portion 201. , the game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150 from the circulation path above the game islands are received and stored in the ball tank forming portion 201, which is open at the top. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-like first projecting portion 224 projecting rearward from the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 is smaller than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw member (L30<L1). It is almost impossible for the screw member to be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201 .

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head portion L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. is also long (L3>L2), the flanged screw member is almost never caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19B, if the screw member N15 slips out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H is Since the screw member N15 is inclined downward toward the back side, the dropped screw member N15 flows down either rearward or leftward, so that it is almost never held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from entering each of the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the sphere tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20 and 21A, screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the substrate A screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 to the mounting member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223, A threaded member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the front from the rear side. In addition, the second projecting portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is arranged between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so the pachinko game machine 20, when the screw members N3 to N6 are loosened due to vibrations or shocks generated in 1 and fall off rearward, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a recessed groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head portion NH when mounting the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3 is formed in a straight line toward the rear. has been extended to The groove 227 is formed so that the width of the groove 227 tapers toward the rear and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly slanted downward toward the rear side).

Therefore, when the screw member N3 is loosened and falls out backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 falls into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (Fig. 22(A)). In addition, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move rearward in a straight line when vibration or impact occurs. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in the region other than the concave groove 227. In other words, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Here, all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS. In many cases, the screw member N3 is tilted in a state in which two points with the tip are in contact (see FIG. 22(A)), so that the tilted screw member N3 as shown in FIG. Occasionally, the head NH swings around the tip of the male threaded portion NS and changes direction. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly backward, or the head may move backward. The NH may also move to turn left or right by rotating its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, if it moves backward and bends to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and bends to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the recessed groove 227 and then bent rearward to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility of falling onto the cover portion 314 of 310 . As shown in FIG. 22A, when the screw member N3 drops onto the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male threaded portion NS falls. Although it is inserted into any one of the long holes 316A to 316C, the head NH is retained on the cover portion 314 without falling from the cover portion 314 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 by being locked without falling off. will do. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then linearly moved rearward, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. It is likely to fall on horizontal wall 264 of body 203 . As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the threaded member N3 falls onto the cover portion 324, the threaded member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the grooves 326A to 326C. A portion of the head NH is accommodated in the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, so that the head portion NH stays on the cover portion 324 without falling from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the concave grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3 from falling onto the cover portion 324 provided to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

In addition, when falling onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, the horizontal wall portion 264 Stay in a state of leaning to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a concave portion 290 with an open top, so that the liquid is accommodated and retained in the concave portion 290. As shown in FIG. That is, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N3 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first passage forming body 203, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263 which is the position. Therefore, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a possibility that the screw member N13 falls into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 23(A)). More specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B. A recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by 225A, the standing wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23B, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may drop and stay in the concave portion 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211 . That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, when the screw member N4 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 falls onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves backward when it bends to the right, moves backward linearly, and moves backward. As shown in FIG. 24, in any of the cases where the board is turned to the right, it falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 dropped from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and stays in the concave portion 242 formed by the substrate mounting frame 211 and the terminal substrate 210, or stays in the substrate mounting frame. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between 211 and the standing wall portion 203B, the head portion NH may be retained by being locked without falling off. That is, the recessed portion 242 and the recessed portion 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. A special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is constructed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 drops from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation portions 233. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island, the plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 3). C may also prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operating portion 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202. This constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the threaded member N4 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward so as to bend to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 203 is removed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202. 310 , an uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330 , which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330 , to the first guide passage forming portion 202 . to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side as the game ball P flows down, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the non-coated area 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG.

Further, even if it does not fall from any one of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from one of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and bends to the left, and then crosses the standing wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the concave portion 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By dropping, it is accommodated and stays in the concave portion 336 without dropping from the cover portion 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the recessed portion 336 restricts the screw member N4 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202, which has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. constitutes a predetermined limit part of

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward so as to move linearly rearward. After that, when it moves so as to bend to the right, as shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 16, the cover part 334 covers the upper opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). There is a high possibility that the screw member N6 that has fallen to a position in the vicinity of the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 will move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved downstream comes into contact with the ball stop member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) of the cover portion 334, which is the lower inclined side, and Left side) is restricted to stay on the cover portion 334 .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. , the left wall portion 341C, and the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in plan view. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned so as to cross the passage in an upright state, so that the screw member N6 is placed on the protruding wall. Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334. FIG.

In the second state, the projecting wall portion 341D is arranged so as to intersect the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may drop backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C cover the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. It can be retained more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is positioned only on the left side. In other words, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the side of the dispensing device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of causing the screw member N6 dropped onto the cover portion 334 to stay in the cover portion 334. are doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the threaded member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the mounting member 223 to the front and right side, and is positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged right behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut halfway. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it will drop onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202, There is a high possibility of dropping from the upper wall portion 225</b>A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

The screw member N16 is attached to an attachment hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 is loosened by vibration or impact and falls out backward, it is highly likely that it will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. .

(action/effect)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc. are loosened due to vibrations and impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall off, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, impacts, opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, etc., the cover When it falls on the parts 314, 324, 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the concave part 336 and the ball stop member 340 restrict the fall to the first guide passage forming part 202, Since there is a high possibility that the screws will remain on the cover portions 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover portions 314, 324, 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to prevent the member from moving and mixing into the dispensing device 200 . In addition, since vertical wall portions are formed at the left (downstream) ends of the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left, can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28 , on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 , the regions other than the uncovered region 350 are covered with the cover portions 314 , 324 and 334 , but the sphere tank forming portion 201 Even if the replenished game ball spills out and gets on the cover parts 314, 324 on the upstream side, the longitudinal dimensions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the space is also narrow, the game ball P rolls leftward and then falls from the left end of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming portion 202 .

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has landed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned into the first guide path forming portion 202, but also the game ball P can be retained in the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the falling screw member N stays is restricted, or it comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball falls on the cover portion 334, it either flows down on the cover portion 334 toward the left side and is restricted by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. do.

In addition, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, The front-rear dimension L22B is larger than the front-rear dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing so, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 move due to vibration, impact, etc., and the non-covered portions provided between the cover portions 324 and 334 move. When it falls from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, it falls from the uncovered region 350 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202. Even if the game ball P falls directly inside the first guide passage forming portion 202, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. As a result, the screw member dropped into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the dispensing device 200 because it falls from one of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Mixing can be suppressed.

A plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a region where no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B which are formed close to each other and the hole 271A which is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a state of being stacked up and down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A in the vicinity of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which ball pressure is applied.

In addition, by forming a region in which no holes are formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this manner, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. Entry into the cover body 220 through the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 6) or the like can be appropriately suppressed.

In addition, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is provided with a screw member. can be suppressed from falling, and it is suppressed that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 and is mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

In addition, the hole 271H, which is the largest among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be preferably transferred from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350, the game ball is are stacked vertically, the screw member is often located above the game ball, but the hole portion 271H is arranged downstream of the straightening plate 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, , Since the game ball is arranged in a position where the game ball is rectified vertically, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is uncovered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the region 350, it can be dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the above-described Even if the game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves downward while moving with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22C, 23A, 23B, and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are moved toward the first guide passage forming portion. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below screw members N3 to N6 attached to attachment holes H3 to H6 as attachment portions. The screw members N3 to N6 provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but not retained in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 can move toward the cover portions 314, 324, 334. , the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 can be prevented from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 are the depths at which the screw members N3 to N6 partially protrude when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 staying in 214, 242, 243 can be easily taken out.

In addition, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, the long holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 restrict the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only does it block (or hinder), but it is a retention part that can be retained outside the first guide path formation part 202, so that the screw member can be found when a store clerk or the like at the game parlor conducts an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easier to take countermeasures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion has the rotating portion 341 positioned at the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviating upward from the slit 344, and the game ball in the first guide passage forming portion 202 being guided to the second direction. A first state in which it is possible to flow down to the passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 is opened. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down to the second guide passage forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down), and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is in the first state. Since the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of , it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

More specifically, the reason why the ball stopper member 340 is set to the second state is, as described above, when the game ball in the first guide passage or the second guide passage is pulled out, that is, when the game parlor clerk or the like operates the pachinko game machine. 1, the ball stop member 340 is put in the first state, while the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the game hall clerk or the like cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

In addition, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as looseness preventing portions. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the game machine frame 3 are arranged so as to fall outside the first guide path formation part 202 even if they are detached from the game machine frame 3. It is mounted below the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201 . Therefore, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the sphere tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game ball. Even if the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the first guide passage forming part 202 come off, they will fall outside the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed into

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the periphery of the pachinko game machine 1 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (the number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200 . Incidentally, instead of the ground wire, a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 may also be used.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the game machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the game machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and vibrations are less likely to occur, so loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game machine frame 3 are screw members having a head portion NH with a small diameter that does not have a flange portion F. Even if it falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that the screw member can be prevented from entering the dispenser 200. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guide passage forming portion 202 on the game board 2 detachable from the frame 3 for the game machine, the fallen screw member is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped on the upper wall portion 220H from jumping and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Also, although not shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and drop onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200 side, thereby preventing the screw members falling on the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the production device having a movable body, and the production control board 12, so that the drive source of these is generated. A plurality of heat radiation holes 220B for releasing heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). It is preferably of a size that does not allow NH to be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H of the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is Preferably, it is formed at least at positions not corresponding to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H, or formed at a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, the rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the performance device having the movable body, the performance control board 12, and the like.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and FIG. 29B is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guiding passage forming portion that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is the first ball tank forming portion extending to the left side so as to incline downward. It has a guiding passage forming portion 202 and a second guiding passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to partially cover the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 protruding upward from the upper surface of the left end. In the above, the configuration in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover portion 334 can be received and retained has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover portion of Modification 1 Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover portion 360 do not remain on the cover portion 360 when moving toward the left end side, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 Since the screw member N directly falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end portion of the screw member N, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the cover portion 360 in which a recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed in the upper surface thereof, a second A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flowing direction of the game ball in the 1 guide passage forming portion 202 .

By doing so, the movement of the screw member N and the game ball P, which are retained in the recessed portion 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be restricted by the cable C so as to be retained.

(description of variations and applications)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 for attaching the mounting member 223 and the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 of the pachinko game machine 1, Screw members (not shown) attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks that make up the game island, and various devices (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) and the like have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. All screw members such as screw members that have remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason such as forgetting to install them at the time of maintenance at the place can be targeted, but at least they are installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a storage portion capable of storing game media, the sphere tank forming portion 201 formed in a box-like shape with an open upper surface by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion B is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage portion can store game balls, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage-forming portion 202 like the ball tank-forming portion 201 described above. It does not have to be long, and the front-to-rear dimension may be substantially the same as or shorter than that of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In addition, as long as the game balls supplied from the supply device 150 can be received, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout device 200 capable of paying out game balls with a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls by members other than sprockets.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B serve as the guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. Although the configuration in which the groove-shaped first guide passage forming portion 202 is applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and the shape, size, and the like can be variously changed. In addition, the width dimension (front-rear dimension) of the ball tank forming part 201 may be substantially the same or larger, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing game balls and the first guide passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls in the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the form in which the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally formed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling them with screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also subject to the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the screw member can enter from the top opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw member may enter through a hole or a notch formed on the vertical wall side. In addition, when a screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, a predetermined restricting portion for restricting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204, or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restricting portion or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispenser 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire area of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion that covers a partial region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be configured by a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202, It may be integrally formed with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. In other words, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the embodiments in which the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the holes that allow the thread to be inserted, the grooves 326A to 326C and the recess 336 as the recesses are applied, the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member A fall restriction part (drop obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the fall from the cover part, and a movement restriction part (movement obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the movement of the screw member on the cover part Alternatively, it may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Note that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting falling or movement may be not only the protrusions and recesses, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, adhesive parts capable of adhering screw members, and the like.

In other words, the predetermined limit portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 , 324 , 334 onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 is Not only those that make it impossible to fall, but also those that make it difficult to fall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting portions are provided in the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to restrict the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200 is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of inhibiting movement. It should be noted that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the movement to the dispensing device 200 side is not limited to the protrusions and recesses, but may be a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, or the like. However, it is preferable to provide them at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, the corners between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which are not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the dispensing device 200 for the screw member. If the movement to the side can be restricted, the movement of the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 side is not necessarily disabled, and the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (restricted, inhibited) by the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the screw member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage restricts the downflow of the game ball, resulting in ball clogging. When ball clogging occurs, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the game hall clerk or the like opens the game machine frame 3 to form the ball tank forming part 201 on the back or the first guide passage. There is a high possibility that the state of the game ball in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member remains in the first guide passage forming portion 202 without moving to the dispensing device 200, it becomes easier for the store clerk or the like to identify that the ball clogging was caused by the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, all of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H have a size that allows the screw member to drop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes may not be capable of dropping the screw member. Moreover, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-described forms.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the production control board 12 are applied as the first board attached to the lower position than the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. Other substrates such as relay substrates may also be targeted.

In the above-described embodiment, the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , other substrates such as a relay substrate may be used as the second substrate.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are exemplified by the form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are accommodated are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be attached directly to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without interposing the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are configured such that the board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is accommodated are screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210 as the second board is attached to the game board 2 by an attachment method, using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members, that is, Although a form in which the board mounting frame 211 is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may include attachment means, adhesion means using an adhesive or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 to restrict the screw member moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a special restricting portion for making the first guiding passage forming portion 202 of the screw member, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) the fall of, a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, , a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can drop out of the first guide passage forming portion 202, or the like. In addition, as a means capable of restricting or inhibiting the falling or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a magnet capable of adhering the screw member. It may be an adhesive portion or the like.

In other words, the special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the portion that disables the dropping of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, Any material can be used as long as it makes it difficult to fall. For example, a convex portion as a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) and a concave portion or a hole as a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) may be provided at predetermined positions of the upper wall portion 225A or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in which the concave portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc., are provided as the special restricting portion is in the vicinity of the front standing wall portion 203B. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least it is provided in the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 203B as long as it is between the mounting portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion. For example, it may be provided at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion between the attached portion and the guide passage forming portion of the screw member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first Although the form which applied the ball stop member 340 which can change to the 1st state which makes the game ball of the guidance passage formation part 202 flow down, and the 2nd state which makes it difficult or impossible to flow down was illustrated, this invention It is not limited to this, and any member provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction (lower side of the inclination) of the cover portion 334 may restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball stopper function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, or a wiring retainer that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is provided on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the specifying portion may be provided at the end portion of the dispensing device 200 side of the cover portions 314 and 324 as long as it is provided at the dispensing device 200 side end portion of one cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is configured by a member separate from the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific portion (a ball stop portion) may be integrally formed with a part of the member that constitutes the cover portion 334 .

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head portion NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head portion NH However, the present invention is not limited to this, instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or the head Also included are the anti-rotation portion of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive agent, and the like. Moreover, the threaded member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may be a thumbscrew, or includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as the storage portion is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by the screw members N11 to N14 having the flange portion F as the locking portion to form the ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 are designed so as to fall outside the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they come off the game machine frame 3. , the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 are mounted below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, it may be displaced in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If the screw member is attached at a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from directly falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). good too.

Further, the predetermined restriction portion, the specific restriction portion, the special restriction portion, and the specific portion in the above-described embodiments are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the pachinko game such as game islands. Although the embodiment of restricting or regulating (obstructing) the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the screw member is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferably formed in a size and shape that allow (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, a form for implementing a gaming machine in the characterizing part 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The game machine in the characteristic part 053SG is a pachinko game machine or a slot machine installed in a game hall or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. Equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment can be applied, and the main board 11 of the above-described embodiment can be applied as the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied as the effect control board. is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected with a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, detection switches that detect operations by the player, detection switches that detect the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, sensors that specify the positions of movable objects used in games such as reels, detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage of the door, and detection switches for detecting door opening, abnormalities, and the like.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is equipped with an input circuit that detects the input signal from these input components, and the detection status of the input signal from the input component by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used for game control by the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output components such as indicators, LEDs, motors, solenoids, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output components include, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on the operation mode, and a value owned by the player. , an LED that indicates the game state, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor, a solenoid, and the like that operate movable parts used in the game, such as reels and variable winning devices.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer transmits output data to the output circuit, thereby controlling the output components according to the progress of the game.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is through a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are connected directly to the game control microcomputer without a data bus, and are connected to a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus. The configuration may be such that the output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without passing through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the game machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board provided in the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained using the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be described. The game control board has electronic components mounted on one surface and no electronic components mounted on the other surface, and has a configuration in which the terminals of the electronic components are soldered. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which no electronic component is mounted and terminals of the electronic component are soldered is called a soldering surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes passing through the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board are configured with conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. In addition, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board, a ground area is formed by an insulating area made of an insulator and a conductor and forming a ground. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 30-2, wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface in a larger proportion than wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction, and on the other hand, as shown in FIG. , more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are arranged than wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-3, the wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface has many wires extending in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the wiring pattern distance is longer than the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the soldering surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the soldering surface is obstructed by the electronic components. is avoided.

Further, when branching the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the branched wiring patterns is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through holes. One wiring pattern of the branch destination is detoured, and the one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern do not cross each other on the same plane.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in the present embodiment in which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each composed of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components having these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, there is a large percentage of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to directly connect the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

30-4, the input circuit and the output circuit among the electronic components having a terminal row are formed in a rectangular shape and provided with a recessed notch on one of the short sides, and on the surface The model number is printed so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. As shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in FIG. 30-4 and the model number is printed from left to right. 30-4, the notch faces right and the model number is printed from right to left. It is possible to specify whether the circuit is present or whether it is an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit as described above. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-6, the data bus, input circuits, output circuits, and other electronic components are connected to a wiring pattern formed so as to branch out to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. connected by

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the horizontal direction through the data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the horizontal direction. It is connected to a data bus on the surface, branches to a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at a position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and it is possible to efficiently connect the game control microcomputer and the electronic parts separated in the horizontal direction. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less likely to be affected by noise from the electronic components. Since the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole is used for connection, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from the electronic components during this period is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction forming the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is an antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern forming the data bus from having an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock and unintentionally emitting radio waves due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna is half the length corresponding to the bus clock, it may reflect off the surface of the substrate and cause strong resonance. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not half the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, the bus clock varies depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be installed, but the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock, which is the maximum frequency assumed among them. The length of the antenna is shorter than the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance, and the length of the antenna is less than half the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock that has the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock frequency lower than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns forming a data bus are arranged in an oblique right direction or an oblique left direction. They are connected across wiring patterns extending in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the oblique right direction or the oblique left direction are connected while being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-5, through holes (A to F shown in FIG. 30-5) provided on oblique wiring patterns that connect a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns are used for mounting. Wiring patterns on the surface side (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in FIG. 30-6) are branched, and oblique wiring patterns that connect the divided horizontal wiring patterns to each other. are used to branch the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus.

In addition, in the game control board in the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns, and a plurality of In this configuration, the horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected to each other by oblique wiring patterns formed on the same soldering surface. In other words, horizontal wiring patterns are alternately formed on the soldering surface and the mounting surface so that the horizontal wiring pattern length is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction at the point where the wiring pattern is switched from the soldering surface or the mounting surface to the other surface. , the wiring patterns forming the data bus can be branched without intersecting on the same plane.

Figure 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, Figure 30-8 is formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area;

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, the ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and soldering surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board comprises a first ground area and a second ground area electrically separated via an insulating area. In both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area is formed in the left area of the game control board, and the second ground area is formed in the right area of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-7, a wiring pattern that transmits a low voltage (Vcc (+5 V) in this embodiment) signal such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, an output circuit, etc. is connected. Electronic components (low-voltage components) are mounted on the left area where the first ground area is formed, and ground terminals of the low-voltage components are connected to the first ground area. On the other hand, electronic parts (high voltage parts) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high voltage (VLD (+24 V) in this embodiment) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. It is mounted on the right area where two ground areas are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground area. This prevents unintended reverse flow of current from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. In addition, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on opposite side sides of the game control board, interference with each other is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-9, a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, current is prevented from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap each other. Since the insulating region that separates the ground regions and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap each other, from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface Mutual interference is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

30-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, FIG. 30-11 is a connector formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is housed in the board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the game control board has a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted near the lower side of the mounting surface for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board. In the wiring from the game control board, there are a signal that triggers the lottery, a signal that changes the set value that defines the advantage for the player such as the probability of the lottery, and a signal that changes the set value. Wiring for inputting or outputting signals related to the degree of advantage in the game, such as signals, signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring for inputting the detection signal of the error cancellation operation, backup power supply wiring as a supply line for

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder side, that is, the side opposite to the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed therearound. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface passes through the through holes at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminals, and the wiring on the mounting surface passes through. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in FIGS. 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect from the solder surface to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and 30-12(B), the game control board is attached to the game machine while being accommodated in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state where it is housed in the board case, it has a structure that prevents fraudulent use of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control substrate is housed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering portion of the board case of the mounting surface of the game control board, and the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. there is The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7. are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is short-circuited from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the substrate case. Fraudulent acts such as disconnection are prevented.

In addition, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering portion of the board case, and the area covered by the covering portion includes wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. No wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering portion, It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from the periphery of the portions where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated by the power board and connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor through the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor A line branched between is connected to the backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a drive power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer, The game control microcomputer is supplied with the backup power supply VBB so that the data stored in the RAM of the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is configured to be supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but may be configured to be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

30-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-15 is formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the soldered surface and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface;

As shown in FIG. 30-14, on the soldering surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are provided as wiring patterns constituting power supply lines. , are formed. The wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3, as shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, are configured by a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB, as shown in FIG. 30-14, consists only of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB supplied with the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to detour the electronic parts mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside can be reduced. This prevents the data stored in the RAM from being corrupted by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is less susceptible to noise because the solid ground formed on the mounting surface blocks noise. Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power. In the region corresponding to , the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is formed at a position where there are few crossing points. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power supply is located in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power supply. is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side. For example, a wiring pattern that transmits a signal related to the player's profit is closer to the mounting surface than a wiring pattern that transmits a signal that is not directly related to the player's history, such as a signal for controlling output parts. In the corresponding area, the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few crossing points, so that the signal formed on the mounting surface side can be used for transmission. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern, through which the signal related to the profit of the player is transmitted from the wiring pattern, is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern that transmits the reset signal to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern that gives the operation clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A place where a wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects a wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in a corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than a wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By adopting a configuration in which the noise is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side and transmitting signals of relatively high importance is minimized. suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game parts related to games such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling effects, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the game control board has the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed on the game component side. Mounted to be positioned. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in a game arcade, it is often installed in such a manner that the back faces of other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines face each other. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed. It is attached so that it is arranged on the device side. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other game machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) different from the first direction (horizontal direction) is higher than that of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, design such as detouring the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a quadrilateral consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed along the shape of the game control board without waste.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that an electronic component having a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals is arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (horizontal direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment includes a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized in that the electronic component is mounted only on the mounting surface and the electronic component is not mounted on the soldering surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), in which the distance can be long on the solder surface, without being obstructed by the electronic component.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern branching from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination, or to cross the one wiring pattern at the branch destination with the other wiring pattern on the same plane. can be formed.

(Effect 2)
The game control board of the present embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit) separated in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a specific signal ( A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting input data and output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed of a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). Each linear wiring pattern formed by division and extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns each composed of a straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a straight line extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) is formed. Each wiring pattern is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from becoming an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), and unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). Alternatively, wiring patterns may be formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Also in such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) and the other wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be preferably branched by utilizing the space between one wiring pattern extending in the specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data) It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), It is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted by

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that the length is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of the present embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of is connected is mounted, the first electronic component (low-voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component ( The high voltage component) is characterized by being connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulator. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V) is transmitted) is connected is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage is A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of (VDL (+24V)) is connected is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended reverse flow of current through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of the present embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high-voltage component), to which a wiring pattern that transmits a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24 V)) is connected, is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in the current flowing through the wiring pattern that connects the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Even if the current difference between the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so that an unintended reverse current flows through the ground. can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area even if a potential difference occurs temporarily between the first ground area and the second ground area due to the capacitor. .

In the game control board of the present embodiment, a first ground area is formed on one side (left side), a second ground area is formed on the other side (right side) opposite to one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area is formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. is characterized by With such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground area and the Insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in areas corresponding to each other. and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) of the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent mutual interference even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine while being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite solder surface. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the periphery where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring related to the advantage of the game (signal for changing the setting value to a changeable state, changing the setting value (wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to game advantage.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and wiring patterns are formed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since the wiring pattern is not formed, by displaying information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the board case has a covering portion covering the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are: It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the region covered by the covering portion. With such a configuration, wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are not formed on the mounting surface even in the periphery of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7). (Connectors CN1 to CN7) can be reliably prevented from fraudulent actions such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the exposed portions.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of the present embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for is capable of holding the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is a game control microcomputer. The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, bypassing the electronic components. Since the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and the data stored in the memory means (RAM) can be prevented from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the mounting surface side is attached so as to be placed on the side of the game components (liquid crystal display, effect control board for controlling effects, etc.) related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is attached so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (another game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer from the influence of noise emitted from other game machines.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area provided with the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer on the solder surface is solid. A ground is formed. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is more It is characterized in that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side as much as possible.

Embodiment 1 of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It goes without saying that

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board for controlling a game has been described. The configuration according to the present invention may also be applied to a board for controlling game media and the provision of game values, a board for relaying between boards, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be described. As in the first embodiment, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, mainly the configuration different from the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. .

30-18 is a view showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 30-19 is a view showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of A plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed in the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. In addition, an insulating area and a ground area are formed in the area where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board is not formed.

Also in the game control board in the second embodiment, similarly to the game control board in the first embodiment, an input circuit and an output circuit are mounted. A concave notch is provided on one side, and the model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the direction of the notch and the direction of printing the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. there is

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIGS. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed to branch to the mounting surface side through the through hole and extend vertically in the vertical direction. .

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the laterally separated input and output circuits via the data bus, first, the terminal of the game control microcomputer extends in the lateral direction on the data bus on the solder surface. at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, branch to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole, and connect to the input circuit or output circuit becomes. Therefore, there is no need to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the laterally separated input and output circuits. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components. are connected by wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through-holes, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components during this period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-22, the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit or output circuit connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-20, on the game control board, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board are mounted in the vicinity of the upper side in the figure, and a data bus is installed. The wiring pattern is formed in an area near the lower side of the game control board in the figure, that is, in an area near the other side opposite to the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic parts such as input circuits and output circuits is ensured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 for signal input/output with electronic parts outside the game control board. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component, which has relatively low importance among the input components used for game control (not triggering the lottery). A first input circuit that detects the input of a sensor or switch detection signal, etc.), an input signal from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (sensor or switch detection signal that triggers the lottery, an advantageous A second input circuit that detects input such as a detection signal that changes the set value that defines the speed, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the operation of the movable parts such as solenoids and motors according to the progress of the game A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game, such as various indicators and LEDs, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer A second output circuit that outputs output signals to parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when playing the game for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit is implemented for outputting an output signal to a performance indicator for displaying performance.

A first output circuit, a first output circuit, a second output circuit, and a third output circuit among these input circuits and output circuits are connected to a data bus, and transmission of input data and transmission of output data are performed via the data bus. is done.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branches to the mounting surface side through through holes at multiple points, and is vertically mounted on the mounting surface. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface through the through hole at the position N in the figure is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to the terminals of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side once through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through the through hole again at the position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the input circuit of the input circuit and output circuit connected by a shared data bus has a wiring pattern length from the output circuit to the game control microcomputer. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for game control is less susceptible to noise and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, an output signal is output to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game. has a shorter wiring pattern length to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. are connected to the data bus so that Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which affects the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator is Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that performs display according to the progress of the game Connected to a bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display by arranging illegal parts or the like.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through-hole at the position Q in the drawing, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, changes according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device It is connected to an external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, by utilizing the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side. and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is formed simply.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. It may be configured such that it is connected to terminals of two output circuits, and branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. Even with such a configuration, it is desirable to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through-holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, so that the output corresponding to the progress of the game can be performed on the mounting surface side. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to a plurality of output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface for branching to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

Among the input circuits, the second input circuit is not connected to the data bus and transmits input data directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole once at the position of T in the figure, U in the figure It is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position of , and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

Thus, the first input circuit for detecting the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, communicates with the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that is connected but detects input of an input signal from a second input component having higher importance than the first input component is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is designed to be connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without intermediary, the input data based on the important input signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit for transmitting the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for the control of the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, the game control microcomputer Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the input Data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment is configured such that the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than, and with such a configuration, based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the input circuit, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit for outputting an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from a game control microcomputer; a second output circuit for outputting an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, the first output circuit comprising: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game outputs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the part, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part according to the progress from being affected.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment is configured such that the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit. A second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game. Also, since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be short, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., and affecting the display according to the progress of the game. can.

Also, like the game control board of the first embodiment, a first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and a first ground area where high voltage components are mounted on the right side. When two ground areas are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground area because it belongs to the low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit in the area, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground area together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, thereby preventing a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic parts are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through through holes is used to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. The wiring pattern is branched into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the solder surface. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device are branched, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the soldering surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. A first input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer A second input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the 2 input components to the game control microcomputer, and a first output component and a second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer It includes a first output circuit and a second output circuit that output an output signal, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit and the second output circuit are connected to a game control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data bus from being affected by noise from electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected to each other by a branched wiring pattern on the mounting surface opposite to the soldering surface on which the data bus is formed through through-holes. and According to such a configuration, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) than the other side. According to such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the substrate area can be effectively utilized. .

In the game control board of this embodiment, a performance indicator for displaying the performance of the gaming machine is mounted, and the third output circuit for outputting an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to another indicator. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device, the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display device to the game control microcomputer Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify display contents by arranging illegal parts.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the component orientations are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Also, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example exemplified for the first embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be described. As in the first and second embodiments, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. It should be noted that the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the mounted electronic components and the through holes, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through holes will be described.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and (B) is a , and a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and below the specified electronic component, as shown in FIGS. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the substrate and are used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, is provided. Moreover, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component. An electronic component having only connection terminals without fixing terminals may be applied as the specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided in the game control board consist of normal through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in Fig. 30-24(A), a normal through-hole is plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. It is a through hole that conducts at On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-24(B), a specific through-hole is a through-hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole is not copper-plated and the through-hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface. be.

Normally, when soldering to the through-hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in Fig. 30-24(A), since the inside of the through-hole is copper-plated, the solder inside the through-hole does not reach the mounting surface. Although it will flow up, when soldering to a specific through hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in FIG. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 through the specific through holes, inserting the connection terminals through the normal through holes, and soldering them from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted through the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent troubles such as the model number printed or stamped above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder due to excessive rise to the mounting surface side where the component is mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, even if the part is illegally replaced, there is a risk that it will not be discovered. Also, if the model number is hidden in the model test, it will not be possible to specify the component configuration, and the test will not be approved. There is a risk that the terminal will not be able to receive the terminal, or that installation at the amusement arcade will not be approved because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the amusement arcade. Such a problem can be prevented by fixing with .

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for transmitting signals or electric power of specific electronic components, problems arise even if the electrical connection is weakened when they are soldered to the specific through-holes. never On the other hand, the connection terminals are usually inserted through the through-holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so that the solder reaches the mounting surface to ensure electrical connection.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A specific through-hole is formed in which a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components is fixed by inserting a terminal into the through-hole penetrating the surface and the soldering surface and soldering the through-hole and the terminal, The specific through-hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through-hole does not allow electrical continuity between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. In this case, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a problem.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the terminals for fixing the specific electronic parts (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, the specific through-holes are soldered to the specific through-holes for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2), so that the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, problems do not occur even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2) for fixing the specific electronic parts are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. Terminals (connecting terminals) that propagate signals and power of components may be inserted and soldered. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of a terminal that propagates a signal or power of a specific electronic component with another terminal.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or stamped) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the model number of the specific electronic part from being hidden due to excessive solder rising to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. In addition, the same or similar configurations as those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in the first and second embodiments are also applicable to the third embodiment.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As described above, the characteristic portion 053SG includes the following inventions. That is, conventionally, for example, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, etc., game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines generally have a board on which electronic devices are mounted, A substrate of this type has been proposed in which data is input/output using a single data bus between control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of wiring patterns. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is preferably formed, the game machine of (1) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the output circuit.
According to this feature, the input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the output circuit for outputting the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (2) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through-hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface on which the data bus is formed (solder surface) by a branched wiring pattern. Characterized by
According to this feature, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side) of the board (game control board), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) facing the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, since an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, the board area can be effectively utilized.

The gaming machine of (5) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator for displaying the performance of the game machine is mounted on the board (game control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is more likely than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another indicator. (microcomputer) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern up to the control means than the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the other indicators. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally alter the display content by arranging the

The gaming machine of (6) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
It is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the substrate so that the component directions are different.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (7) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The game machine of (8) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the second output circuit (second output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game is connected to the second electronic component that displays the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the output data can move according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the operation of the unit from being affected.

The game machine of (9) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected from the data bus through through holes. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). and a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the wiring pattern on the first surface connected to the data bus formed on the second surface through the through-hole is used to output the output according to the progress of the game on the first surface side. Since the output signal corresponding to the wiring pattern and the progress of the game is branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, it is formed on the second surface to branch to the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern respectively. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The game machine of (10) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from a circuit (first input circuit) and a second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control A second input circuit (second input circuit) to be transmitted to a microcomputer), and a third electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) (first output component, second output an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component),
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without passing through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The game machine of (11) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit for transmission to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The game machine of (12) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the first output circuit (first output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit for outputting an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the first output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the display corresponding to the progress of the game is displayed. can be prevented from affecting

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls circulated and lent out according to the player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

As the gaming machine of the present invention, there is also a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result. ), comprising a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game balls P) and a payout section (eg, payout device 200) capable of dispensing game media. , a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) for guiding game media in the storage portion to the payout portion; 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204), and a cover portion (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion. 330), game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game, and production execution means (for example, for executing production based on the production control command) capable of executing production based on information from the game control means and a performance control CPU 120, etc.), and the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped on the cover portion are restricted from falling to the guide passage forming portion. A predetermined restricting portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) is provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24) for A plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided for restricting the movement of the screw member to the payout portion (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), and the game control means Determination means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of step S110) for determining to establish the advantageous state, and determination means (for example, the processing of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is established prior to the determination by the determination means. ), state control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of step 059AKS025) that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and when the determination means is in the advantageous state Information transmitting means (for example, CPU 103 for transmitting a performance control command) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state when determined to the performance executing means; wherein, when a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means changes the state from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result. control (for example, executing the processing of step 059AKS025), and the determination means can determine that the state control means enters the special state before controlling to the special state (for example, step 059AKS001 processing, etc.), and the information transmission means can transmit special information that can specify that the special state is controlled when the determination means determines that the special state is established (for example, "failure ( Time saving)" display result designation command can be transmitted), and the effect execution means can execute a look-ahead effect based on the determination result information when the determination result information is received (for example, step S161 processing can be executed), and when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, step 059AKS082 determines Yes If so, the processing of step 059, AKS084 and step S1304 is executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. Further, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In other words, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to break down by preventing the screw member from falling and mixing into the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion, and the effect execution means can specify that it is controlled to a special state. In order to limit the execution of the prefetch effect based on the judgment result information when the judgment result information is received after receiving the special information, the judgment result information judged after being controlled to the special state It is possible to avoid a situation in which the look-ahead performance rather lowers the interest in the game, such as knowing in advance that the judgment result is to be played by the execution of the look-ahead performance. In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine that is less likely to break down when installed in a game arcade and less likely to lose interest in the game.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a game machine capable of preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion, and also capable of improving the amusement of the game, a variable display is performed and specified as a result of the variable display. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player when a display result is displayed, and includes game control means (for example, a CPU 103, etc.) for controlling the progress of a game; Effect execution means capable of executing effects based on information from the game control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing effects based on the effect control command), and the game control means is the advantageous state and determination means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) to determine whether to etc.), state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of step 059AKS025) that can be controlled to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and when the determination means determines that the advantageous state is reached. Information transmitting means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state to the effect execution means (for example, CPU 103 for transmitting effect control commands), When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, the process of step 059AKS025, etc.), the determination means can determine that the state control means enters the special state before the state control means controls to the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed). Etc.), the information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determination means determines that the special state is reached (for example, "loss (time saving)" display result specifying command can be transmitted), and the effect execution means can execute a prefetch effect based on the determination result information when the determination result information is received (for example, the processing of step S161 can be executed). possible, etc.), when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, if it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS082, step 059AKS084 and step S1304, etc.). An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 33). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 33), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 31). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 31) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, there is provided a ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 33).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 33).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

32 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls to the first and second big prize openings (attackers). Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls won by winning the 2nd starting prize mouth (electric chew) and the number of prize balls by winning the 1st big prize mouth and the 2nd big prize mouth (attacker) account for the total number of prize balls. percentage. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), after executing the initialization process (step S6), the setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is established in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the setting is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is established in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by the operation of the staff of the game arcade, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 35 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes a process to measure . Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is detected. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production as a production operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state has passed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this small winning opening process, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 37 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 37 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 37 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, it is determined so that the probability that the special figure display result will be "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state will be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 38 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The process of waiting for the start of variable display in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production processing during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit middle production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the small-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the small-hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small-hit mid-performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the performance process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end performance. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. After that, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small winning end production process is ended.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big win game state, and executes various effect control in the big win game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is changed to "7", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

In addition, the game can be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, it includes a ratio of "0%" for one and a ratio of "100%" or less than "100%" for the other.

(Description of characteristic part regarding setting suggestion effect)
Characteristic portions relating to setting suggestion effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below. In this characteristic portion, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect that suggests the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 at a predetermined rate during execution of the variable display.

FIG. 40-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination processing makes it possible to decide the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggesting effect.

After the announcement effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, a notice production control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various production executions. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result of the notice effect determination process in step S202. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the notice production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be.

When the production control pattern is determined by step S203, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initialization of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of RAM122 A value is set (step S204). Also, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step S205). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step S203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

Subsequently, a pending display update setting at the start of variable display is set (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part corresponding to the pending number "1" (the display part at the left end) is erased (digested), and the other pending numbers "2" to The hold display in the display portion corresponding to "4" etc. is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 40-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed (step S221). Whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super reach is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example.

When the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol for non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is terminated. During non-reach, the variable display result is "losing". The normal reach includes a case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a case where the variable display result is "loss". In the non-ready-to-win state in which the variable display mode of the decoration design does not become the ready-to-win mode, the fixed decoration design of the non-ready-to-win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop design. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R are different (mismatched) ornamental symbols. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decoration pattern of the reach-losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reach-losing. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R have the same (matching) ornamental symbol. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "big hit", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win. The final stop symbols at the time of the big hit are determined to be the same (matching) decoration symbols in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

When the ready-to-win effect of super-ready-to-win is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol for super-to-win is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "loss". At the time of super reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decoration pattern of the reach losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reaching losing. When the variable display result is "big win", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win.

At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing", the same (matching) decorative design in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R is It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decoration pattern. The left and right decoration patterns that constitute such a reach-losing combination or a big-hit combination are also called reach patterns. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-win patterns may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decoration pattern corresponding to the number may be only the effect image showing the number, or may be the effect image showing various characters in addition to the number. The ready-to-win pattern is determined as one of a plurality of decorative patterns by referring to a ready-to-win pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the ready-to-win pattern. You can do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the ready-to-win pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, when the variable display result is "losing", the determination rate of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As it becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative design becomes lower, and the determination ratio of the decorative design corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "big hit", the decision rate of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2, number 3, number 4, number 5, and number 6 are the lowest. As the number becomes , the ratio of determining the decorative pattern increases, and the determining ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number of 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result is "big win" and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is the highest. , 5, 4, 3, and 2, the variable display result when stop-displayed as a ready-to-win pattern becomes "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state is low. Thus, when the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result becomes "big win", and the ratio of control to the big win game state becomes the lowest. In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win", the same number of determination values may be assigned to decorative patterns to be ready-to-win symbols. The number of determination values assigned to each decorative design to be a ready-to-win pattern may be different, or the number of determination values to be assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative design to be a ready-to-win design. Depending on the type of jackpot, the determination ratio of decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may be different.

After step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decoration symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. If the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S225). Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by, for example, referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution. You can do so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . As the presence/absence of the setting suggesting effect, one of "no effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is not executed, or "with effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is executed is determined.

Based on the result of determination in step S225, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect (step S226). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is not to be executed, that is, "no effect" (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "there is an effect" (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is specified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 may receive a setting value notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11 side when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . Accordingly, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, after determining the suggested setting pattern (step S228), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random values for determining the suggested setting pattern. It should be determined by The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 40-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. For example, the ROM 121 pre-stores table data constituting a determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 40-3 as a setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01 or the like. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of "with effect" for executing the setting suggesting effect is higher than when the variable display result is "losing". In the setting of such a determination ratio, when the setting suggesting performance is executed, the variable display result becomes ``big hit'' and the ratio of being controlled to the big winning game state becomes higher than when the setting suggesting performance is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion effect execution determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big hit". .

FIG. 40-4(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggested contents depending on whether or not the symbol display color is to be changed, and the display color when it is to be changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win symbol, and can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper color, silver color, and gold color in addition to the normal display color red. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the player has a low expectation, which is an advantageous set value. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting confirmation of 6, which is the highest setting. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 according to whether or not the pattern display color has changed and the pattern display color after the change.

FIG. 40-4(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 pre-stores table data constituting a determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 40-4(B) as a suggested setting pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern varies depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

When the setting suggesting performance using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of control to the big win game state is high. When the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the degree of expectation, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low, and when the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-2, the degree of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is high, and when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-3, the set value is the highest. 6 is determined. In this way, the ready-to-win symbols when the variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode include a symbol display mode for suggesting control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode for 7. A symbol display mode for suggesting the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 while suggesting the control of the jackpot game state such as decoration symbols corresponding to the numbers is included. When the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win pattern is displayed in the normal display color to suggest control of the jackpot game state, and then the pattern display color is changed. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are continuously made, and suggestions regarding the set values are made.

The setting-suggestion effect can be executed in different effect modes according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the pattern display color is not changed to copper because the pattern RE-1 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, as a pattern display mode when the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the pattern display color is changed to copper color or not. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the pattern display color is not changed to gold because the pattern RE-3 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is changed to gold as the symbol display mode when the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. It depends on whether or not it is changed to

The setting suggesting effect is to change the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decoration symbol stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win symbol, instead of changing the symbol display color, or in addition to changing the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape and pattern of the decoration pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, the display of a background image, an outer frame image, and other arbitrary effect images, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of the movable members for effects, and the like. It may be one that changes the rendering mode by any rendering device, such as a combination of some or all. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko game machine 1 are arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data combining these are predetermined for effect execution. It suffices if it can be executed when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of suggested setting patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the game is controlled to the big win game state, and a pattern that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to the big win game state. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is "loss", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display It may be possible to make the decision possible only when the result is a "big hit" and to make the decision impossible when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the current setting.

FIG. 40-5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked. It is sufficient that various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step S242). If it is the notice effect period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step S243). If it is not the notice effect period (step S242; No), or after performing the control of step S243, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244). When it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the ready-to-win performance after changing the symbol display color is executed after the decoration pattern to be the ready-to-win pattern is stop-displayed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are made, and the pachinko game machine 1 is operated. Suggestions regarding settings can be made.

When it is not the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; No), or after performing the control of step S245, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be determined in advance as an effect execution period for changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. When it is the change effect period (step S246; Yes), control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). If it is not a change effect period (step S246; No), after performing the control of step S247, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. In addition, the variable of the decorative pattern After performing control for executing an effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect processing during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to different time lengths according to the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when an effect (advantageous effect) is executed, the player shoots an image or video of the effect with a portable terminal owned by the player, and sends it to SNS (Social There is a tendency to post on membership registration websites such as Networking Service and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, the effect (unfavorable effect) that is often performed even in a disadvantageous situation does not arouse the desire to shoot, so if the execution period of the disadvantageous effect is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the photographing time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking an effect that is advantageous to the player, and to secure the shooting time. In addition, since the photographing time can be secured, the photographed images and moving images are made public by the players on the Internet, and public interest in the pachinko game machine 1 can be heightened. In addition, in many cases, since the pictures including which pachinko game machine 1 in which game hall were photographed are disclosed, from the game hall side, the game hall is advertised by the player. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, synergistic effects are brought about not only for the player but also for the game arcade side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a design confirmation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S249). If no pattern confirmation command is received (step S249; No), the effect process during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the design confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop design (determined decoration design) which is the display result in the variable display of the decoration design (step S250). Subsequently, a certain period of time is set in advance as a wait time for receiving a jackpot start designation command (step S251). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S252), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 40-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 40-6(A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the form of variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win is established. When the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the ready-to-win is established and the ready-to-win performance of the normal ready-to-win is executed. FIG. 40-6(B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which the ready-to-win effect of normal reach is advanced to the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decoration pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect image in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is displayed. FIG. 40-6(C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed. An effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the stop-displayed ready-to-win pattern. In addition, by displaying an effect image announcing a message such as "Change the symbol display color!", a suggestion to change the symbol display color is made.

FIG. 40-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the pattern display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 40-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color changes to copper by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 40-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to silver by the pattern RE-2. FIG. 40-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to gold according to the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the ready-to-win pattern does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and remains red, which is the normal display color. In this way, a failure effect (fake effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the player's expectation, which is an advantageous set value, is low. In effect execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. In effect execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. In effect execution example HD114, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to gold, suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is fixed.

The setting suggesting effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit by any desired effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a pre-reading notice effect, in addition to a change effect in which the display color of the ready-to-win pattern can be changed, and the set value of the pachinko game machine 1. You may enable it to make a suggestion about. It may be an effect in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested after the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is performed during execution of the variable display. In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, a case where the suggestion regarding the control of the big win game state is continuously made after making the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state, or the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state is continuously made and the pachinko game is performed. It may also include a case of suggesting a set value of the gaming machine 1 . In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, after making a suggestion about the control of the big win game state, when the suggestion ends, and when the suggestion about the control of the big win game state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is made. It may include a case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by suggesting the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate. can be diversified to improve amusement.

During execution of the variable display, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state may be made, while suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the pachinko machine executes a big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and a big hit effect (such as a effect corresponding to the first round and the second round). A setting value of 1 may be suggested. There may be a case where the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

In place of part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, or together with part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, a suggestion about control of a state advantageous to the player different from the big win game state is provided. can be anything. For example, it may suggest a variable probability state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 059AK)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing portion 059AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-1 to 41-35. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 059AK of the present embodiment is not limited to after the jackpot game state, but also when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a variable display result, time saving control is performed (becomes a time saving state). As for the display result of the special game, the time-saving patterns are stopped and displayed in both the normal state and the time-saving state, but in the time-saving state, the time-saving control is not newly performed even when the time-saving patterns are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, as for the decoration patterns, different patterns are stopped and displayed in the normal state and the time saving state. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 059AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic description above will be omitted.

FIG. 41-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 059AK of this embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scrolling display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and ordinary symbols, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation. In addition, the "variable display" of the special pattern includes one that sequentially lights or blinks a plurality of LEDs, and as a display result, a predetermined LED lighting combination is displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display). included.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start-up winning opening which is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory. In addition, in the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is executed, and the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved. Then, in the time-saving state, so-called right-handed hitting is performed to shoot the game ball to the game area on the right side for the player so as to enter the game ball into the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. good.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82, and forms a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is. In the jackpot game state, so-called right-handed hitting is performed to shoot the game ball to the game area on the right side so as to enter the game ball into the big prize hole formed by the special variable ball game device 7 .

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 41-1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at left and right upper positions of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 41-1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B.

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 41-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When starting the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on ( step S1201). When it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is ON (step S2101; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the first special figure. It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S1202). At this time, the CPU 103 is the stored value of the first special figure reservation storage number counter (counter for counting the number of first special figure reservation storage) provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit etc.) of the RAM 102 By reading the special figure reservation storage number count value, it is sufficient if the first special figure reservation number can be specified. If it is determined in step S1202 that the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step S1202; No), the CPU 103 stores a starting opening buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit, etc.). The starting port buffer value, which is a value, is set to "1" (step S1203).

If it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S1201 (step S1201; No) or if it is determined that the number of first special figure reservation storage has reached the upper limit in step S1202 (step S1202; If Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is ON (step S1204). When it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is ON (step S1204; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the second special figure. It is determined whether or not the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S1205). At this time, the CPU 103 is the stored value of the second special figure reservation storage number counter (counter for counting the number of second special figure reservation storage) provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit etc.) of the RAM 102 By reading the special figure reservation storage number count value, it is sufficient if the second special figure reservation number can be specified. If it is determined in step S1205 that the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step S1205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start opening buffer value to "2" (step S1206). If it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is not on (step S1204; No) or if it is determined that the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit (step S1205; Yes), the CPU 103, Terminate the starting prize determination process.

After executing either of the processing of step S1203 or S1206, the CPU 103 updates the special figure pending storage number count value according to the start opening buffer value so as to add 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first special figure pending storage number count value is added by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second special figure pending storage number count value is added. Add 1. In this way, the count value of the first special figure reserved storage number is increased by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. (increment). In addition, the second special figure pending memory number count value is increased by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. (increment). At this time, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting section, etc.) of the RAM 102, is updated so as to add 1 (step S1208).

After executing the process of step S1208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S1209). As an example, in the process of step S1209, random number circuit 104 or RAM102 predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) out of the numerical data updated by a random counter or the like, random for special figure display result determination Numerical data representing the numerical value MR1, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored as pending data by being set at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure pending storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (step S1210). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is "1", the pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage unit. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is "2", the suspension data is set in the second special figure suspension storage unit. In addition, at this time, when the pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the first pending indicator 25A to specify the number of the first special figure pending storage added by one. (For example, the number of lit LEDs may be increased by one). In addition, when the pending data is set in the second special figure pending storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second pending display 25B to display the second special figure pending storage number added by one. You may make it carry out to the 2nd suspension indicator 25B (for example, the lighting number of LED is increased by one).

The first special figure reservation storage unit stores a special figure game (first special The pending data of the special figure game using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc., as pending data. is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Thus, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (Special figure display result) Based on whether it is decided to control to the big hit game state, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, ready-to-win effect etc.) Hold to make it possible to determine memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the first special figure reservation storage unit and the display position of the reservation display pattern (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond. Therefore, when the pending data is stored in the first special figure pending storage unit, the pending display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the pending number associated with this pending data. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", the pending display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first pending display portion 5HL. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display pattern is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first pending display portion 5HL. do.

The second special figure reservation storage unit stores a special figure game (the second It stores the pending data of the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 4B. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), based on the establishment of the second start condition due to the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc., as pending data. It stores until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Thus, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (Special figure display result) Based on whether it is decided to control to the big hit game state, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, ready-to-win effect etc.) Hold to make it possible to determine memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the second special figure reservation storage unit and the display position of the reservation display pattern (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond. Therefore, when the pending data is stored in the second special figure pending storage unit, the pending display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the pending number associated with this pending data. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", the pending display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second pending display portion 5HR. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display pattern is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second pending display portion 5HR. do.

After executing the processing of step S1210, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a starting opening winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S1211). After that, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a reserved storage count notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S1212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step S1213). As described above, the winning-time random value determination process is a process for performing a determination at the time of initial winning. This is the process of determining whether the variable display result of the variable display to be executed is a "big hit" or "small hit" and the variation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 40-5). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the startup buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S1214). At this time, if it is determined that the start buffer value is "2" (step S1214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the start buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" ( Step S1215), the starting winning judgment process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start buffer value is "1" (step S1214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start buffer and initializes its stored value to "0". From (step S1216), the process proceeds to step S1204. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 41-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S1213 of FIG. 41-2 as the winning random number determination processing. In the present embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing is performed to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as "big hit" or "small hit". A determination is made as to whether or not to control the state or the small winning game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, determination of variation patterns corresponding to the variable display mode of the decoration pattern, etc. are performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the random value determination process at the time of winning, the game ball is extracted at the start winning timing when it is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Determination of whether or not the variable display result of the variable display to be executed of the random value obtained (random value extracted in the process of step S1209) is a "big hit" or "small hit", and determination of whether or not the variable display of the decorative pattern Determine which variation pattern will be (so-called "look ahead"). As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening (before the condition for starting the special symbol game is established), the special symbol display result is "big hit" or A "small hit" or a variable display mode of decorative patterns becomes a predetermined display mode is read in advance, and based on the result of the read-ahead, the performance control CPU 120 or the like on the side of the performance control board 12 controls the pending display. The display mode and the like can be determined.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. ) or the state of the variable probability flag (the flag that is turned on when the variable probability state), etc., to specify the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S351). The CPU 103 checks whether or not the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a jackpot game state by, for example, confirming the value of a special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (game control flag control unit, etc.) of the RAM 102. identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 may be specified as a jackpot game state.

Following the process of step S351, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the identified game state is a big win, that is, a big win game state (step S352). If it is determined that it is not in the middle of a big hit (step S352; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether it is in a high base in which high opening control accompanying time saving control is performed in the variable probability state or time saving state (step S353 ). When it is determined that the high base is in progress (step S353; Yes), or when it is determined in the process of step S352 that the jackpot is in progress (step S352; Yes), the CPU 103 determines that the start buffer value is "2". It is determined whether or not there is (step S354). When it is determined that the start buffer value is not "2" (step S354; No), the CPU 103 performs setting for limiting the winning determination (step S356).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start buffer value is "2" (step S354; Yes), or when it is determined in the process of step S353 that the high base is not in progress (step S353; No), the CPU 103 From the 1 special figure display result determination table or the 2nd special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result corresponding to the start opening buffer value ("1" or "2") and the current game state is used to determine the special figure display result A figure display result determination table is selected (step S355).

Following the processing of step S355, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357). CPU103, for example, individual determination value included in the jackpot determination range, by comparing the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted by the process of step S1209 shown in FIG. 41-2, It may be determined whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be "big hit" (jackpot start determination). can.

In addition, in the process of step S357, for example, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S1210, and uses the read random number value MR1 to perform the above determination. In addition, the CPU 103 holds the random number MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (area other than the special figure reservation storage unit) or the storage area of the CPU 103 separately from step S1210, and the above determination based on the held random number may be performed. This also applies to the random number value MR3, which will be described later. Thus, the random number value used in the random number determination process at the time of winning need not be the random number value stored in the special figure reservation storage unit.

When it is determined in the process of step S357 that the jackpot determination range is reached (step S357; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S358). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the big hit type determination table. The CPU 103 refers to the selected jackpot type determination table data to determine which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Following the process of step S358, the CPU 103 selects a later-described jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 41-11) prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 and sets it in the use table (step S359). The big hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern that will result in a "big hit" as a variable display result, and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value to be compared with the random number MR3.

When it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range in the process of step S357 (step S357; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step S360). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S305. , and whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range.

If it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), a small hit variation pattern determination table prepared by storing it in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 (see FIG. 41-11 (B)) is selected and set in the use table (step S362). The small hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is a "small hit", and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value to be compared with the random number MR3. .

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S360; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined time reduction determination range (step 059AKS001). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the jackpot determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "losing (time saving)" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S355. By doing so, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the working hours determination range. In addition, although the special figure display result of "losing (time saving)" is "losing", the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result that performs time saving control from the variable display that is performed after the stop display. show.

When it is determined that it is within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time saving type based on the random number MR2 (step 059AKS002). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , Select table data for time saving type determination from the time saving type determination table shown in FIG. 41-7. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of types the time saving type is determined by referring to the selected table data for determining the time saving type.

Following the processing of step 059AKS002, the CPU 103 is prepared by storing it in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, etc., and the time saving start flag is turned on to be described later. is selected and set in the use table (step 059AKS002A). The time saving start flag ON loss variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display in which the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed although the variable display result is "loss", and each variation pattern has a random value MR3. is assigned a decision value that is compared to In step 059AKS002A, depending on the time saving type, select either the loss variation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is turned on in FIG. 41-12 (A) or the loss variation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is turned on in FIG. do it.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; No), the time saving start flag OFF time loss variation pattern determination table prepared by storing it in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 (Fig. 41-12 ( B)) is selected and set in the use table (step 059AKS002B).

After executing any of step S309, step S312, step 059AKS002A, and step 059AKS002B, the CPU 103 is set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S1209. With reference to either the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit variation pattern determination table, the loss variation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is on, or the loss variation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is off, the determined value that matches the random value MR3. The assigned variation pattern is determined (step S363). For example, the CPU 103 compares the individual determined values assigned to each variation pattern with the random number MR3 one by one to determine whether there is a determined value that matches the random number MR3, thereby determining the variation pattern. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit) and maximum value (upper limit) of the determined value assigned to each variation pattern, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR3 and the minimum value of the determined value A variation pattern may be determined by comparing with the maximum value.

After executing either of the processes of steps S356 and S363, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the start winning command having the content corresponding to the determination result of steps S358, 059AKS002 and step S363 (step S364), and Terminate the numerical value determination process. The starting winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure reservation memory number designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command. When the starting opening buffer value is "1", the starting winning command is the first starting winning designation command, the first special figure reserved memory number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation. Configure the transmission settings for commands and When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second starting winning designation command, the second special figure pending memory number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation as the start winning command Configure the transmission settings for commands and Commands set for transmission are transmitted in the command control process.

The 1st special figure pending storage number specification command and the 2nd special figure pending storage number specification command to be set for transmission are the commands that specify the current 1st special figure pending storage number and the 2nd special figure pending storage number A command containing the corresponding EXT data), and the number of special figure pending storage to be specified may be specified by the count value of the first special figure pending storage number counter or the second special figure pending storage number counter. When the determination result of step S357 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the symbol designation command to be transmitted is a command designating that the determination result of the variable display result is "big hit" ("big hit"). command including the corresponding EXT data), and when the determination result of step S357 is the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), the command specifying that the determination result of the variable display result is "small hit" (" A command containing EXT data corresponding to "small hit"), and when the determination result of step 059AKS001 is within the time reduction determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the determination result of the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" The command to be specified (command containing EXT data corresponding to "loss (time saving)"), and when the determination result of step 059AKS001 is not within the time saving determination range (step S360; No), the determination result of the variable display result is "loss" When the judgment result of step S354 is that the starting buffer value is 1 (step S354; No), the judgment at the time of starting winning is performed. A command (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment") may be used to designate that "no judgment" is not made. The variation pattern determination result specification command to be set for transmission is a command that specifies the variation pattern that is the determination result determined in step S363 (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern that is the determination result), and the determination result in step S354 is When the start buffer value is 1 (step S354; No), a command (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment") specifying that "no judgment" is made when the judgment at the time of starting winning is not performed; do it.

In the random number determination process at the time of winning, as described above, regarding the variable display corresponding to the random number MR1 to 3 extracted in step S1209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special game) is "big hit" or "small hit". Whether or not there will be a "hit" or "losing (time saving)" and the variation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 41-10) are determined, and so-called look-ahead is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current game state, and not based on the game state when the variable display is actually executed. Variable display results and variation patterns can be predicted with precision. In addition, in the random number determination process at the time of winning, when it is determined that it is a big hit in the process of step S352, or based on the fact that it is determined that it is during time saving control in the process of step S353, it is started by the process of step S354 Determine whether the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, when the start buffer value is "1" and not "2", the processing of step S355 and the like is not executed, and the processing proceeds to step S364, and the start winning determination is not performed. Thus, when the high opening control accompanying the time-saving control is performed, or when the jackpot game state, the starting winning (first starting winning) due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening based on the occurrence of each of the above Restricts judgment from being made. As a result, when the special game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure, the first start winning prize is obtained during the time saving control or in the jackpot game state. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by restricting the execution of prefetch based on.

FIG. 41-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 36 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 41-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step S1231). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S1231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the RAM 102 may be read, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure suspension storage number is other than "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; No), the suspension stored corresponding to the suspension number "1" in the second special figure suspension storage unit 151B As data, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the process of step S1232, for example, by updating the second reservation storage number count value by subtracting 1, the second special figure reservation storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reservation storage The pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (step S1233). Further, in the process of step S1233, the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter in the RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure specification buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure specification buffer is updated to "2" (step S1234).

When the second special figure pending memory number is "0" at step S1231 (step S1231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step S1235). The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S1235, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the RAM 102 may be read, and whether or not the read value is "0" may be determined. Thus, the process of step S1235 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" in step S1231, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It is sufficient if it can be determined whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step S1235 (step S235; No), the hold stored corresponding to the holding number "1" at the first special figure pending storage unit 151A As data, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the process of step S1236, for example, by updating by subtracting 1 the number count value of the first reserved storage, and updating so as to subtract 1 the number of the first special figure pending storage, the first special figure pending storage In the unit 151A, the pending data indicated by the random numbers MR1 and MR2 stored in the entries below the pending number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") are shifted upward by one entry. (Step S1237). Further, in the process of step S1237, the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter in the RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure specification buffer value is updated to "1" (step S1238).

After executing either of the processes of steps S1234 and S1238, a variable Select and set the special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value (step S1239). For example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 41-5 (A) is set to the use table. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 41-5 (B) is set to the use table. Further, the CPU 103 may select table data for special figure display result determination corresponding to the current gaming state.

The first special symbol display result determination table determines the variable display result before the fixed special symbol, which is the variable display result, is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control to the big hit game state as "big win", whether to control to the small win game state as the variable display result as "small win", and the variable display result as "losing (time saving)" and then variable It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control from the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special symbol display result determination table determines the variable display result before deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol as the variable display result in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control to the big hit game state as "big win", whether to control to the small win game state as the variable display result as "small win", and the variable display result as "losing (time saving)" and then variable It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control from the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

In the first special figure display result determination table, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), the special figure display result A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determination is assigned to special figure display results of "big win", "minor win", "losing (time saving)", and "losing". In the second special figure display result determination table, depending on whether the game state is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), a random value for special figure display result determination A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with MR1 is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "losing (time saving)", and "losing".

In the first special figure display result decision table and the second special figure display result decision table, the table data showing the decision value to be compared with the random number MR1 for deciding the special figure display result is the special figure display result as "jackpot". Whether to control to the jackpot game state or whether to control the special figure display result as "losing (time saving)" from the next variable display to the time saving state. In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) A lot of decision values are assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, compared to the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is a "big hit" and the big hit game Controlling the state increases the probability of being determined. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the variable probability state, compared to the normal state and the time saving state, the big hit The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of being determined to control to the game state increases. In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table sets the special figure display result as "loss (time saving)" from the next variable display Data for determination is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control to the time saving state increases. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state, the ratio of the special figure display result to be "losing (time saving)" is high.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the special figure display result of "minor hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, when the variable display result is determined based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, In the case of determining the variable display result based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special symbol display result is The ratio determined to control to the small hit game state as "small hit" can be made different.

In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state, so for example, time saving state (low probability high base state) or probability variation In a game state such as a state (high-probability-high-base state) in which game balls tend to enter the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a small-hit game state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball is prevented. By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent the decline in the interest in the game due to the delay of the game. Also in the second special figure display result determination table, a predetermined range of determination values different from those set in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small win". . For example, in the second special figure display result determination table, a smaller decision value than in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small win". In this way, when it is in a high base state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state, even if the ratio determined to be controlled to a small winning game state is lower than when it is a low base state such as a normal state or a variable probability state without time saving good. Alternatively, the special figure display result may be determined with reference to a common special figure display result determination table regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied.

Following the processing of step S1239 shown in FIG. 41-4, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the variable random number buffer is converted to "big hit", "small hit", "losing ( Compared with the determined value assigned to each special figure display result of "Time saving)", "Loss", the special figure display result is either "big hit", "small hit", "losing (time saving)" or "losing" (step S1240).

Since the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current game state is selected in step S1239, in the processing of step S1240, the game state when the variable display of the special figure game etc. is started is the probability variable state. Depending on whether or not, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "jackpot" using different determining data. For example, when the game state when the variable display of a special figure game is started is the normal state or the time saving state, the game state is the normal state in the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table. Alternatively, the table data corresponding to the time saving state is selected as the data for normal determination, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined by referring to this. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of a special figure game or the like is started is the probability variable state, the game state is the probability variable state in the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table. The table data corresponding to the case is selected as the data for special determination, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined by referring to this.

After determining the special figure display result in step S1240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step S1241). Then, when it is determined to be a "jackpot" (step S1241; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step S1242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 41-6 is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step S1243).

The jackpot type determination table determines the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types based on the jackpot type determination random number MR2 when it is determined to control to the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". is a table referenced by In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuation) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol Depending on whether it is a special game by the symbol display device 4B, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a plurality of types such as "non-probability variation", "probability variation", and "accurate probability". It is assigned to the jackpot type of.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, the allocation of the decision value to the jackpot type of "Sudden Probability" differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the determined value of the predetermined range (the value in the range of "82" to "99") is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability", while the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, no decision value has been assigned to the "suddenly" jackpot type. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to be "probably" can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the jackpot type as "suddenly" to the short-term open big hit state, so for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, the normal variable winning ball device In a game state in which game balls easily enter the second start winning hole formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the delay of the game. .

In addition, even if the variable special figure is the second special figure, even if the determined value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the "probable" jackpot type good. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than when the variable special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the "sudden probability" jackpot type. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, common table data may be referenced to determine the jackpot type.

By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in step S1243 shown in FIG. Depending on which one of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "probability variable" and "probability" matches, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be (step S1244).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S1244, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is either a time saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time saving state. It is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a result of variable display whether to control to . Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (step S1245), etc., the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0" if the jackpot type is "variable odds", "1" if it is "variable odds", and "2" if it is "variable odds".

When it is determined that it is not a "big hit" at step S1241 (step S1241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S1246). Then, when it is determined to be a "small hit" (step S1246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to ON state (step S1247).

If it is determined that it is not a "small hit" in step S1246 (step S1246; No), the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" (hereinafter simply referred to as "time saving"). It is determined whether or not there is (step 059AKS003). Then, when it is determined to be "time saving" (step 059AKS003; Yes), the CPU 103 uses the time saving type determination shown in FIG. As in the case of selecting and setting the table and determining the jackpot type, the time saving type is determined based on the random number MR2 (step 059AKS004).

The time saving type determination table shown in FIG. 41-7 is based on MR2, which is common with the random number for determining the jackpot type, when it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the time saving state as "loss (time saving)". It is a table referred to in order to determine time saving classification to one of a plurality of kinds. In the time saving type determination table, the special symbol in which variable display (variation) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol Depending on whether it is a special game by the symbol display device 4B, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for determining the time saving type is a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “time saving A” to “time saving D”. assigned to. As illustrated, in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, when the special symbol in which the variable display (fluctuation) is performed in the special figure game is the first special figure, "time saving A" or "time saving B" is determined as the time saving type, and when the special symbol that is variablely displayed (varied) in the special symbol game is the second special symbol, the time saving type of "time saving C" or "time saving D" is determined. "Time saving A" and "working time saving C" are time saving classifications controlled to a working time saving state while 100 times of special-design games are performed. "Time saving B" is a time saving type that is controlled to a time saving state while 50 special game games are played. "Time saving D" is a time saving type that is controlled to a time saving state while 20 special games are performed.

After executing the process of step 059AKS004 in FIG. 41-4, the CPU 103 corresponds to the time saving type determined in the step 059AKS004, for example, the time saving type buffer value which is the storage value of the time saving type buffer provided in the RAM 102 By setting (step 059AKS005), the determined time saving type is stored. As an example, if the time saving type is "time saving A", the time saving type buffer value is set to "0", if it is "time saving B", it is set to "1", if it is "time saving C", it is set to "2", and "time saving D , then "3" should be used.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS005, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the flag during time saving provided in the RAM 102 is set to ON state (step 059AKS006). A flag during time saving is a flag which shows that it is under time saving control now (it may only be called a time saving flag). If the time saving flag is off (step 059AKS006; No), the time saving start flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to on (step 059AKS006A). A time saving start flag is a flag which shows starting time saving control from the special figure game performed next time.

If it is determined that it is not "losing (time saving)" at step 059AKS003 (step 059AKS003; No), or if it is determined that the time saving flag is on at step 059AKS006 (step 059AKS006; Yes), step After executing any of the processing of S1245, S1247, step 059AKS006A, the result of pre-determination whether to control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state or whether to control to the next time saving state, furthermore, the big hit A fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the gaming state and the determination result of the time saving type in the case of the time saving state (step S1248). As an example, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special figure display result is not "losing (time saving)", the special figure display result corresponds to the pre-determined result of "losing", the losing pattern A special design showing the sign of "-" is set as a fixed special design. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure display result in step 059AKS003 is "loss (time saving)", according to the determination result of the time saving type in step 059AKS004, the time saving pattern "1", " Any one of the special symbols showing the numbers 4”, “6” and “8” is set as the fixed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, according to the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving B", a special symbol showing the number "4" is set as a fixed special symbol. According to the determination result that the time saving type is set to "time saving C", a special symbol showing the number "6" is set as a fixed special symbol. According to the result of determination that the time saving type is 'time saving D', a special design showing the number '8' is set as a fixed special design.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step S1246, corresponding to the pre-determination result that the special figure display result is "small hit", it becomes a small hit symbol " 2” is set as a fixed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" in step S1241, "3", "5", "7" which becomes the big hit pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S1244. ” is set as a fixed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is ``non-variable'', the special pattern showing the number ``3'' which is the normal jackpot pattern among the normal opening round jackpot patterns is set as the fixed special pattern. Also, according to the result of determination that the jackpot type is ``variable probability'', a special pattern showing the number ``7'', which is a variable probability big-hit pattern among the normal opening round big-hit patterns, is set as a fixed special pattern. According to the determination result that the jackpot type is ``probable'', a special pattern showing the number ``5'', which is a short-term open jackpot pattern, is set as a fixed special pattern.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step S1248, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" which is the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S1249), the special symbol normal process is terminated. . When the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure in step S1235 is "0" (step S1235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S1250), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration specifying command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

FIG. 41-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S261). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. A variation pattern corresponding to the time is determined (step S262).

FIG. 41-10 shows an example of a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 059AK of this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" and "loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach" respectively. Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases such as when the result of the variable display is a "big hit". It should be noted that the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "losing" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss (time saving)" or "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). . Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 059AK, only when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", a dedicated variation pattern (variation pattern of PB2-4 shown in the figure) at the time of loss (time reduction), or variable display Although the result is "losing (shortening of working hours)", there is a variation pattern of time-saving gase that becomes "losing". The variable display result is selected only when the variable display result is "losing (time saving)", and the variable display result is "losing (time saving)" There may be a variation pattern of the super reach effect that is executed only when ".

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The super reach variation patterns include reach performances such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C regardless of whether the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "loss".

The jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41-11 (A) changes the variation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is "jackpot". It is a table referred to for determining one of a plurality of types based on a random number value MR3 for pattern determination. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41-11 (A), the random value for determining the variation pattern is The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with MR3 is any of the variation pattern PA4-1, variation pattern PB4-1, variation pattern PB4-2, variation pattern PB4-3, and variation pattern PC1-1 to variation pattern PC1-3 assigned to

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 41-11(A), the determination value is determined for each variation so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern differs depending on which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. Some parts are assigned to patterns. For example, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the determination value for the variation pattern PA4-1, the variation pattern PB4-1, the variation pattern PB4-2, and the variation pattern PB4-3 Allocations are different. This makes it possible to vary the rate of determination of the same variation pattern according to the result of determining which one of a plurality of types of jackpot types should be used.

Also, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, there is a portion in which determination values are assigned to different variation patterns depending on which of the plurality of jackpot types has been determined. For example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PA4-1, variation pattern PB4-1, variation pattern PB4-2, and variation pattern PB4-3 On the other hand, determination values are not assigned to the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable", while the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PC1-1 to variation pattern PC1-3, variation pattern PA4-1 and variation pattern PB4 -1, variation pattern PB4-2, and variation pattern PB4-3 are not assigned determination values. Thereby, when the special figure display result is ``big win'' and the big win type is controlled to the short-term open big win state according to ``sudden certainty'', a variation pattern different from the case of being controlled to the normal open big win state is determined. be able to.

In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be one of "non-variable probability", "variable probability", and "definite probability", depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state, a variable probability state, or a time-saving state Alternatively, different determination values may be assigned to each variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to vary the rate at which the same variation pattern is determined according to which of the plurality of types the game state is. Further, when the jackpot type is determined to be any one of "non-variable probability", "variable probability", and "definite probability", depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state, a variable probability state, or a time-saving state determined values may be assigned to different variation patterns. As a result, different variation patterns can be determined depending on which of the plurality of types the game state is. In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", more decision values are assigned to the variation pattern PA4-1 indicating the variation pattern of normal reach than in the case of "probability variation". . Therefore, when the ready-to-win performance of super reach is executed, the possibility that the jackpot type will be "variable probability" rather than "non-variable probability" is higher, so that the player can have expectations, and the game can be played. Interest can be improved. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41-11 (A), the variation pattern PB4-2 performing the reach effect of super reach B is better than the variation pattern PB4-1 performing the reach effect of super reach C. , Rather than the variation pattern PB4-2, the variation pattern PB4-3 that performs the reach effect of super reach A, that is, the longer the variation time (see the variation time in FIG. 41-10), the more determined values are assigned. It is

Returning to FIG. 41-8, when it is determined that the big hit flag is off in the process of step S261 (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is on (step S263 ). When it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41-11 (B), and the special figure display result is "small hit". A variation pattern corresponding to the small hit is determined (step S264).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is off (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS007). When it is determined that the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS007; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table when the time saving start flag is on shown in FIGS. 41-12 (A), (C) and (D) (Step 059AKS008). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving start flag is off (step 059AKS007; No), the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table when the time saving start flag is off (step 059AKS009).

After executing the process of step 059AKS008 or step 059AKS009, the CPU 103 is the first special figure or the second special figure, depending on the type of special figure and whether it is in time saving, A variation pattern corresponding to the time when the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" or "losing" is determined (step 059AKS010). Specifically, in step 059AKS010, the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)", and if the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, regardless of whether time saving control is performed, Fig. 41- 12 (A) with reference to the time-saving start flag ON loss variation pattern determination table, depending on the time-saving type, for example, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in the random number buffer for variation To numerical data such as Based on this, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, if the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" and the variable special figure is the second special figure, depending on whether time saving control is being performed, FIG. 41-12 (C) or (D ), and based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types. In addition, the special figure display result is "losing", if the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, with reference to the time saving start flag OFF time loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41-12 (B), time saving control is One of a plurality of types of variation patterns is determined based on numerical data indicating the random number MR3, depending on whether or not it is in the time-saving state. In addition, if the special figure display result is "losing" and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if it is during the time saving, the time saving start flag OFF time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41-12 (B) One of a plurality of variation patterns is determined based on numerical data representing the random number MR3. On the other hand, in the normal state, referring to the time saving start flag OFF time fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. decide. As illustrated, in the characteristic portion 059AK of this embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (when the time reduction start flag ON time loss variation pattern determination table is selected), the type of super reach A determination value is assigned so that the time saving type is determined at a different rate accordingly. Specifically, the decision value is assigned so that the super reach, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit, is executed as a time saving type with a large number of times of time saving (B is more "time saving A" than super reach C). Allocated so that the percentage of working hours reduction type is high). Also, as shown in the figure, if the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" (when the time saving start flag is turned on, the loss variation pattern determination table is selected), the decision value is the highest super reach A with the highest jackpot expectation Not assigned. That is, in the characteristic part 059AK, the determination value is assigned so that the rate of "loss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of super reach. Further, in the characteristic portion 059AK, for example, as shown in FIGS. A decision value is assigned so that a plurality of variable display results can be obtained, such as when the game simply fails. Therefore, the variation of the performance result is increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, as described above, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole is provided in the game area on the right side of the player, and the game ball wins only when the player hits to the right. ing. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 059AK, the second special figure fluctuates in the time saving state by the player hitting right in the time saving state. On the other hand, when the time saving control is finished and the pending memory corresponding to the second special figure remains, the second special figure will change in the normal state. That is, the second special figure fluctuates in the normal state only when the time saving control ends and the pending memory corresponding to the second special figure remains. Therefore, in the characteristic part 059AK, as shown in FIG. It is a variable display (fluctuation) fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to "4".

Returning to FIG. 41-8, after executing the process of step 059AKS010, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving start flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS011). When the time saving start flag is ON (step 059AKS011; Yes), the CPU 103 determines that the determined variation pattern is a fixed time saving variation pattern (that is, a loss (time saving) time dedicated variation pattern) PB2-4. (Step 059AKS012). If the determined variation pattern is not PB2-4, add a time-saving performance period as a period for executing a time-saving performance to be described later to the special figure variation time indicated by the determined variation pattern (step 059AKS013). . Concretely, in step 059AKS013, as shown in FIG. 41-9, it is sufficient to add a time saving fan effect period corresponding to the time saving type. In addition, PB2-4, which is a variation pattern dedicated to loss (time saving), and PB2-5, which is a variation pattern for time saving, have a time saving production period (10 seconds )It is included. The time-saving performance is a performance for inciting whether or not a time-saving pattern, which is a decorative pattern indicating control to a time-saving state from the next variable display, is stop-displayed as a final stop pattern of the decorative patterns.

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264 and 059AKS013 in FIG. 41-8, the CPU 103 sets a special figure variation time (also referred to as variation time) which is a variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the special symbol variation in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). is. Tokuzu fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 41-10, corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, is predetermined, but when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, the time saving fanning production period is added. CPU103, steps S262, S264, 059AKS013 the variation pattern selected in each process (when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, period in which the time-saving fan effect period is added) to set the special figure variation time corresponding to By, it is possible to set the timing for deriving the variable display result of the special design and the decorative design. The setting of the special figure fluctuation time is performed, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time to a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. It should be noted that, in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, the time saving start flag is in the ON state, and when the determined variation pattern is not PB2-4, the time saving fanning production period as a period for executing the time saving fanning production is set. , An example of adding to the special figure fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern has been shown, but in addition to this, for example, when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit", a predetermined period is set. It may be added to the special figure fluctuation time. In this case, a period corresponding to the jackpot type may be added in the same manner as the time saving type, and the processing may be common to step 059AKS013. Specifically, each period corresponding to "time saving A", "time saving B", and "time saving C" shown in Fig. 41-9 is added as a period corresponding to "non-probable change", "probability change", and "probability" do it.

Following the process of step S266, of the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, start Setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start one of the special symbols games for which the conditions are satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", it is set to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", it is set to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. A special figure game is started by this. In addition, when the variable display using the first special figure is started, the CPU 103 controls the first reservation display device 25A to display the number of the first special figure reservation storage that has been subtracted by one. This may be performed by the pending indicator 25A (for example, the number of lit LEDs may be reduced by one). In addition, when the variable display using the second special figure is started, the CPU 103 controls the second reservation display device 25B to display the second special figure reservation storage number decremented by one. You may make it carry out to the reservation indicator 25B (for example, the number of lighting of LED is reduced by one).

After executing the processing of step S267, the CPU 103, in order to notify the effect control board 12 side of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the variation pattern, etc., the command at the time of the variation start of the special symbol (command at the time of variation start). Transmission settings are made (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 transmits the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command ( Command containing EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), first special figure pending storage number specification command ( Command including EXT data indicating the first special figure reserved memory number count value subtracted by 1, that is, the first special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special game)) is sent sequentially. Make transmission settings for On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a second fluctuation start designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command ( Command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), second special figure pending storage number specification command (1 A command including EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory number count value that has been reduced, that is, the second special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sent sequentially. send settings for

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and ends the variation pattern setting process.

FIG. 41-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 36 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 41-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special symbol fixed display flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting section) of the RAM 102 is ON. (Step S291). Here, the special figure confirmed display flag is set to ON state by the process of step S295 described later in response to the derivation display of the confirmed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the special figure confirmation display flag is off at step S291 (step S291; No), the setting for deriving and displaying the confirmation special symbol is performed (step S292). At this time, a decorative design stop command transmission setting process for transmitting the decorative design stop command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step 059AKS021). The decorative pattern stop command is also called a pattern confirmation command, and is a command to end the variable display (fluctuation) of decorative patterns and to derive and display the display result (stopped pattern). It is a command to specify the period (determined period) to display the pattern.

Here, the main effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-14. Note that "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number.

The command 80XX(H) is an effect control command (variation pattern specification command) for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to variable display of special symbols. In this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command corresponding to each variation pattern is set. For example, each variation pattern is assigned a unique number (variation pattern number), and that number is set to "XX" in the command (eg, "01" for variation pattern PA1-1). In addition, the variation pattern specification command is also a command for specifying the start of variation of the decoration pattern.

The command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first starting winning has occurred due to the game medium entering the first starting winning opening. The command 8A02(H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) that specifies that the second start winning has occurred due to the entry of the game medium into the second starting winning opening. The first start winning designation command and the second starting winning designation command may be collectively referred to as the starting entrance winning designation command.

Command 8CXX (H) specifies whether or not to be a big hit, whether to lose (time saving), and whether to specify a big hit type, a time saving type, etc., that is, a production control command that specifies a variable display result (display result specified command). In this embodiment, a display result specification command is set for each display result. For example, each display result is assigned a unique number, and the number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "00" if "loss", "loss ( Shorter time)”, “01”, “05” if the jackpot type is “probability change”, “jackpot”, etc.).

Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first variation start designation command) that designates the start of variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second variation start designation command) that designates the start of variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command may be collectively referred to as the fluctuation start designation command. Information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or to start the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern determination result designation command described later.

Command 8FXX (H) is an effect control command (symbol determination designation command) that designates that the variable display (fluctuation) of decorative patterns is terminated and the display result (stopped pattern) is derived and displayed. It is a command to specify the period (determined period) to display the decorative pattern. In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, whether or not the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", and the display result corresponding to each time reduction type when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" Specified command is set. For example, if the variable display result is not "losing (time saving)", "XX" in the command is set to "00", and if the variable display result is "losing (time saving)", the time saving type A unique number is assigned accordingly, and the number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, if the time saving type is "time saving A", "01", if the time saving type is "time saving B", "02", time saving "03" if the type is "time saving C", "04" if the time saving type is "time saving D", etc.).

Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (game state designation command) that designates a game state. In this embodiment, game state designation commands corresponding to each game state are set. For example, if the game state is a normal state (low-probability base), "XX" is set to "00". For example, if the game state is the high-probability-low base state, "XX" is set to "01". For example, if the game state is a high probability high base state, "XX" is set to "02". For example, if the game state is the low probability/high base state, "XX" is set to "03".

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command) that designates the start of the big win game state (start of fanfare). It should be noted that the fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state and notifies that the jackpot game state has been reached. Command A100 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) that designates the start of the small hit game state.

The command A2XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open designation command) that designates the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX(H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning hole) that designates closing of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command A601 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot end designation command) that designates the end of the jackpot game state (the start of the ending). It should be noted that the ending is an effect that notifies the end of the big win game state, which is executed when the big win game state ends. Command A602 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game state.

Command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first special figure reservation number designation command) that designates the number of first special diagram reservation memories. "XX" indicates the number of first special figure pending storage. Command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second special figure reservation number designation command) that designates the number of second special diagram reservation memories. "XX" indicates the number of second special figure pending storage. The first special figure reserved memory number designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number designation command may be collectively referred to as a special figure reserved memory number designation command.

Command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol determination result designation command) for designating a display result among the determination results at the time of start winning. Command C5XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern determination result specification command) for specifying a variation pattern among the determination results at the time of start winning. In the present embodiment, in the process of step S101, which will be described later, random numbers MR1 to MR3 are extracted when a first start win or a second start win occurs. For the variable display corresponding to the extracted random number values MR1 to MR3, the variable display is changed based on the random values MR1 and MR3 out of the extracted random number values MR1 to MR3 before the condition for starting the variable display is established. It is determined whether or not the display result will be a "big hit" and the variation pattern of the variable display. The judgment at the time of starting winning refers to these judgments, and is executed in the random number judgment process at the time of winning in step S1213 (see FIG. 41-3). In certain cases, this determination may not be made. A unique number is assigned to the judgment result of the display result (including the case of no judgment), and the number is set to "XX" in the design designation command (for example, if "no judgment", " 00”, “01” etc. are set if “losing”, a unique number is assigned according to the time saving type if “losing (time saving)”, and unique according to the jackpot type if “big hit” number is assigned). A unique number is assigned to the determination result (including the case of no determination) for the variation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the variation pattern specification command (for example, if "no determination" “00”, “11” for “PA1-1”, “12” for “PA1-2”, etc.).

FIG. 41-15(A) is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 41-13 as decoration symbol stop command transmission setting processing. The decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process is a process of setting to transmit a variable display result and a decorative symbol stop command according to the time saving type. In the decoration symbol stop command transmission setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the flag during time saving is set to ON state (step 059AKS041). If the time saving flag is off (step 059AKS041; No), it is determined whether or not the time saving start flag is set to the on state (step 059AKS042). If the time saving start flag is ON (step 059AKS042; Yes), since the variable display result of this time is "loss (time saving)", the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the decoration symbol stop command according to the time saving type. (Step 059AKS043), the decoration symbol stop command transmission setting process is terminated.

Concretely, in step 059AKS043, as shown in FIG. 41-15(B), a decoration design stop command (design determination command) predetermined according to the time saving type is set. As shown in the figure, "time saving A" and "time saving B" have a fixed time of 10 seconds, while "time saving C" has a fixed time of 5 seconds and "time saving D" has 2 seconds. The time-saving types of "time-saving A" and "time-saving B" are time-saving types that are determined only when the variable display result of the first special figure is "loss (time-saving)", and "time-saving C" and "time-saving D” is a time-saving type that is determined only when the variable display result of the second special figure is “loss (time-saving)”, so the variable display result of the first special figure is “loss ( Time saving)" and the case where the variable display result of the second special figure is "Loss (time saving)" are different. Further, when the variable display result of the second special figure is "loss (time saving)", since the fixed period differs according to the time saving type, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the fixed period. Also, in the feature part 059AK, since the process of step 059AKS043 is performed only when it is not in the time saving state, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the second special figure pending (remaining pending) remaining after the time saving ends Only when it becomes "losing (time saving)", the processing of the step 059AKS043 is performed, so that it becomes a fixed time according to the time saving type of "time saving C" and "time saving D" shown in the figure. That is, in a short period of time after the end of the time saving (at the maximum, after the end of the period of variable display of the maximum number of reserved memories of the second special figure four times), if it is controlled again to the time saving state ("time saving C” and “time saving D”), as shown in the figure, when the variable display result corresponding to the first special figure in the normal state is “loss (time saving)” (“time saving A” and “time saving B”) It has a shorter settling time than Therefore, it is necessary to clearly inform the player that it is controlled to the time-saving state, and by lengthening the fixed period for the variable display of the normal state and the first special figure, it is possible to control the time-saving state. There may be a period of time clearly notified to the player. In addition, if the time saving state is controlled again in a short period of time after the end of the time saving, there is a risk that if the fixed period is long, the interest in the game may be reduced. prevent a decline in

If the time saving flag is on at step 059AKS041 in FIG. 41-15 (A) (step 059AKS041; Yes), if the time saving start flag is off at step 059AKS042 (step 059AKS042; No), CPU 103 , sets the transmission of command 8F00 (fixed period of 0.5 seconds) as a decoration symbol stop command (step 059AKS044), and terminates the decoration symbol stop command transmission setting process.

Returning to FIG. 41-13, after executing the processing of step 059AKS021, the CPU 103 determines the determination period (10 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, 0 .5 seconds) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step 059AKS022). In addition, in the process of step 059AKS022, the timer initial value predetermined according to the variable display result and the time saving type may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting section 153 . Then, after setting the special figure confirmation display flag to the ON state (step S295), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. In this way, after the determined special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S292, until the special symbol determined display time set in step 059AKS022 elapses, the special symbol is processed in the special symbol process according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Every time the stop process is executed, it is determined that the flag during special figure confirmation display is ON in step S291.

When the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, read the game control process timer value is the stored value of the game control process timer timer initial value is set by the process of step S294, whether the timer value has become "0" Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. It should be noted that the game control process timer value, if the timer value is a value other than "0", each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of a timer interrupt, it should be updated so as to be subtracted by 1. Just do it. If special figure decision display time has not passed in step S296 (step S296; No), it waits until special figure decision display time passes by ending special design stop processing.

When the special figure confirmation display time has passed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag and turning it off (step S297), it is checked whether the big hit flag is on Determine (step S298). At this time, if the jackpot flag is ON (step S298; Yes), a certain period of time is set in advance as a waiting time for the effect at the start of the jackpot (step S299). Moreover, the setting for transmitting the winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start designation command corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is stored in the transmission command buffer. It should be stored in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

Following the processing of step S300, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off (step S301). In addition, the setting for ending the probability variable state, the time saving state, and the remaining holding period described later is performed (step 059AKS023). For example, as the process of step 059AKS023, the process of clearing the variable probability flag, the time saving flag and the remaining pending period flag to turn it off, and the time saving number of times for counting the remaining number of special games executed in the time saving state A process of clearing the counter or the like may be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step S303), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step S304; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as waiting time for the effect at the start of the small hit (step S305). Subsequently, settings are made for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the fact that the special figure display result is "small hit" from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S306). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to be turned off (step S307). Moreover, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S308).

When the small hit flag is off in step S304 (step S304; No), it is determined whether or not the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024). If the time saving start flag is ON (step 059AKS024; Yes), the time saving start process is executed (step 059AKS025). The details of the processing at the time of the time saving start will be described later. After executing the process of step 059AKS025, or when the time saving start flag is off at step 059AKS024 (step 059AKS024; No), CPU103 clears the special figure process flag and initializes its value to "0" (step S309). After executing either of the processes of steps S308 and S309, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving state (step 059AKS027). Specifically, in the processing of step 059AKS027, when the time saving flag is ON, the time saving number count value, which is the stored value of the time saving number counter, is updated by subtracting 1, for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated time saving frequency count value matches a predetermined time saving end determination value (for example, "0"). At this time, if it matches with the time saving end determination value, it is determined as Yes. On the other hand, if it does not match the time saving end determination value, it is determined as No.

When ending the time saving state (step 059AKS027; Yes), the CPU 103 performs time saving end processing (step 059AKS028). The details of the processing at the time of time saving end will be described later. After executing the processing of step 059AKS028, or when not ending the time saving state in step 059AKS027 (step 059AKS027; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the remaining pending period (step 059AKS030). Whether or not it is the remaining pending period may be determined by confirming whether or not a remaining pending period flag, which will be described later, is set to the ON state. If it is the remaining pending period, that is, if the remaining pending period flag is ON (step 059AKS030; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the remaining pending period end determination process (step 059AKS031), and then ends the special symbol stop process. . The details of the remaining pending period end determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it is not the remaining pending period, that is, if the remaining pending period flag is off (step 059AKS030; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing as it is.

FIG. 41-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS025 of FIG. 41-13 as the time saving start process. The variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", and the processing at the time of the said time reduction start is a process which performs the setting for performing time reduction control from the variable display performed next. In the time saving start time processing shown in FIG. 41-16, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving start flag to the OFF state (step 059AKS051), and sets the time saving flag to the ON state (step 059AKS052). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the remaining pending period flag is ON (step 059AKS053). The flag during the remaining pending period is a flag indicating that the variable display corresponding to the second special figure pending (remaining pending) remaining after the end of the time saving is underway, and will be described later in step 059AKS063 (see FIGS. 41-17). When the variable display corresponding to the second special figure reservation (remaining reservation) that is set to the ON state in the process and remains after the end of the time saving is completed (step 059AKS072 described later), or the remaining after the end of the time saving When the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the suspension of 2 special figures (remaining suspension) becomes "loss (time saving)", it is cleared to the off state (step 059AKS055 described later).

When it is determined that the remaining pending period flag is off at step 059AKS053 in FIG. 41-16 (step 059AKS053; No), the CPU 103 shoots the game ball to the right side of the game area for the player, so-called right hitting. (Step 059AKS054) to send a right-handed instruction command for instructing, and terminates the time-saving start time processing. By sending the right-handed instruction command set in the processing of step 059 AKS054 to the side of the production control board 12, the right-handed instruction display of the mode shown in FIGS. done.

On the other hand, if it is determined at step 059AKS053 in FIG. 41-16 that the remaining pending period flag is ON (step 059AKS053; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining pending period flag to OFF (step 059AKS055). , various count values are cleared (step 059AKS056). In the process of step 059AKS056, the values of the remaining pending count value and the fluctuation count value after the end of the time saving, which will be described later, may be cleared to "0" which is the initial value. Like the remaining pending count value, the post-time saving change count value may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and is a count value indicating the number of times of variable display performed after the time saving state ends. Although illustration is omitted, the variation count value after the end of the time saving is, for example, in the special symbol variation processing in step S112 of FIG. +1 is enough.

After executing the process of step 059AKS056 in FIG. 41-16, the CPU 103 sets to transmit a simple mode right-handed instruction command (step 059AKS057), and ends the time saving start process. Step 059 AKS057 simple mode right-handed instruction command set in the process is transmitted to the production control board 12 side, the production control board 12 side right-handed instruction of the mode shown in FIG. 41-35 (O) display is performed. 41-16 Step 059AKS057 The simple mode right-handed instruction command set to be sent is different from the right-handed instruction command set to be sent in the process of Step 059AKS054. This is because the variable display result is "losing (time saving)". Specifically, in a short period of time after the end of the time saving (at the maximum, after the period of variable display of the maximum number of reserved memories of the second special figure four times), it will be controlled again to the time saving state, so step 059AKS057 In the processing of step 059, if the right-handed instruction command set to be transmitted in the processing of step 059AKS054 is transmitted, there is a risk of annoying the player. Therefore, in the process of step 059AKS057, a command is transmitted in a simple manner to display a right-handed instruction to prevent the player from being bothered and losing interest in the game. .

FIG. 41-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS028 of FIG. 41-13 as the time saving end process. The time saving end process is a process of ending the time saving control and setting the remaining pending period. In the variable probability state in which the time saving medium flag is on and the variable probability flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the next variable display result becomes "big hit". Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to end the time shortening control even in the variable probability state, and the time shortening control may be ended based on the determination result of ending. When the time reduction control is ended in this way, the normal state may be achieved by ending the variable probability control together, and the variable probability control is continued until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit", or further. You may make it continue until a special figure game of predetermined times is performed.

In the time saving ending process shown in FIG. 41-17, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving flag to the OFF state (step 059AKS061). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a second special figure reservation (residual reservation) (step 059AKS062). In step 059AKS062, by confirming the hold information corresponding to the second special figure stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, it may be determined whether or not there is a hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure.

If there is a second special figure pending (remaining pending) (step 059AKS062; Yes), the remaining pending period flag is set to ON (step 059AKS063), and the second special figure pending (remaining pending) A remaining pending number count value is set according to the number (step 059AKS064). Specifically, in step 059AKS064, if the number of pending information corresponding to the second special figure stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is "4", the remaining pending number count value is set to "4", and " If it is "3", "3" should be set, if it is "2", "2" should be set, and if it is "1", "1" should be set.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS064, the CPU 103 initializes the change count value after the end of time saving by setting it to "0" (step 059AKS065). In addition, since the fluctuation count value after the end of the time saving is initialized to "0" at step 059AKS056 in FIG. good. After executing the processing of step 059AKS065, the CPU 103 sets to transmit a right-handed erase command for erasing the right-handed instruction display (step 059AKS066), and ends the time-saving end processing. By sending the right-handed erase command set in the process of step 059AKS066 to the side of the production control board 12, the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIGS. , the right-handed instruction display is erased.

41-17 step 059AKS062 When it is determined that the second special figure reservation (remaining reservation) does not exist (step 059AKS062; No), the CPU 103 shoots the game ball to the game area on the left side for the player. A setting is made to transmit a left-handed instruction command for instructing to return to so-called left-handed (step 059AKS067), and the time-saving end processing is terminated.

FIG. 41-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS031 of FIG. 41-13 as the remaining pending period end determination process. The remaining pending period end determination process determines whether the remaining pending period has ended, that is, whether the variable display corresponding to the remaining second special figure pending (remaining pending) after the end of the time saving has ended. It is a process of ending the remaining pending period when it is finished. In the remaining pending period end determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the variation count value after the end of the time saving matches the remaining pending number count value set in step 059AKS064 of FIG. 41-17 (step 059AKS071) . When the change count value after the end of the time saving does not match the remaining number count value of suspension (step 059AKS071; No), the CPU 103 ends the remaining suspension period end determination processing as it is.

On the other hand, if the variation count value after the end of the time saving matches the remaining pending number count value (step 059AKS071; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining pending period flag to the OFF state (step 059AKS072), various count values is cleared (step 059AKS073). In the process of step 059AKS073, similarly to the process of step 059AKS056, the values of the remaining pending count value and the change count value after the end of the time saving may be cleared to the initial value "0". After executing the process of step 059AKS074, the CPU 103 sets to transmit a left-handed instruction command for instructing the player to return to so-called left-handed hitting, in which the game ball is shot to the left side game area (step 059AKS074). , terminates the remaining pending period end determination process. By sending the left-handed instruction command set in the processing of step 059AKS074 to the side of the production control board 12, as shown in FIG. An instruction is displayed.

FIG. 41-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot ending process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 41-19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the jackpot end effect has passed (step S321). As an example, in step S116 shown in FIG. 36 in the jackpot open post-processing, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7", in advance corresponding to the jackpot end effect waiting time, which is the execution period of the ending effect Determined timer initial value is set to the game control process timer. Then, in the process of step S321, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the game control process timer value after the update coincides with a predetermined waiting time lapse judgment value (for example, "0", etc.). Depending on whether or not, it may be determined whether or not the waiting time for the effect at the end of the big hit has passed. At step S321, if the waiting time for the effect at the end of the big win has not elapsed (step S321; No), the process for ending the big win is terminated.

On the other hand, when the waiting time for the effect at the end of the jackpot has passed at step S321 (step S321; Yes), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read out (step S322). , specifies whether the jackpot type was "non-probability variation", "probability variation" or "sudden probability". At this time, it is determined whether or not the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable" (step S323).

When it is determined at step S323 that the jackpot type is "non-variable probability" (step S323; Yes), a setting is made to start control to change the gaming state to a time-saving state (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag to the ON state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, "100") corresponding to the upper limit value of the special game that can be executed in the time saving state to the time saving number counter. set to On the other hand, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probability variation" or "probability variation" (step S323; No), the setting for starting the control to change the gaming state to the probability variation state is performed (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to the ON state.

In addition, setting may be made to control to a variable probability state of different types depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be ``variable probability'' and when the type of jackpot is determined to be ``sudden probability''. As an example, if the jackpot type is determined to be "probability variation", set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to the ON state, do not set the initial value of the time saving number count value, and then the special figure display result Both the variable probability control and the time saving control are set to be continuously performed until a "jackpot" is reached. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probable", both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are set to the ON state, and the initial value of the time saving number count value is the same as when it is controlled to the time saving state The setting is performed, and the variable probability control is continued until the next special figure display result becomes "big hit", while the time saving control is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, "100"). can be set as Alternatively, if the jackpot type is determined to be "definite", if the predetermined time-saving medium-specific flag is ON, the setting for starting the time-saving control along with the probability variation control is performed, while the time-saving medium-specific flag is off. If there is, it may be set to start only the variable probability control. Here, the time saving medium sudden probability flag is, for example, when it is determined that the big hit flag is on in step S298 shown in FIG. It should just be set to an ON state corresponding to time saving control being performed.

After executing either of the processes of steps S324 and S325, the special figure process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0" (step S326), and then the jackpot ending process is terminated.

Next, processing in the effect control board 12 of the characterizing portion 059AK in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 41-20 is a flow chart showing an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command from the main board 11 (start winning opening designation command, special figure reserved memory number designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command). It is determined whether or not there is (step S401).

When it is determined that the starting winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When the first start winning designation command or the first special reserved memory number designation command is received as the starting winning command, the starting winning command (first starting winning designation command, first special reserved memory number designation command , pattern determination result designation command, variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in a first start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . If the second start winning designation command or the second special reserved memory number designation command is received as the starting winning command, the starting winning command (second starting winning designation command, second special reserved memory number designation command , pattern determination result designation command, variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in a second start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 .

FIG. 41-21(A) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning. In the first start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning command received at the first start winning are stored. In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, a storage area that can store various data corresponding to the maximum number of the first special figure reserved storage (for example, 4) (corresponds to each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4 area) is provided. As shown in the figure, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning in the characterizing part 059AK in this embodiment stores various command data corresponding to the variable display being executed as the pending display number "0". is provided (the same applies to the command buffer at the time of the second start winning).

When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening, 4 commands, 1st starting opening winning designation command, 1st special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command A set effect control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, in addition to these first start winning designation command, first special figure reservation storage designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is each reserved A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the free area of the first start winning command buffer in accordance with the order of reception. The empty area of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the starting winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the first starting winning command buffer. Each performance control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the first special figure reservation storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

Also, FIG. 41-21(B) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning. In the second start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning command received at the second start winning are stored. In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, a storage area that can store various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the number of the second special figure reserved storage (for each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4 area) is provided. As with the first start winning command buffer, the second start winning command buffer in the characteristic part 059AK in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, has a pending display number of "0" and is displayed in a variable display during execution. An area is provided for storing various corresponding command data.

When there is a start winning to the 2nd start winning opening, 4 commands, 2nd starting opening winning designation command, 2nd special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command A set effect control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, in addition to these second start winning designation command, second special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is each reserved A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in correspondence with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the empty area of the second start winning command buffer in accordance with the order of reception. The empty area of the second start winning command buffer, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the starting winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the second starting winning command buffer. Each production control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the first special figure reservation storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

In addition, in the second start winning command buffer, similarly to the first start winning command buffer, a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the pending display numbers is provided, and a display step change pattern described later is provided. A storage area is provided for storage. The example shown in FIG. 40-8 (B) shows an example in which the effect control command data is not stored in any of the storage areas of the pending display numbers "0" to "4".

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 41-20, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S401; No), the effect control CPU 120 , determines whether or not a game state designation command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the game state designation command is received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the on/off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the contents of the received game state designation command. (Step S404).

The high probability flag is, for example, provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit), and is turned on in response to the probability variable state. The ON state/OFF state is switched corresponding to the switching of the ON state/OFF state. The high base flag, for example, is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit), and is turned on in response to the time saving state, and the time saving flag on the main board 11 side. The ON state/OFF state is switched corresponding to the switching of the ON state/OFF state. For example, the effect control CPU120, if the gaming state specification command is to specify a high probability high base state (for example, if the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is specified to be ON), high probability flag and high Both of the base flags are turned on (if they are already on, they are kept on; hereinafter the same applies to the on/off states of both flags). If the gaming state specification command is to specify a high probability low base state (for example, if the probability variation flag specifies that the time saving flag is turned off in the ON state), the high probability flag is turned on, and the high base Turn off the flag. If the game state specification command specifies a low-probability base state (normal state) (for example, when specifying that the probability variation flag and the time-saving flag are off), both the high-probability flag and the high-base flag turn off.

After executing step S404, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and performs command analysis processing. exit.

FIG. 41-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 39 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pending display setting process shown in FIG. 41-22, the effect control CPU 120 first transmits the effect control command (starting point winning designation command, winning determination result command, pending memory count notification command, etc.) transmitted at the time of starting winning. It is determined whether or not there is reception (step S1301). In the process of step S1301, for example, in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning or the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, the start opening winning designation command, the judgment result command at the time of winning, and the pending storage number notification command are newly stored. By confirming, it is possible to determine whether or not the command is received at the time of starting winning.

If no command is received in step S1301 (step S1301; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that a command has been received (step S1301; Yes), the winning determination result corresponding to the received winning determination result command is specified (step S1302). At this time, it is determined whether or not "restriction of determination at the time of winning" is specified (step S1303). If the winning determination result is other than "Limited winning determination" (step S1303; No), whether the first start opening winning designation command is included in the effect control command transmitted at the time of starting winning, That is, it is determined whether or not the received starting opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 059AKS081).

If it is the first start opening winning a prize designation command (step 059AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 holds that the variable display result is "big hit" or "loss (time reduction)" in the stored hold, or It is determined whether or not the variable display result is "losing" and the hold that is the fluctuation pattern of the time-saving fake is stored (step 059AKS082). In the processing of step 059AKS082, by confirming the contents of the buffer at the time of the first start winning shown in FIG. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the result is "losing" and the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time-saving fake, is stored.

If the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing (time saving)", or the variable display result is "losing" and the holding that is the variation pattern of time saving is not stored (step 059AKS082; No ), the normal suspension change determination table shown in FIG. 41-23(A) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS083).

On the other hand, if either the hold that the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing (time saving)" or the hold that the variable display result is "losing" and the fluctuation pattern of time saving is stored (step 059AKS082; Yes), the limit hold change determination table shown in FIG. 41-23(B) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS084).

If it is determined at step 059AKS081 that it is not the first starting opening winning command (step 059AKS081; No), it is the second starting opening winning command and is in the time saving state, so the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. 41-23 ( C) selects the time saving suspension change determination table for special figure 2 as a use table (step 059AKS085).

After executing any of the processing of steps 059AKS083, 059AKS084, and 059AKS085, the effect control CPU 120 reads ahead according to the variable display result and the variation pattern according to the determination ratio shown in the pending change determination table selected as the table to be used. Whether or not to execute the pending display change effect as the advance notice effect and the mode of execution are determined (step S1304).

In the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 41-23 (A), the received start-up winning command is the first start-up winning designation command, and the variable display result is "big hit" or This table is selected when neither of the hold that is "lost (time saving)" or the hold that is a variable display result of "losing" and the change pattern of time saving is not stored. As shown in the figure, in the normal pending change determination table, when the variable display result is "big hit", when the variable display result is "loss" and the variation pattern is super reach loss, or when the variable display result is "small hit" , if it is a variable display result of "losing (time saving)" or "losing" and it is a fluctuation pattern of time saving guess, in other cases, if it is executed, it is a bigger hit than if it is not executed The decision ratios are assigned as shown in the figure so that the degree of expectation is high and, when executed, the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of "red">"green">"blue". When the normal-time pending change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 41-22, whether or not to execute the pending display change effect and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the normal-time pending change determination table. .

FIG. 41-23(B) shows the limit change pending change determination table, the received starting mouth winning command is the first starting mouth winning designation command, and the variable display result is "big hit" or This table is selected when either the hold that is "losing (time saving)" or the holding that the variable display result is "losing" and is a fluctuation pattern of time saving false is stored. In such a case, after the end of the variable display that is executed first, that is, before the execution of the variable display corresponding to the suspension of the pre-reading notice target, the normal state changes to a time-saving state (which may be a variable state) Therefore, the variable display result and the variation pattern may be different between the time of prefetching and the execution of variable display corresponding to suspension of the prefetch announcement target. Therefore, in the limit-time pending change determination table shown in FIG. 41-23(B), the execution of the pending display change effect where the jackpot expectation is a certain value or more ("green" or more in this example) is restricted. In addition, in the illustrated example, it is possible to execute the pending display change effect in the form of "blue", but it may be possible to perform only non-execution. In addition, for example, if the variable display result is "losing" in the stored hold and the hold that is the variation pattern of the time saving fake is stored, the display mode of the hold display for the notice target is initially set to "blue". ”, and after the end of the variable display corresponding to the suspension of the variation pattern of the time-saving gusset, the display mode for the suspension of the notice target (suspension displayed in “blue”) is displayed as “green” or higher. You may make it change. Also, the active display may change to a mode of "green" or more. When the limit pending change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 41-22, whether or not to execute the pending display change effect and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the limit pending change determination table. .

Also, in the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 41-23 (A) and the limit hold change determination table shown in FIG. , An example of the same aspect as the case of "big hit" was shown, but for example, when the variable display result is "losing (time saving)", or when the variable display result is "losing", fluctuation of time saving fake If it is a pattern, it may have a specific aspect (for example, "when?"). According to this, the variation of the pending display change effect is increased, and the player's attention can be attracted.

Fig. 41-23 (C) shows a special figure 2 time saving reservation change determination table is a table that is selected when the received start opening winning command is the second starting opening winning designation command. As shown, in the special figure 2 temporary hold change decision table, the normal hold change decision table shown in FIG. 41-23 (A) and the limit hold change decision table shown in FIG. 41-23 (B) In contrast, when the variable display result is "failed (shorter time)" or when the variable display result is "failed" and the variation pattern is a time-saving fake, no determination ratio is assigned. When the received starting opening winning command is the second starting opening winning designation command and the winning determination is not restricted, the game state is a time saving state (during high base control). In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, even if the time saving pattern (special figure) is stopped and displayed in the time saving state, the time saving control is not newly performed, and furthermore, the return production described later Controls the time saving state in the remaining hold. Since the performance is performed to suggest whether or not to be done, there is no need to execute the pending display change performance for notifying that the time saving state will occur. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the time saving change determination table for special figure 2, if the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" or the variable display result is "loss", it is a time saving change pattern A decision percentage is not assigned to the case. When the special figure 2 working hours reservation change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. The presence or absence and mode of implementation are determined.

Returning to FIG. 41-22, after executing the process of step S1304, or when it is determined that the determination is restricted at the time of winning in step S1303 (step S1303; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the result of determination in step S1304 is stored in association with the suspension number corresponding to the new start winning in the suspension display data storage unit (step S1311). At this time, if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning determination is restricted, data corresponding to "no execution (white)" in the pending change determination table shown in FIG. 41-23 may be stored.

Following the processing of step S1311, after performing the update setting of the pending display at the time of starting winning (step S1313), the pre-reading notice setting processing is terminated. For example, when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning hole and the number of the first special figure reservation memory is increased by 1, the first reservation display in the first reservation display unit 5HR is increased by 1, Add a new first pending indication. On the other hand, when the number of second special figure reservation memory is increased by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening, so that the second reservation display in the second reservation display unit 5HL is increased by 1, Add a new second pending indication. The first pending display and the second pending display added at this time may be the pending display of the mode determined in step S1304 and stored in step S1311.

FIG. 41-24 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is during time saving (step 059AKS086). At step 059AKS086, it is determined whether or not the high base flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the production control flag setting section) of the RAM 122 is set to the ON state, thereby determining whether or not the time is being shortened. good.

If it is during time saving (step 059AKS086; Yes), the production control CPU 120 updates the time saving number by subtracting 1 from the time saving number (step 059AKS086A). Incidentally, the number of time reductions is set in the process of step 059AKS133 (see FIGS. 41-30), which will be described later, and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. FIG. After executing the processing of step 059AKS086A, or when it is determined that it is not in the time saving at step 059AKS086 (step 059AKS086; No), whether or not the production control CPU 120 receives a left-handed instruction command from the main board 11 side is determined (step 059AKS087), and if received (step 059AKS087; Yes), a left-handed instruction display (see M6 in FIGS. 41-34 (N-2)) is performed ( step 059AKS088). Note that the left-handed instruction display may be continued for 5 seconds each time during the period from when the left-handed instruction command is received until the variable display is performed, for example, four times. . When the left-handed instruction command is not received (step 059AKS087; No) or when the processing of step 059AKS088 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 sends the right-handed instruction command or the simple mode right-handed instruction command to the main board 11 side. (Step 059AKS089).

When one of the right-handed instruction command and the simple mode right-handed instruction command is received (step 059AKS089; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs right-handed instruction display according to each command (step 059AKS090). Specifically, when the right-handed instruction command is received, the right-handed instruction display M3 in the mode shown in FIG. 41-33 (F) is performed, and when the simple mode right-handed instruction command is received, the Right-handed instruction display M3 as shown in 35(O) is performed. In addition, after performing the right-handed instruction display according to each command in step 059AKS090, until the time saving state ends, in each variable display, as shown in FIGS. 41-33 (G), other effects It is sufficient that the right-handed instruction display is performed in a manner that does not interfere with the

After executing the process of step 059AKS090, or when it is determined at step 059AKS089 that neither the right-handed instruction command nor the simple mode right-handed instruction command is received (step 059AKS089; No), the effect control CPU 120 , determines whether or not the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command are normally received (step 059AKS090A). At step 059AKS090A, for example, by checking the contents of the performance control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, it is possible to determine whether or not the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command are normally received.

If either command of the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command has not been received normally (step 059AKS090A; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing at the time of failure (step 059AKS090B).

FIG. 41-25 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step 059AKS090B of FIG. In the missing processing shown in FIG. 41-25, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is normally received, that is, whether or not the missed command is the display result designation command (step 059AKS093). If the variation pattern designation command has not been received normally (step 059AKS093; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the processing at the time of failure as it is. In this case, the variable display of the decoration pattern is not performed, and the previous variable display result is kept on standby until the design confirmation designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side. , the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specifying command may be stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern specification command can be normally received (step 059AKS093; Yes), that is, if the missing command is the display result specification command, the effect control CPU120, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a fixed time-saving variation pattern or a time-saving fake variation pattern, that is, it is determined whether it is a PB2-4 or PB2-5 variation pattern (step 059AKS094). If it is a time-saving fixed variation pattern or a time-saving false variation pattern (step 059AKS094; Yes), since the variation pattern includes a time-saving fan effect period, the stop symbol setting process described later is performed (step 059AKS095), Terminate the processing when the data is lost. In addition, in the characteristic part 059AK in this embodiment, even if the display result designation command is missed, if the fluctuation pattern designation command can be received normally, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is If it is a time-saving fixed variation pattern or a time-saving variation pattern, the stop pattern setting process described later is performed, and the time-saving fanning effect can be executed, but either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command is missed In this case, it may be possible to prohibit the execution of time-saving productions such as time-saving fanning productions, such as stop-displaying a predetermined decoration pattern at the time of omission.

On the other hand, if it is not a time-saving fixed variation pattern or a time-saving false variation pattern (step 059AKS094; No), the effect control CPU 120 uses a combination of decorative symbols according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command as the final stop symbol. A decision is made (step 059AKS096), and the processing at the time of failure is terminated. In step 059AKS096, the combination with the lowest advantage for the player may be determined from among the combinations of decoration symbols that can be selected in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specifying command. According to this, it is possible to prevent inconsistency such that a combination of decorative patterns with a high degree of advantage is stopped and displayed, but in fact the result is a result with a low degree of advantage, and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be prevented. be able to. In this case, since the display result designation command is missed, the effect control board 12 side cannot determine whether or not the variable display result is "loss (time saving)". Therefore, the effect control CPU120, after executing the effect corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command (for example, the reach effect of super reach), such that the variable display result is "losing (time saving)" In that case, until the symbol confirmation designation command is received, for example, a decorative symbol "???" may be displayed, or a predetermined lost symbol may be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 41-24, if the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command are successfully received (step 059AKS090A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 ( command stored in the display result designation command storage area), etc., it is determined whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) is "losing" (step S551). When it is determined that the special figure display result (variable display result) is "losing" (step S551; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, for example, receives a variation pattern determination result designation command (variation pattern determination command stored in the result designation command storage area) is a non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA1 -2) is determined (step S552).

When it is determined that it is a non-reach variation pattern in the process of step S552 (step S552; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination (step S553 ). For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decoration pattern of the non-reach combination updated by the production random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and stores it in the ROM 121. Determined decorative patterns (decorative patterns of non-ready-to-win combinations) are determined by referring to a pre-stored and prepared non-ready-to-win combination decorative pattern determination table.

When it is determined in the processing of step S552 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes stop symbol setting processing (step 059AKS092).

FIG. 41-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the stop symbol setting process executed at step 059AKS092 of FIG. 41-24. In the stop pattern setting process, the execution setting of the time saving production and the execution setting of the return production are performed, and if the special figure display result (variable display result) is "losing (time saving)", the time saving pattern is finally stopped. Processing to make it a pattern is performed. In addition, the time-saving design to be stopped and displayed in the decorative design is called a time-saving design in order to distinguish it from the time-saving design of the special design.

In the stop symbol setting process in FIG. 41-26, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the display result designation command (the command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11, etc., and displays the special figure. It is determined whether the result is "losing (time saving)" or "losing" and the fluctuation pattern of time saving false (step 059AKS101).

If the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)", or if it is "losing" and is a fluctuation pattern of time saving fake (step 059AKS101; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is whether it is during time saving is determined (step 059AKS102). In step 059AKS102, it is determined whether or not the high base flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, production control flag setting section) of the RAM 122 is set to the ON state, thereby determining whether or not the time is being shortened. good. If it is not during time saving (step 059AKS102; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the losing symbol of the ready-to-win combination as a temporary stop symbol (step 059AKS103). Specifically, in the characteristic portion 059AK, if the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" or "losing" and is a fluctuation pattern of time saving guess, reach production of super reach is executed, then Short-time inciting production is executed. Therefore, in step 059 AKS103, the symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed as a result of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is determined as the missing symbol of the ready-to-win combination. In step 059, AKS 103, for example, numerical data representing random numbers for determining decoration patterns of ready-to-win combinations updated by random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect are extracted, and decorations of ready-to-win combinations prepared and stored in advance in ROM 121 are extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, the temporary stop symbol (decorative symbol of the ready-to-win combination) may be determined.

After executing the process of step 059AKS103, the effect control CPU 120 executes a time saving effect setting process for setting for executing the time saving effect (step 059AKS104).

FIG. 41-27 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS 104 of FIG. 41-26 as the time saving effect setting process. In the time saving effect setting process shown in FIG. As shown in 41-28, the time-saving fanning effect pattern is determined (step 059AKS113), and the time-saving fanning effect setting process is terminated. In addition, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 41-28, when the time saving fanning production setting process is executed by stopping symbol setting processing in the missing time processing in FIG. 41-25, time saving If it is other than the variation pattern of fake, the time saving type is unknown, so it is possible to decide on the time saving fan effect pattern of the pattern dedicated to the time of missing (for example, the effect pattern of “success D” with a time of 5 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 41-28, when the time saving type is "time saving A" and "time saving B", the time saving effect pattern of "success A" with the effect time of 10 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving C", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success B" with the effect time of 2 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving D", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success C" with the effect time of 1 second is determined. In the case of the time-saving variation pattern, the performance time is determined to be a "failure" time-saving performance pattern of 10 seconds. The production time is the time corresponding to the time-saving production period added in step 059AKS013 of FIG. A time corresponding to the time-saving fanning performance period is determined as a time-shortening fanning performance time by a specified command and a variation pattern specifying command. In addition, in the characteristic part 059AK, since the production time is the same for the time saving production pattern of “success A” and the time saving production pattern of “failure”, for example, the same character is displayed, and the time saving pattern is displayed in “success A”. is a success pattern that is finally stopped and displayed, and in "failure", the time saving pattern is not finally stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern of the reach combination is a failure pattern that is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not the game will be successful (whether or not the symbols for time saving are stopped and displayed). In addition, in the characteristic portion 059AK, as shown in FIG. 41-12, the ratio of the variable display result to "loss (time reduction)" is different depending on the type of reach production to be executed. Similarly, the execution ratio differs according to the type of ready-to-win effect to be executed. That is, with regard to the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win A with a high degree of expectation for big hits, the variable display result does not become "losing (time saving)", and the time-saving fanning effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation of the specific display result. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 41-12 (B), even if the time-saving effect is executed, the variable display result does not become "losing (time-saving)". A low reach production is executed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving fanning performance is executed differs according to the type of the ready-to-win performance to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving design is stop-displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving fanning performance also differs.

Returning to FIG. 41-26, after executing the process of step 059AKS104, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" (step 059AKS105). When the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" (step 059AKS105; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the reach combination decoration pattern including the time saving pattern as the final stop pattern (step 059AKS106) and stops. Finish the pattern setting process. In addition, in step 059AKS106, the pattern for time saving in the form corresponding to the type of time saving may be determined as the final stop pattern (see FIGS. 41-32 (D-1) and 41-34 (M-1)).

In step 059AKS101, if the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" or "losing" and is not a fluctuation pattern of time saving fake (step 059AKS101; No), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the decoration pattern this time. is a variable display corresponding to the variation of the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time saving (step 059AKS107). For example, in step 059AKS107, after the number of times of time saving is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0" in step 059AKS086A of FIG. Whether or not the variable display corresponds to the second special figure may be determined by whether or not the second symbol variation start designation command is received.

If it is a variable display (variation) corresponding to the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of time saving (step 059AKS107; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is the second special that is stored after the end of time saving Execute return production setting processing for executing return production that suggests whether or not a hold in which the special figure display result is "lost (time saving)" is stored in the hold storage corresponding to the variable display in the figure (step 059AKS108).

FIG. 41-29 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS108 of FIG. 41-26 as the return effect setting process. In the return effect setting process shown in FIG. 41-29, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a hold in which the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" in the holding storage corresponding to the second special figure. , by checking the contents of the effect control command receiving buffer corresponding to the second special figure among the effect control command receiving buffers provided in the RAM 122 (step 059AKS115).

If there is a hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure, the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" (step 059AKS115; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 holds the second special figure. Set a return success pattern that notifies that there is a hold in which the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" in the memory, that is, that the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed again in any of the remaining holds (step 059 AKS 116 ), the return effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is no suspension in which the special figure display result is "loss (time saving)" in the suspension storage corresponding to the second special figure (step 059AKS115; No), the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the second special figure. A return failure pattern that notifies that there is no hold in the hold memory where the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)", that is, that the time saving pattern will not be displayed again in any of the remaining holds. Set (step 059AKS117), and terminate the return effect setting process. In addition, in the characteristic part 059AK, the return effect of the return success pattern and the return effect of the return failure pattern both execute a common effect (effect to incite whether it will be in a time saving state again), and as a result, stop display The combination of decorative patterns that are used is a different production.

Returning to FIG. 41-26, after executing the process of step 059AKS108, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the return effect pattern set in step 059AKS108 is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109). If it is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109; Yes), the decorative design of the ready-to-win combination including the time-saving return design is determined as the final stop design (step 059AKS110), and the stop design setting process is completed. The time saving return pattern is a pattern different from the time saving pattern determined according to the time saving type as the final stop pattern in step 059AKS106 (see FIGS. 41-34 (K-1)). On the other hand, if it is not a return success pattern (step 059AKS109; No) or if it is determined that it is in the time saving at step 059AKS102 (step 059AKS102; Yes), the special figure display result at step 059AKS105 is "losing (time saving)" If it is determined that it is not (step 059AKS105; No) or if it is determined that it is not a variable display corresponding to the variation of the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time saving at step 059AKS107 (step 059AKS107; No ), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of final stop symbols constituting a ready-to-win combination (step 059AKS111). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, the random number data indicating the random number value for determining the decoration pattern of the ready-to-win combination, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, and is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to the determined decorative pattern determination table of the ready-to-win combination, the fixed decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the ready-to-win combination) is determined. Thus, in the stop design setting process, even if it is determined that the special figure display result is "loss (time saving)" at step 059AKS105, if it is during time saving (step 059AKS102; Yes), the decorative design The final stop symbol becomes the decoration symbol of the ready-to-win combination by the processing of step 059AKS111.

Returning to FIG. 41-24, after executing the process of step 059AKS092, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display based on the setting of the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern. After performing the setting for executing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern such as the effect to be made and the mini game (step S559), the effect control pattern is any one of a plurality of prepared patterns. (step S560). Production control CPU 120, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result designation command, selects one of the prepared production control patterns (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) and uses it. set as a pattern. In addition, when it is decided to execute the time-saving fanning performance or return performance, a performance control pattern corresponding to the time-saving fanning performance or return performance is selected and set as a use pattern. In addition, when it is determined that the variation pattern designation command cannot be normally received in the processing at the time of failure in step 059AKS090B, it is not necessary to select the effect control pattern. In this case, the variable display of the decoration pattern is not performed and the result of the previous variable display remains unchanged. At the same time, the decoration pattern corresponding to the display result specifying command may be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received normally in the processing at step 059AKS090B when it is lost, in the step S560, an effect control pattern dedicated to when it is lost may be selected. .

Following the process of step S560, the effect control CPU 120, for example, corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result specification command and the effect time in the case of executing the time-saving fan effect, a predetermined area of the RAM 122 ( The initial value of the production control process timer provided in the production control timer setting unit etc. is set (step S561). Specifically, in step S561, if the execution setting of the time-saving fanning effect is set in the time-saving fanning effect setting process of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 41-26, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result specification command The initial value of the performance control process timer is set by adding the performance time of the time-saving fanning performance to the time. After execution of step S561, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern and the like on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step S562). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (special figure fluctuation effect control pattern) determined in the process of step S560 VDP of the display control unit 123 , etc., to start the fluctuation of the decorative patterns in the respective “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. All you have to do is

After executing the process of step S562, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is the value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S563), and then performs the variable display start setting process. exit.

FIG. 41-30 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect processing during variable display executed in step S172 of FIG. When the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 41-30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S801 ). Production control CPU120, for example, to update the timer value of the production control process timer (for example, 1 subtraction), when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update. Then, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed in the process of step S801 (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the time reduction number display period for displaying the time reduction number (step 059 AKS 121 ). The time saving frequency display period is a period for displaying the time saving frequency updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 41-24, and may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined in step S560. When it is determined that it is the time saving number display period (step 059AKS121; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays the time saving number updated in step 059AKS086A in FIG. 41-24 as the remaining time saving number. (step 059AKS122).

After executing the process of step 059AKS122, or when it is determined that it is not the time reduction number display period in step 059AKS121 (step 059AKS121; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect (Step 059AKS123). The ready-to-win effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined according to the variation pattern, for example. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 059AKS123; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control for executing the ready-to-win effect (step 059AKS124).

After executing the process of step 059AKS124, or when it is determined that it is not the ready-to-win effect period in step 059AKS123 (step 059AKS123; No), the effect control CPU 120 is the pattern temporary stop timing which is the timing of temporarily stopping and displaying the decoration pattern. It is determined whether or not there is (step 059AKS125). The symbol temporary stop timing may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined when the temporary stop symbol of the ready-to-win combination is determined in the stop symbol setting process of FIG. 41-26 (step 059AKS103). When it is determined that it is the pattern temporary stop timing (step 059AKS125; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern temporary stop display (step 059AKS126), and temporarily stops the decorative pattern of the ready-to-win combination determined in step 059AKS103. display.

After executing the process of step 059AKS126, or when it is determined that it is not the pattern temporary stop timing at step 059AKS125 (step 059AKS125; No), the production control CPU 120 is a time saving production period for executing the time saving production. (Step 059AKS127). The time saving effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the time saving effect setting process of FIG. 41-27, for example. When it is determined that it is the time-saving fanning production period (step 059AKS127; Yes), the production control CPU 120 performs time-saving fanning production control for executing the time-saving fanning production (step 059AKS128).

After executing the process of step 059AKS128, or when it is determined that it is not the time saving production period at step 059AKS126 (step 059AKS126; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether it is the return production period for executing the return production. (Step 059AKS129). The return effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the return effect setting process of FIG. 41-29. When it is determined that it is the return effect period (step 059AKS129; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs return effect control for executing the return effect (step 059AKS130).

After executing the processing of step 059AKS130, or when it is determined that it is not the return production period (step 059AKS129; No), the production control CPU 120 is based on the setting in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, In addition, control is performed to execute effects during variable display, including effects for changing the display mode of the active display and variable display operations of decoration symbols such as mini games (step S808), and effect processing during variable display is performed. finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed in step S801 (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the design determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been normally received (step S809). At this time, if the pattern confirmation command is not normally received (step 809; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) is "loss (time reduction)". (step 059AKS137). If the special figure display result (variable display result) is not "losing (time saving)" (step 059AKS137; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect process during variable display.

On the other hand, when the special figure display result (variable display result) is "losing (time saving)" (step 059AKS137; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets "XXX" as the special time saving number to the time saving number (step 059AKS138), after performing a special time-saving number notification control for displaying "??? times" as the time-saving number of times notification (059AKS139), the effect processing during variable display is terminated. It should be noted that, if the pattern confirmation command is not normally received, the effect itself of notifying the number of times of time saving may not be executed. Also, although it was received normally, for example, when a mismatch occurs such as the content indicated by the pattern confirmation command and the content indicated by the display result designation command do not match, similarly, as a notification of the number of times of time saving, "? ?times” may be performed, or the effect itself for notifying the number of times of working hours may not be executed.

When the pattern confirmation command is normally received in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, for example, transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Decoration Control for deriving and displaying the final stop pattern (determined ornamental pattern), which is the display result in the variable display of patterns, is performed (step S810). After executing the processing of step 810, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determined symbol display time corresponding to the received symbol determination command (step 059AKS131). At step 059AKS131, it is sufficient to set the fixed time indicated by commands 8F00 to 8F04 set for transmission at step 059AKS043 or step 059AKS044 shown in FIG. 41-15.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS131, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) is "lost (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132). If the special figure display result (variable display result) is "losing (time saving)" (step 059AKS132; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is specified by the received symbol confirmation command Time saving number of times (Fig. 41-15 (B )) is set (step 059AKS133), and the time saving number notification control for displaying the number of times of time saving (informing the number of times of time saving) is performed (step 059AKS134).

After executing the process of step 059AKS134, or when it is determined that the special figure display result (variable display result) is not "loss (time reduction)" at step 059AKS132 (step 059AKS132; No), the effect control CPU 120 hits right. It is determined whether or not an erase command has been received from the main board 11 side (step 059AKS135), and if received (step 059AKS135; Yes), the right-handed instruction display is erased (step 059AKS136). After executing the process of step 059AKS136, or when it is determined that the right-handed erase command has not been received at step 059AKS135 (step 059AKS135; No), the effect control CPU 120 waits for the value of the effect process flag for a special figure. The value corresponding to the process is updated to "3" (step S812), and the effect process during variable display ends.

FIGS. 41-31 are timing charts showing respective timings during variable display when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed otherwise. FIGS. 41-31 (A) to (C) all show examples in which the variable display result is “loss” (including failure (time saving)). Specifically, FIG. 41-31(A) shows an example of a case where a time-saving design ("time-saving A" as a time-saving type) is stopped and displayed as the final stop design of the decorative design. (B) shows an example in which the time-saving design is not stopped and displayed as the final stop design of the decorative design without the time-saving fanning effect being executed, and FIG. An example in the case of fluctuation patterns is shown. In the illustrated example, for ease of understanding, both FIGS. 41-31 (A) to (C) show examples in which super reach C is executed, and FIGS. B) shows an example in which the variation pattern of PB2-1 is selected, and FIG. 41-31(C) shows an example in which the variation pattern of PB2-5 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 41-31 (A), when the time-saving design is stopped and displayed as the final stop design of the decorative design, when the variable display is started, the ready-to-win state is entered, and then the ready-to-win effect of super reach C is executed. be. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing comes, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbol of the ready-to-win combination is temporarily stopped and displayed (decorative symbol 757 in this example). And a short-time teasing performance is performed. The time saving production period L4 is 10 seconds, like the time saving production period L5 shown in FIG. 41-31(C) (see FIGS. 41-9 and 41-10). After the end of the time-saving production, when the pattern confirmation command is received, the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern (in this example, the combination of decorative patterns at 7:07), and after the fixed pattern display period L1 has passed, the fluctuation finish. The fixed symbol display period L1 is 10 seconds (see FIG. 41-15(B)).

As shown in FIG. 41-31 (B), when the time-saving design is not stopped and displayed as the final stop design of the decorative design without the time-saving fan effect being executed, when the variable display is started, it becomes a reach state. , and then the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win C is executed. After that, when the design decision command is received (767 in this example). After the fixed symbol display period L2 elapses, the variation ends. The fixed symbol display period L2 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 41-15(A)), which is the same as the fixed symbol display period L3 shown in FIG. 41-31(C).

As shown in FIG. 41-31(C), when the variable display is started in the case of the time-saving fake variation pattern, a ready-to-win state is entered, and then the ready-to-win effect of super reach C is executed. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing comes, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbol of the ready-to-win combination is temporarily stopped and displayed (decorative symbol 757 in this example). And a short-time teasing performance is performed. The time saving production period L5 is 10 seconds, like the time saving production period L4 shown in FIG. 41-31(A) (see FIGS. 41-9 and 41-10). After the end of the time-saving production, when the symbol confirmation command is received, the winning symbol of the ready-to-win combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (767 in this example). Then, after the fixed symbol display period L3 has passed, the variation ends. The fixed symbol display period L3 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 41-15(A)), which is the same as the fixed symbol display period L2 shown in FIG. 41-31(B).

Next, an example of an effect operation in the case where the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed or when the time saving effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-32 to 41-35.

As shown in FIG. 41-32 (A), after the ready-to-win effect of super reach C is executed, if the game state is the normal state, when it comes to the symbol temporary stop timing, to FIG. As shown, the decorative symbols of the ready-to-win combination are temporarily stopped and displayed. In the illustrated example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the decorative design 5La is "7", the decorative design 5Ca is "5", and the decorative design 5Ra is displayed. 8 shows an example in which "7" is displayed as a temporary stop. As shown in the figure, the symbol "5" as the decorative symbol 5Ca may be displayed in a state in which it is possible to visually recognize that the vehicle is temporarily stopped while it is still swaying. In addition, not only the decorative design 5Ca in each "middle" decorative design display area 5C, but all the decorative designs may be shaken. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the time saving state, since step 059AKS102 in FIG. 41-26 is determined as No, the process of step 059AKS111 is performed without temporarily stopping display of the decoration symbol of the ready-to-win combination. , and as shown in FIG. 41-32 (B-2), the losing symbol of the ready-to-win combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In addition, in the illustrated example, the time saving pattern is displayed stopped as a special figure display result (in the illustrated example, the example of the special figure display result of "1" which is the time saving type of time saving A is shown) On the other hand, the decorative pattern , shows an example in which the time saving pattern does not stop and display. In addition, as shown in FIG. 41-32 (B-2), after the lost symbol of the ready-to-win combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, the variation ends 0.5 seconds after the fixed symbol display period.

From the state shown in FIG. 41-32 (B-1), when it comes to the time saving production period, as shown in FIG. 41-32 (C), the time saving production is executed. In the illustrated example, by displaying the message M1 "It may be time saving!?" Depending on whether the player wins or not, it may be determined whether or not the symbols for time saving are stopped and displayed.

Then, when the symbol determination command is received, the final stop symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 41-32 (D-1) or (D-2). In FIG. 41-32 (D-1), the variable display result is “loss (time saving)”, and the pattern confirmation command of 8F01 shown in FIG. It shows an example when the time saving pattern 5Cb of the time saving type is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern, and the special figure display result shows the number "1" which is the time saving pattern of the time saving type of "time saving A". It shows an example when a special symbol is displayed as a special symbol display result. In the illustrated example, before the time saving pattern 5Cb is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the active display AHA changes and shows an example in which the display mode becomes "green". The display mode may change immediately after the start of the production, or may change during the ready-to-win production of super reach. On the other hand, if it is a time-saving variation pattern, to receive the 8F00 symbol confirmation command shown in FIG. 41-15 (A), as shown in FIG. The losing pattern of the reach combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, as a special figure display result, a special figure indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost figure, is displayed as a special figure display result. Then, the variation ends 0.5 seconds after the fixed symbol display period. In addition, in the illustrated example, before the losing pattern of the reach combination is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the active display AHA changes and shows an example of the case where the display mode becomes "blue", but for example, time saving The display mode may change immediately after the start of the fanning production, or may change during the ready-to-win production of super reach. In addition, regarding the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, depending on which display mode the display mode of the active display changes, even if it is the same type of reach effect of super reach, the time saving pattern will be displayed stopped. The display mode of the active display may be changed so that the proportion of the active display is different. Note that the change destination of the display mode in the active change effect may be the same as the decision ratio in the normal hold change decision table shown in FIG. 41-23(A). Also, unlike the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 41-23 (A), when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" and when it is a time saving change pattern, the variable display result In the case of "loss (shorter working hours)", the ratio of the display modes of "green" and "red" may be higher.

In the state shown in FIG. 41-32 (D-1), the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 41-30 is executed, so that as shown in FIG. M2 is performed. In this case, since the pattern confirmation command of 8F01 shown in FIG. 41-15(B) has been received as the pattern confirmation command, the display of "time reduction 100 times!" is performed as the time reduction number display M2. It should be noted that when the process of step 059AKS139 in Figure 41-30 is executed, as a special time-saving number notification control, the display of "time-saving ??? times" is performed and the time-saving number (time-saving number of times) is limited. Just do it. Then, when 10 seconds, which is the fixed pattern display period specified by the pattern confirmation command of 8F01, has passed, as shown in FIG. variable display corresponding to HL1) is started. At that time, the pending indications HL3 and HL2 shift to the right. Further, by the processing of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 41-30, as shown in FIG. 41-33(F), the number of times of shortening of working hours display M4 of "99 remaining times of shortening of working hours" is displayed. Further, at step 059AKS090 in FIG. 41-24, a right-handed instruction display M3 is performed as shown in FIG. 41-33(F).

After that, the variable display is performed a plurality of times in the time saving state. FIG. 41-33(G) shows an example of the 81st variable display after the stop display of the time saving symbol. In the time-saving state, since the game balls are likely to enter the second start winning opening, the variable display corresponding to the second special figure is performed and the hold corresponding to the second special figure is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 41-33 (G), four holding memories corresponding to the second special figure are stored, which is the maximum number, and four holding displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed. Moreover, the example in which the number of times of shortening of working hours display M4 of "remaining 19 times of shortening of working hours" is displayed is shown. In addition, the right-handed instruction display in the mode shown in FIG. 41-33 (F) ends with the first variable display after the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, and after the second time, FIG. 41-33 (G ), it is displayed as a right-handed instruction display M3 that does not interfere with other effects.

When the 100th variable display (the 100th variation in the time saving state) after the stop display of the time saving symbol ends, the time saving state ends. FIG. 41-33 (H) is an example of the case where the decoration patterns 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop patterns constituting the non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed in the 100th variable display after the time-saving patterns are stopped and displayed. is shown. After the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols, are stopped and displayed, the variation ends and the time saving state ends 0.5 seconds after the fixed pattern display period specified by the pattern fixing command of 8F00. By the end of the time saving state, in order to receive the right-handed erase command from the main board 11 side, the processing of step 059 AKS136 shown in FIG. 41-30 is performed, and right-handed as shown in FIG. The instruction display M3 is erased. In this state, as shown in the figure, the maximum number of four pending memories corresponding to the second special figure is stored, four pending displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed, and the variable corresponding to the pending display HR1 The period from the start of the display to the end of the variable display corresponding to HR4 is the remaining hold period).

Subsequently, the time-saving state is terminated and the normal state is entered, and as shown in FIG. 41-33(I), a variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is started. The illustrated example shows an example in which the variable display result is "loss" (an example is shown that is not "loss (time saving)" either). In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, although it is in the normal state, the special figure display result in the variable display corresponding to the holding of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state becomes "loss (time saving)" Since the ratio is high (see FIGS. 41-5 (A) and (B)), the ratio of being controlled to the time saving state again is high. Therefore, during the remaining holding period, although the state is normal, the left-handed instruction display is not performed as shown in the figure, and the player is confused by the instruction display of the right-handed instruction display and the left-handed instruction display. It prevents you from letting it happen. Note that the left-handed instruction display is performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the remaining holding period, as shown in FIG. 41-34 (N-2).

The variable display is the first variable display in the second special figure performed after the end of the time saving, and since the execution setting of the return production is performed in the processing of step 059AKS108 in FIG. 41-26, the return production When the period comes, the return effect is executed as shown in FIG. 41-34(J). In the return effect, for example, depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared, whether or not a hold in which the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" is stored (variable corresponding to HR2 to HR4, which are remaining holds) Whether or not the display result is “losing (time saving)”), that is, an effect suggesting whether or not the time saving return symbol is stopped and displayed may be executed. If it is a return success pattern, while the predetermined mission is cleared and the time saving return pattern is stopped and displayed, if it is a return failure pattern, the predetermined mission ends in failure, and the time saving return pattern is not stopped and displayed. It is only necessary that the combination of the decorative symbols that constitute the ready-to-win be stopped and displayed as the final stop. Moreover, there may be a plurality of types of predetermined missions, and the success rate may differ according to the type of the mission. It should be noted that if the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is "losing (time saving)", it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS101 of FIG. 41-26, so the return effect is not executed, but the return effect is executed. You may make it In this case, the time-saving fanning effect should be executed after the return effect.

Special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" If the hold is stored, that is, if the return success pattern, by the process of step 059AKS110 in FIG. 41-26, to FIG. 41-34 (K-1) As shown, a combination of decoration patterns including a time saving return pattern 5Cc is stop-displayed as a final stop pattern, and it is notified that there is a hold in which the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" in the stored holds. be done. Note that this example shows a case where the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the holding display HR4 is "failed (time saving)" (more specifically, the time saving type of "time saving D").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 41-34 (L-1), variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, as shown in the figure, the time-saving return small pattern M5 that makes it possible to visually recognize that the time-saving return pattern 5Cc is stop-displayed may be displayed in a manner that does not interfere with other effects. According to this, it is possible to visually recognize that the symbols for time saving are stop-displayed during the remaining hold, so that the player can be given a sense of security.

Then, in the variable display corresponding to the holding display HR4, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the holding display HR4 is "loss (time saving)" (the time saving type is "time saving D"). Receives the pattern confirmation command of 8F04 shown in FIG. 41-15 (B), and as shown in FIG. Is displayed. Regarding the special figure display results, unlike FIG. 41-32 (D-1), a special symbol showing the number "8" corresponding to the time saving pattern of the time saving type of "time saving D" is displayed as a special figure display result. be. In the illustrated example, before the time saving symbol 5Cb is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the active display AHA changes to the "green" display mode.

In the state shown in FIG. 41-34 (M-1), the processing of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 41-30 is executed, as shown in FIG. A count display M2 is performed. In this case, since the pattern confirmation command of 8F04 shown in FIG. 41-15(B) is received as the pattern confirmation command, the display of "time reduction 20 times!" is performed as the time reduction number display M2. Then, when 2 seconds, which is the fixed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F04, elapses, the variation ends, and as shown in FIG. variable display (variable display corresponding to the pending display HL3) is started. Further, by the processing of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 41-30, as shown in FIG. 41-35 (O), the number of times of shortening of working hours display M4 of "19 remaining times of shortening of working hours" is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 41-35(O) at step 059AKS090 in FIG. 41-24, a simple mode right-handed instruction display M3 that is less conspicuous than the mode shown in FIG. 41-33(F) is displayed. be done.

On the other hand, if the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" and the hold is not stored, that is, if it is a return failure pattern, the process of step 059AKS111 in FIG. ), decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra of the ready-to-win combination are stop-displayed as final stop symbols, and the variation ends 0.5 seconds after the fixed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 41-34 (L-2), variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, since it was the return effect of the return failure pattern, unlike FIG. 41-34 (L-1), the time saving return small symbol M5 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 41-34 (M-2), the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed, and the confirmed symbols specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00 are displayed. After 0.5 seconds of the display period, the fluctuation ends and the remaining hold period ends. When the remaining holding period ends, a left-handed instruction command is transmitted from the main board 11 at step 059AKS074 in FIG. 41-18.

Then, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display HL3 is started, the process of step 059AKS088 in FIG. A left-hand hitting instruction display M6 is displayed. In this way, the left-handed instruction display is performed in the variable display executed next after the variable display corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special figure remaining after the end of the time saving is completed.

FIGS. 41-36 are flowcharts showing an example of processing within the information output processing performed within the information output processing of step S23 of FIG. In the processing within the information output processing shown in FIGS. 41 to 36, for example, processing for outputting signals such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. I do. When the processing within the information output processing shown in FIGS. 41-36 is started, the CPU 103 outputs a signal indicating the special figure display result or the normal figure display result as display signal output processing (step S1801). After executing the processing of step S1801, the CPU 103 executes drive signal output processing (step S1802), and outputs drive signals for the solenoids 81 and 82. FIG.

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes external information output processing (step S1803), and ends the processing within the information output processing. In step S1803, a jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is in progress, a jackpot signal 2 indicating that the jackpot or the time saving state is in progress (a special prize is in progress), a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the time saving state is in progress, and Various signals such as a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the variation has ended are output.

FIG. 41-37 is a timing chart showing output timings of various signals output in the external information output process in step S1803 of FIG. 41-36. Specifically, FIG. 41-37 (A) shows the output timing of various signals in the case of the time saving state due to the end of the jackpot game state, and FIG. It shows the output timing of various signals in the case of .

As shown in FIG. 41-37 (A), when the time saving state occurs due to the end of the jackpot game state, first, a pattern confirmation signal indicating the jackpot pattern stop is output, thereby (the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped. ), the big win signal 1 and the big win signal 2 are output at the same timing. Then, when the big win game state ends, the output of the big win signal 1 is stopped, but at that timing, the time saving state occurs, so the big win signal 3 is outputted. Then, with the lapse of time, a pattern confirmation signal indicating the stop of the losing pattern is output, and when the pattern confirmation signal indicating the stop of the big winning pattern is output again without ending the time saving state, the big winning signal 1 is output, and the big winning signal 3 is output. stops output. In addition, since it is a big hit during the time saving state, as shown in the figure, the output of the big win signal 2 is continued. Then, when the big win game state ends, the output of the big win signal 1 is stopped, but at that timing, the time saving state occurs, so the big win signal 3 is outputted. After that, with the passage of time, when the last variable display of the predetermined number of times of time saving ends, a pattern confirmation signal indicating the stop of the lost pattern is output, and the time saving state ends at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops. , the output of the big win signal 2 and the big win signal 3 are stopped at the same timing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41-37 (B), when it becomes a time saving state due to the time saving design stop, first, a design confirmation signal indicating the time saving design stop is output, thereby (the output of the design confirmation signal is stopped ), the big win signal 2 and the big win signal 3 are output at the same timing. Then, with the lapse of time, a pattern confirmation signal indicating the stop of the losing pattern is output, and when the pattern confirmation signal indicating the stop of the jackpot pattern is output without the time saving state ending, the jackpot is generated at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped. The signal 1 is output and the output of the jackpot signal 3 is stopped. Then, when the big win game state ends, the output of the big win signal 1 is stopped. At that timing, the time saving state is resumed, so the big win signal 3 is outputted. Incidentally, as shown in the figure, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output. After that, with the passage of time, when the last variable display of the predetermined number of times of time saving ends, a pattern confirmation signal indicating the stop of the lost pattern is output, and the time saving state ends at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops. , the output of the big win signal 2 and the big win signal 3 are stopped at the same timing. In this way, since the output of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the same timing, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation and prevent confusion, and the external device can be used to shorten the working hours and connect. Zhuang state can be specified. After that, when the pattern confirmation signal indicating the time saving pattern stop is output again, the big winning signal 2 and the big winning signal 3 are output at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped.

As explained above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 059AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

CPU103, in the process of step S1240 shown in FIG. 41-4, regardless of whether the gaming state is a time saving state, it can be determined as a special figure display result "loss (time saving)", special figure display result If "Loss (time saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed, when it is in the normal state, it will be controlled to the time saving state (travel-specific state) in the next special game (variable display). When it is in the state, it does not perform the control related to the game state based on the derived display of the "losing (time saving)" (no new time saving control is performed). In addition, when "losing (time saving)" is derived and displayed as a special figure display result, the effect control CPU 120, in the normal state, at step 059AKS106 in FIG. While the symbols for use are stopped and displayed, when it is in the time-saving state, the last stopped symbols constituting the ready-to-win combination are stopped and displayed at step 059AKS111 in FIG. 41-26. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 41-32 (B-2) and (D-1), when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state "losing (time saving)" (special display result) The special figure display result is a common display result (special figure display result showing the number "1" corresponding to the time saving type of "time saving A"), while the variable display result of the decorative pattern is the game state When is in the normal state, at step 059AKS106 in FIG. 41-26, while stopping and displaying the time-saving design as the final stop design of the decorative design, when it is in the time-saving state, at step 059AKS111 in FIG. 41-26, reach The final stop symbols forming the combination are stopped and displayed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

In addition, in the process of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 41-26, the execution setting of the time-saving effect is performed to indicate whether or not the time-saving design indicating that the time-saving state is controlled from the next variable display is stopped and displayed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the time saving effect. Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs the processing of step 059AKS104 when the game state is the normal state, and does not perform the processing of step 059AKS104 when the game state is the time saving state. Therefore, when it is in the time saving state (special state), the time saving fanning production is not executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

Further, the CPU 103, when the "loss (time saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as a special figure display result, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. While transmitting the decoration design stop command of fixed time shown in FIG. 41-15(B), when it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS041, the decoration design stop command with fixed time of 0.5 seconds is transmitted. That is, if the "loss (time saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as a special figure display result, when the normal state and when the special state, from the time the variable display result is displayed until it is confirmed time (determined time) is different. According to this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

In addition, CPU103, in the processing of step S1240 shown in FIG. 41-4, regardless of whether the gaming state is a time saving state, it can be determined as a special figure display result "loss (time saving)", special figure When "loss (time saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as a display result, when it is in the normal state, it is controlled to the time saving state (travel-specific state) in the next special game (variable display) , When it is in the time saving state, the game state based on the derived display of the "loss (time saving)" is not performed (new time saving control is not performed). Then, as shown in FIG. 41-5, in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table makes the special figure display result "losing ( Data for determination is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control to the time saving state from the next variable display as "time saving)" increases. In addition, the production control CPU 120 returns based on whether or not the hold of "lost (time reduction)" is stored in the hold stored at the end of the time saving state by the processing of step 059AKS108 in FIG. 41-26. Performance can be performed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can display a right-handed instruction in the processing of step 059AKS090 in FIG. Left-handed instruction display is not performed until all variable displays corresponding to the second special figure hold (remaining hold) stored at the end of the time saving state are completed. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 can display a left-handed instruction display at step 059AKS088 in FIG. 41-24 by receiving a left-handed instruction command in the normal state. Then, the left-handed instruction command is transmitted in step 059AKS074 in FIG. 41-18, that is, when the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state is completed. The effect control CPU 120 displays the left-handed instruction display at step 059AKS088 in FIG. . According to this, it is possible to make a suitable launch notification and to smoothly progress the game.

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits different instruction commands for hitting to the right depending on whether or not it is the remaining holding period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 41-16. Then, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, a right-handed instruction display is performed in accordance with the received command at step 059AKS090 in FIG. 41-24. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed and losing interest in the game.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hold in which the special figure display result is "losing (time saving)" is stored in the return effect (remaining hold HR2 ~ Whether the variable display result corresponding to HR4 is "loss (time saving)"), that is, whether the time saving return pattern is stopped and displayed. The return effect includes a return effect of a successful return pattern and a return effect of a return failure pattern, both of which have a common effect (for example, whether or not it will be in a time saving state again. The purpose is to clear a predetermined mission. Effect) is executed, and as a result, depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared, the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed differs. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention after executing the common effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 41-7, the CPU 103 determines "time saving C" or "time saving D" as the time saving type when the remaining pending variable display result is "loss (time saving)". Then, in the process of step 059AKS113 in FIG. 41-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines a time saving effect pattern for executing a different pattern of time saving effect depending on the time saving type, as shown in FIG. 41-28. That is, the time-saving effect that is executed when the variable display result corresponding to the first special figure in the normal state is "losing (time saving)", and the variable display result corresponding to the second special figure of the remaining reservation is "losing (Working time reduction)”, a different pattern of time saving performance is executed. According to this, since different patterns of effects are executed according to the situation, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed erasure command in the variable display of the time-saving end time by the processing of step 059AKS066 in FIG. 41-17. Then, the effect control CPU 120 erases the right-handed instruction display by the processing of step 059AKS136 in FIG. Therefore, the right-handed instruction display is deleted during the remaining holding period. In addition, the CPU 103 transmits different instruction commands for hitting to the right depending on whether or not it is the remaining holding period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 41-16. Then, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state (variable display performed next to the variable display in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed), in step 059AKS090 of FIGS. Right-handed instruction display is performed in a mode corresponding to the received command. According to this, it is possible to make a suitable launch notification and to smoothly progress the game.

In addition, the CPU 103, through the processing of step S1803 in FIG. Various signals such as a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the game is in progress and a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the variation has ended can be output to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, for example. Then, when the time saving pattern is stopped and it becomes a time saving state, as shown in FIG. 41-37 (B), a pattern confirmation signal indicating the time saving pattern stop is output, and the jackpot signal is output at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped. is output. According to this, it is possible to preferably specify the time saving state and the continuous residence state by the external device.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 41-37(B), the CPU 103 outputs the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 at the same timing at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state is stopped. Stop. According to this, it is possible to preferably specify the time saving state and the continuous residence state by the external device.

Further, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern according to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41-12. As shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) (when the time reduction start flag is turned on, the loss variation pattern determination table is selected), Super Reach A with the highest jackpot expectation A decision value is not assigned, and a decision value is assigned so that the ratio of "losing (time saving)" differs depending on the type of super reach that is performed. Then, the CPU 103 transmits different right-handed instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining holding period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 41-16. Then, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state (variable display performed next to the variable display in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed), in step 059AKS090 of FIGS. Right-handed instruction display is performed in a mode corresponding to the received command. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 41-11 and 11-12, when the ready-to-reach effects of super-reach B and super-reach C are executed, in the case of a big hit, in the case of losing (time saving), in the case of simply losing, , etc., are assigned so as to result in a plurality of variable display results. According to this, the variation of the effect result increases, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the effect control CPU 120 performs effects based on these commands. . The effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, that the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that performs a reach effect of super reach B, and even if it is determined as No in step S552 of FIG. 41-24, the display Based on the result specifying command, whether or not to execute the processing of step 059AKS104 or step 059AKS106 differs depending on whether or not 059AKS101 in FIG. 41-26 is determined to be Yes or No. That is, even when receiving a variation pattern command of common performance contents such as executing a ready-to-reach performance of super reach B or super reach C, different performances are executed depending on the content of the display result specifying command. According to this, the variation of the effect result increases, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the processing of step 059 AKS104 in FIG. 41-26, execution setting of time saving fan effect (special effect) to incite whether or not the time saving pattern indicating that the time saving state is controlled from the next variable display is stopped and displayed is performed, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving fan effect. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time-saving effect after execution of the ready-to-win effect that is common to both when the time-saving effect is executed and when it is not. According to this, since the special performance is executed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 41-12, since the ratio of the variable display result to be “losing (time saving)” differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, the time saving effect is also executed in the same way. The execution ratio is different according to the type of ready-to-win production. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation of the specific display result.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 41-12 (B), even if the time-saving effect is executed, the variable display result does not become "losing (time-saving)". A low reach performance is executed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving fanning performance is executed differs according to the type of the ready-to-win performance to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving design is stop-displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving fanning performance also differs. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation of the specific display result.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display to any display mode, so that the percentage of stop-display of the symbols for time reduction is different even in the same type of reach effect of super reach. Change the display mode of the active display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation of the specific display result.

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the effect control CPU 120 performs effects based on these commands. . For example, even if the content of the received display result designation command is different, if the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern for performing reach performance of super reach B, the special figure display result (variable Display result), the common reach effect of super reach B is executed. According to this, it is possible to suitably execute the effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41-7, the number of times of time saving controlled to the time saving state is different depending on the time saving type, and as shown in FIG. different proportions. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 41-28, the pattern of the time-saving effect produced differs according to the time-saving type. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention because the number of subsequent times of time saving differs depending on the effect to be executed.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command at step S268 in FIG. 41-8, and sets transmission of a decoration symbol stop command at step 059AKS021 in FIG. 41-15. 41-26, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the effect based on the contents of the received display result specifying command in the stop symbol setting process, and in the process of step 059AKS133 in FIG. Sets the number of times of saving time specified by . According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the effect control.

In addition, the effect control CPU120, in the processing of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 41-24, by confirming the contents of the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM122, the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command If it is determined whether or not it has been received normally, and if it has not been received normally, the processing for the time of failure shown in FIG. , prohibits execution of performances related to time saving such as time saving fanning performance such as stop display of a predetermined decorative pattern at the time of missing. According to this, it is possible to suitably execute the effect while preventing the decrease in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU120, when it is determined that it could not be received normally in the processing of step 059AKS090A in FIG. When the variation pattern is a fixed time-saving variation pattern or a time-saving fake variation pattern, by executing the stop pattern setting process in step 059AKS095 of FIG. It is possible. According to this, it is possible to suitably execute the effect while preventing the decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the number of times of time reduction by the received design confirmation command in the process of step 059AKS133 of FIG. 41-30. Then, if the pattern confirmation command could not be received normally, by performing a special time-saving number notification control that displays "??? times" as the time-saving number of times notification in the processing of step 059AKS139, the time-saving number of times notification is executed. Restrict. According to this, it is possible to suitably execute the effect while preventing the decrease in the interest in the game.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a pending display change effect in the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 41-22. Then, in step 059AKS082, the variable display result in the currently stored holding memory is "big hit", "losing (shorter time)", or "losing" and the variation pattern is "time saving". When the suspension of the variation pattern is stored, select the suspension change determination table at the time of restriction shown in FIG. In other words, when a hold in which the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" is stored in the currently stored hold memory, the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in step 059AKS082, the variable display result in the currently stored holding memory is "big hit", "losing (shorter time)", or "losing" and the variation pattern is "time saving". When the suspension of the variation pattern is stored, the suspension change determination table during restriction shown in FIG. 41-23 (B) is selected, and the suspension display change effect is executed. Even when a hold in which the display result is "big hit" is stored, similarly to the case where a hold in which the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" is stored in the currently stored hold memory, FIG. Execution of the pending display change effect is restricted by selecting the pending change determination table for restriction shown in -23(B). According to this, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the presentation due to the state transition and prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, in step 059AKS082, the variable display result in the currently stored holding memory is "big hit", "losing (shorter time)", or "losing" and the variation pattern is "time saving". When the suspension of the variation pattern is stored, the suspension change determination table during restriction shown in FIG. 41-23 (B) is selected, and the suspension display change effect is executed. Even when the display result is ``losing'' and the suspension of the variation pattern of ``shortening of working hours'' is stored, the execution of the suspension display change performance is restricted. According to this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game when the effect relating to the state transition is performed.

As shown in FIG. 41-23(B), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pending display change effect when the pending display change effect is limited, or even if it is executed, the pending display change in the “blue” display mode is performed. perform the performance. That is, the pending display change effect indicating the degree of expectation higher than the display mode of "green" is not executed. According to this, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the presentation due to the state transition and prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 41-23(B), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute a type of pending display change effect that changes to a display mode such as "green" or "red" when restricting the pending display change effect. . According to this, since the execution of the specific type of advance notice effect is restricted, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of useless expectation.

(Modified example of characteristic part 059AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41-5, the time saving pattern as the special figure display result shows an example that is part of the "loss", but this is an example. For example, as shown in FIGS. 41-38, part of the small winning patterns may be the time saving patterns. In this case, the time saving control is performed after the end of the small winning game state, and the right hitting instruction display or the like may be performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the small winning game state. In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, even when the small winning pattern that is the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed again in the special game in the time saving state, the time saving state is not newly controlled, and the effect control CPU 120, Instead of a small winning pattern including a time saving pattern, a combination of ornamental patterns constituting a small winning may be stopped and displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when all the variable displays corresponding to the remaining hold are completed, a left-handed instruction command is transmitted in the processing of step 059AKS074 in FIG. An example is shown in which the left-handed instruction display is performed in the first variable display after the end of the variable display corresponding to . There may be a second mode that is not conspicuous to the player, and the left-hand hitting instruction display of the second mode may be performed in the first variable display after the end of the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold. In addition, the left-handed instruction display is performed for 5 seconds each time during the period from the reception of the left-handed instruction command until the variable display is performed, for example, four times. You may change to a 1st aspect. Further, the left-handed instruction display is not limited to a mere display, and may include sound, lighting of a lamp, or the like (that is, left-handed information that notifies left-handed players). For example, in the first mode, the other output sounds are erased to output a sound informing of left-handed hitting, while in the second mode, the other output sounds are not erased and the sound informing of left-handed hitting is output. do it.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the return effect is performed when the variable display (variation) corresponding to the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time saving is performed, but this is an example. is. The execution timing of the return effect is not limited to the first variable display after the end of the time saving, for example, any hold of the hold storage corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure stored after the end of the time saving is "losing (time saving) , one of the timings of the first to third variable displays performed after the end of the time saving may be determined by lottery as the execution timing of the return effect. In addition, after the execution of the return production of the return failure pattern, a pattern that switches to the return success pattern, and after the execution of the return production of the return failure pattern, the return production of the recovery success pattern is performed in the next variable display. A return effect may be executed a plurality of times throughout the display until a success pattern is achieved.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the pattern of the time-saving effect that is executed according to the time-saving type is different, that is, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "losing (time-saving)" (time-saving C or D Type and when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B), the pattern of the time saving fanning production is different. This is an example.When the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time saving)", and when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time saving)" , The pattern of the time-saving fanning production may be common.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41-15, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving C or D), and in the normal state An example in which the time from the display of the variable display result to the confirmation (confirmation time) differs from the case where the variable display result of the first special figure is "losing (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B) is shown as an example. If the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "losing (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving C or D), and the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "losing (time saving)" In the case (time saving type of time saving A and B), the fixed time may be common. According to this, it is possible to suppress an increase in control data.

For example, the fixed time when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "losing (time saving)" is the same as when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "losing (time saving)" It may be time. According to this, by lengthening the period between the normal state and the time saving state, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the time saving state.

Also, if the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "losing (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving C or D), and the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "losing (time saving)" In the case of (time saving type of time saving A and B) at the fixed time, for example, an example of notifying the number of time saving times in a common manner (Fig. 41-35 (N-1), Fig. 41-33 (E)) However, these may be different aspects.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an example was shown in which the right-handed instruction display was erased after the time-saving state ended and the right-handed instruction display was not performed during the remaining holding period, but this is an example. The right-handed instruction display is not limited to a simple display, and may include sound, lighting of a lamp, etc. For example, a right-handed lamp indicating right-handed hitting may be lit without displaying or outputting sound in the device 5 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41-37(B), when the last variable display of the predetermined number of times of time saving is completed, a symbol determination signal indicating stoppage of the lost symbol is output, and the symbol determination is performed. Since the time-saving state ends at the timing when the output of the signal stops, an example is shown in which the output of the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at that timing, but this is just an example. For example, since the variable display result corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure stored at the time of the time saving end has a high percentage of “loss (time saving)”, even if the time saving state ends, the remaining The output of the jackpot signal 3 may not be stopped until the variable display corresponding to the hold ends. The same applies to the jackpot signal 2 as well. According to this, it is possible to preferably specify the time saving state and the continuous residence state by the external device.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, after the ready-to-win production of super reach, the time-saving fanning production is performed, and the example in which it is suggested whether or not the time-saving symbols stop is shown, but this is an example. For example, as a result of the ready-to-win production, a result of a big hit (including a small win), a symbol stop for time saving, and a loss may be displayed. According to this, the variation of the execution result of the ready-to-win effect is increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, when the variable display result is "losing (time saving)", an example is shown in which the time saving effect period is added to the variation pattern. A display result is provided, a variation pattern similar to the case where the variable display result is ``losing (time saving)'' can be selected, a resurrection performance period to be executed after the ready-to-win performance is added (for example, 20 seconds), and a big hit is formed after the resurrection performance. You may stop and display the design (special design and corresponding decoration design). According to this, the variations of the production are increased and the amusement of the game can be improved. Also, if the variable display result is "resurrection jackpot", the process of adding the resurrection effect period may be executed after step S262 in FIG. can.

In the above-described embodiment, an example of performing an effect to incite whether or not the variable display result will be a big hit by the reach production of super reach, and then an effect to incite whether or not the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed by the time-saving incitement production. , but in addition to this, for example, in the time saving production, in addition to whether the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, whether the big hit pattern is stopped or not, etc. It becomes an advantage over time saving You may make it report|report that. According to this, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the specific display result will be obtained.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the symbol determination command is not normally received in steps S809 and step 059AKS137 of FIGS. If it is a fixed command, an example of limiting the notification of the number of times of working hours by performing a special time-saving number notification control that displays "??? The background image may be changed according to the number of times of reduced working hours, so that the player can specify the number of reduced working hours to some extent even when the special number of reduced working hours notification control is performed. Specifically, from the side of the main board 11, the background designation command is transmitted according to the number of remaining time saving, and on the side of the production control board 12, the background image specified by the received background designation command is displayed. do it. According to this, since the player can specify the number of times of time saving to some extent from the background image, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, every time the variable display is executed, the main board 11 side transmits a time saving number designation command indicating the remaining time saving number of times, and the production control board 12 side transmits the remaining time saving number designation command according to the time saving number designation command. You may report the number of times. According to this, even when the special time saving number information control is performed, the player can specify the remaining number of time saving times, so that the game interest can be prevented from decreasing. Also, for example, if the number of times of time saving is 100 times, a special variation pattern may be transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side at the timing of the remaining 50 times, and the effect control board 12 On the side, in response to receiving the special variation pattern, the remaining 50 times of time reduction may be notified. According to this, even when the special time saving number information control is performed, the player can specify the remaining number of time saving times, so that the game interest can be prevented from decreasing.

In the above embodiment, the variable display result in the holding memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 in FIG. , and when the suspension of the variation pattern of "time saving" is stored, select the limit time suspension change determination table shown in FIG. 41-23 (B) and execute the suspension display change effect, namely , If a hold with a variable display result of "losing (time saving)" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, or if a hold with a variable display result of "big hit" is stored, Fig. 41- 23(B) shows an example of selecting the common pending change determination table for restriction and restricting execution of the pending display change effect, but this is just an example. The case where the currently stored hold memory stores a hold where the variable display result is "losing (time saving)" and the case where the hold where the variable display result is a "big hit" are different. Execution of the suspension display change effect may be restricted by selecting the suspension change determination table during restriction. For example, one may execute the pre-reading notice effect of the pending display change effect, and the other may execute the pre-reading notice effect of the dialogue notice. In this case, it suffices to execute a type of presentation with a low degree of expectation. In addition, when a hold in which the variable display result is ``losing (time saving)'' is stored in the currently stored hold memory, the holding display change performance is not executed, and the variable display result is ``big hit''. When the hold is stored, whether or not to execute the hold change effect may be determined based on the hold change determination table shown in FIG.

Further, in the above embodiment, the variable display result in the holding memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 in FIG. If the suspension of the variation pattern of "losing" and the variation pattern of "time saving" is stored, select the limit time suspension change determination table shown in FIG. Although the example which does not perform the pending|holding display change production|presentation was shown, this is an example. For example, in addition to a pending display change effect as a pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects such as a dialogue notice and a pre-reading zone notice. It is also possible not to execute the pre-reading forewarning effect of the type of zone forewarning. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being diverted to the hold stored before the pre-reading notice target.

In the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are made up of 7-segment LEDs, etc., and the special symbols are numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "-". An example represented by a lighting pattern or the like has been shown, but this is just an example. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-39, are composed of eight LEDs, and the special symbols are represented by a lighting combination of these eight LEDs. good too. Specifically, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit", it is represented by lighting of three LEDs out of eight LEDs, and the variable display result is "losing (time saving) ” and “Loss” may be represented by lighting of two LEDs.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 41-34 (L-1), as shown in FIG. Although the time saving pattern 5Cb of the time saving type is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern, this is just an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 41-40, after the state shown in FIG. 41-40 (L-1) (similar to FIG. 41-34 (L-1)), the time saving return symbol 5Cc is stopped and displayed. Since it is already notified that the time saving return small pattern M5 that can be visually recognized is displayed and the time saving pattern stops during the remaining reservation period, as shown in FIG. 41-40 (M-3), the decorative pattern The variable display may be reduced and displayed (reduced pattern M8), and the result display M7, which is the result of whether or not the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, may be displayed large in the center of the image display device 5. According to this, the game can be sharpened and the interest in the game can be improved. Since it has already been reported that the time-saving symbols will stop during the remaining suspension period, the execution of the active change effect for changing the display mode of the active display may be restricted during the remaining suspension period. In addition to not executing, the restriction may include executing in a mode with low expectations, and executing in an inconspicuous mode such as reducing the display size or making the display transparent.

(Explanation of means related to characteristic part 059AK)
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 059AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
State control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025, etc.) capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
Effect execution means capable of executing effects corresponding to variable display (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172, etc.)
The state control means is
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special display result of "loss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, based on the special display result, the normal control from the state to the special state (for example, execute the processing of step 059AKS025),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, if Yes is determined in step 059AKS006, the processing of step 059AKS006A is not executed, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the effect executing means can execute different effects depending on whether the normal state or the special state is established (for example, the processing of step 059AKS092 etc.),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
As the variable display, the identification information is variably displayed, and the identification information for production is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure and the decoration pattern variable display, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the identification information common to the normal state and the special state is displayed (for example, FIGS. 41-32 (B-2) and As shown in (D-1), the special figure display result as "losing (time saving)" (special display result) in the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state is the common display result ( Special figure display result showing the number "1" which is the time saving pattern of the time saving type of "time saving A"), etc.), the production identification information that is different between the normal state and the special state (For example, regarding the variable display result of the decorative pattern, if the game state is the normal state, at step 059AKS106 in FIG. 41-26, the time saving pattern is displayed as the final stop pattern of the decorative pattern. When it is in the state, at step 059AKS111 in FIG.
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting that the special display result will be displayed as the variable display result when the normal state is established (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine No in step 059AKS102). If it is determined, the process of step 059AKS104 can be executed, etc.), and if it is in the special state, the special effect is not executed (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS102, the process of step 059AKS104 is not executed, etc.) ),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed to when it is fixed differs between when the normal state and when the special state. If so, in the processing of step 059AKS043, while transmitting the decorative symbol stop command of the fixed time shown in FIG. such as sending a decorative pattern stop command to
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 060AK)
The feature 059AK includes the following feature 060AK.
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 060AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
State control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025, etc.) capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
Effect execution means capable of executing effects corresponding to variable display (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172, etc.)
The state control means is
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special display result of "loss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, based on the special display result, the normal control from the state to the special state (for example, execute the processing of step 059AKS025),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, if Yes is determined in step 059AKS006, the processing of step 059AKS006A is not executed, etc.),
As the variable display, the first identification information and the second identification information are variably displayed, and the presentation identification information is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. , the variable display result of the second identification information has a higher rate of displaying the special display result than the variable display result of the first identification information (for example, the first special figure display result determination table and the second special In the figure display result decision table, the second special figure display result decision table has a higher probability that the special figure display result will be "losing (time saving)" and will be controlled from the next variable display to the time saving state. , decision data is assigned, etc.),
The production executing means is
Different effects can be executed depending on whether or not the information related to the variable display stored at the end of the special state includes the information that the result of the variable display is the result of the special display (for example, for control of the effect). CPU 120 can execute the processing of step 059AKS108, etc.),
During control to the special state, the second identification information stored at the end of the special state is notified that the game medium should be shot to a specific path in the game area (for example, the processing of step 059AKS090 is executed). When the information regarding the variable display includes the information that the variable display result will be the special display result and the case that the information that will be the special display result is not included, it is stored at the end of the special state. Until the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information is completed, the notification to shoot the game medium to the normal path different from the specific path is not performed (for example, in the processing of step 059AKS090 Until the hitting instruction display is possible, until the left hitting instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 is received, that is, until the variable display corresponding to the holding of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state is completed, such as not displaying the left-handed instruction),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The production executing means is
In a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, the game medium is notified to be shot to the normal path (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 059AKS088),
A game medium to the normal path in the variable display of the first identification information executed first after the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state is completed. (After receiving the left-handed instruction command, that is, after the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold is completed, display the left-handed instruction display at step 059AKS088, etc.)
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a favorable notification of the launch, and to smoothly progress the game.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above,
The effect executing means stores a case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and when the special state ends. When the special display result is displayed as a variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information, and when the notification to shoot the game medium to the specific path is performed during the control to the special state. The mode is different (for example, performing a right-handed instruction display in a mode according to the command received at step 059AKS090),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed and losing interest in the game.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The effect executing means performs a case where the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state includes information that the variable display result is the special display result, and the special display. In the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state and when the information resulting from the result is not included, different effects are performed after executing a common effect. (For example, the return effect includes a return effect of a successful return pattern and a return effect of a return failure pattern, both of which have a common effect (for example, to clear a predetermined mission). However, as a result, depending on whether or not a given mission is completed, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed will differ, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention after executing the common effect.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The effect executing means stores a case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and when the special state ends. When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information, the effect when the special state is controlled differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-28). The pattern of the time-saving fanning production that is executed according to the type of time-saving is different, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, different patterns of effects are executed depending on the situation, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
When the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and the second identification information stored at the end of the special state When the special display result is displayed as a variable display result corresponding to information related to variable display, the display time of the special display result is common (for example, the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction) ” (time saving type of time saving C or D), and when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is “loss (time saving)” (time saving type of time saving A or B), it is confirmed time is common, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The production executing means is
During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, the notification to shoot the game medium to the specific path is not performed (for example, the process of step 059AKS136 ),
In the first variable display that is executed after the special display result is displayed, it is notified that the game medium should be shot along the specific path (for example, the processing of step 059AKS090 is executed);
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a favorable notification of the launch, and to smoothly progress the game.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
A first signal output means capable of outputting a first signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a CPU 103 for outputting a jackpot signal 1, etc.);
Second signal output means capable of outputting a second signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state (for example, a CPU 103 for outputting a jackpot signal 2, etc.);
A third signal output means capable of outputting a third signal in response to being controlled in the special state (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a big hit signal 3, etc.),
a fourth signal output means capable of outputting a fourth signal in response to completion of the variable display (for example, a CPU 103 for outputting a pattern confirmation signal, etc.);
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the fourth signal is output by the fourth signal output means at the end of the variable display, and the third signal is output by the third signal output means. Output (for example, when the time saving pattern is stopped and the time saving state is reached, as shown in FIG. 41-37 (B), a pattern confirmation signal indicating the time saving pattern stop is output, and the timing at which the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped jackpot signal is output at , etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state and the continuous residence state by the external device.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
A first signal output means capable of outputting a first signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a CPU 103 for outputting a jackpot signal 1, etc.);
Second signal output means capable of outputting a second signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state (for example, a CPU 103 for outputting a jackpot signal 2, etc.);
A third signal output means capable of outputting a third signal in response to being controlled in the special state (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a big hit signal 3, etc.);
The third signal output means continues to output the third signal until the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state ends (time saving Even if the state ends, the output of the jackpot signal 3 is not stopped until the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold ends, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state and the continuous residence state by the external device.

(10) The gaming machine according to (8) or (9) above,
The second signal and the third signal stop output at the same time (for example, at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state stops, the output of the big hit signal 2 and the big hit signal 3 is the same. stop at the timing, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state and the continuous residence state by the external device.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 061AK)
The feature 059AK includes the following feature 061AK.
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 061AK,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
State control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025, etc.) capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
Effect execution means capable of executing effects corresponding to variable display (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172, etc.)
The state control means, when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special display result of "loss (time reduction)" etc.) is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the special display result Based on the above, the normal state is controlled to the special state (for example, the processing of step 059AKS025 is executed, etc.),
The production executing means is
A plurality of types of common specific effects can be executed (for example, a plurality of types of ready-to-win effects can be executed) depending on whether the variable display result is the specific display result or the special display result,
The ratio of the special display result differs depending on which type of the specific effect is executed among the plurality of types of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 41-12, depending on the type of super reach " The ratio of “loss (time saving)” is different, etc.),
During control to the special state, a notification is given to shoot a game medium to a specific path in the game area, and the game medium should be shot to the specific path in the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed. Start notification (for example, display a right-handed instruction display in a manner corresponding to the command received at step 059AKS090),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means provides the same specific display result in the case where the variable display result is the specific display result, the special display result, and the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result. Multiple types of effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-11 and 11-12, when the reach effects of super reach B and super reach C are executed, if it becomes a big hit, it becomes a loss (time reduction) In some cases, decision values are assigned so that there are multiple variable display results, such as when it simply fails, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect result and improve the amusement of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
As the variable display, identification information is variably displayed, and production identification information is variably displayed corresponding to the identification information variably displayed (for example, decorative patterns are variably displayed),
determination means for determining the variable display result (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the process of step S110);
variable display pattern determination means for determining the variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111, etc.);
Command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means such as the CPU 103 that transmits a pattern designation command and a display result designation command),
The variable display pattern determining means determines whether the variable display result determined by the determining means is the specific display result, the special display result, or a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result. In both cases, it is possible to determine a common variable display pattern (for example, it is possible to determine a variable pattern that performs super reach B or super reach C regardless of the variable display result),
Based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means, the performance identification information is variably displayed (for example, the processing of steps S171 and S172 is executed, etc.),
When the variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern is received, the effect executing means executes different effects depending on the type of the received variable display result command (for example, when it is determined as No in step S552). However, different effects are executed depending on whether 059AKS101 determines Yes or No),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect result and improve the amusement of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The effect execution means can execute a special effect that suggests whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect (for example, after executing the reach effect of super reach, it is possible to execute a time-saving effect is, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the special effect is executed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect indicating whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect, and execution or non-execution of the special effect varies depending on the type of the specific effect (for example, Depending on the type of reach production that is executed, the ratio of the time-saving fanning production is different, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and to maintain the expectation of the specific display result.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect indicating whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect, and depending on the type of the specific effect, when the special effect is executed, the The percentage of special display results is different (for example, the percentage of time-saving fanning production is executed varies depending on the type of reach production that is performed, and the percentage of time-saving symbols that are displayed as a result of the time-saving fanning production is stopped. different, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and to maintain the expectation of the specific display result.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The production executing means is
A predetermined effect different from the specific effect (for example, an effect that changes the display mode of the active display, etc.) can be further executed,
Depending on the execution mode of the predetermined effect, the ratio of the special display result when the specific effect is executed differs (for example, depending on which display mode the display mode of the active display changes, the same type of super Even if it is a reach production of reach, the percentage of time-saving symbols that are stopped and displayed is different, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and to maintain the expectation of the specific display result.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect indicating whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect, and executing an effect of notifying the specific display result after executing the special effect. It is possible (for example, in the time-saving production, in addition to whether the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, whether the big hit pattern is stopped or not, etc.) ,
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the specific display result will be obtained.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
As the variable display, identification information is variably displayed, and production identification information is variably displayed corresponding to the identification information variably displayed (for example, decorative patterns are variably displayed),
determination means for determining the variable display result (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the process of step S110);
variable display pattern determination means for determining the variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111, etc.);
Command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means such as the CPU 103 that transmits a pattern designation command and a display result designation command),
The variable display pattern determining means determines whether the variable display result determined by the determining means is the specific display result, the special display result, or a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result. In both cases, it is possible to determine a common variable display pattern (for example, it is possible to determine a variable pattern that performs super reach B and super reach C regardless of the variable display result),
In the variable display of the identification information, the variable display time of the identification information is set based on the variable display result determined by the determination means and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, the CPU 103 performs step 059AKS013). process),
In the variable display of the performance identification information, a variable display time of the performance identification information is specified based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, performance control CPU 120 for executing the processing of step S561, etc.),
When the types of the received variable display result commands are different, the effect executing means can execute a common effect if the received variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern. (For example, the production control CPU 120 can execute the reach production of super reach B even if the contents indicated by the display result designation command are different),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute an effect.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
There are multiple types of special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D" etc.),
The state control means can be controlled to the special state with a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can be controlled to the time saving state of the number of time saving times according to the time saving type),
The effect executing means can execute different types of effects according to the type of the special display result in the variable display that is the special display result (for example, the time saving type of "time saving B" rather than the time saving type of "time saving A") The time-saving type has a higher execution ratio of Super Reach C, and the pattern of the time-saving fanning production that is executed according to the time-saving type is different),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the number of subsequent times of time saving differs depending on the effect to be executed, it is possible to attract the player's attention.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above,
There are multiple types of special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D" etc.),
The state control means can be controlled to the special state with a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can be controlled to the time saving state of the number of time saving times according to the time saving type),
It is possible to transmit a first command indicating the number of times of variable display executed during control to the special state, and after transmitting the first command, it is possible to transmit a second command different from the first command (for example, CPU 103, etc., which transmits a display result designation command at step S268 and sets transmission of a decorative symbol stop command at step 059AKS021),
The effect execution means determines the effect during variable display based on the received first command, and specifies the number of times of variable display executed during control to the special state based on the received second command. (For example, along with executing an effect according to the contents of the display result designation command, at step 059AKS133, such as setting the number of times of shortening specified by the received pattern confirmation command),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform effect control.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above,
determination means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 for executing the process of step S110);
variable display pattern determination means for determining the variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111, etc.);
Command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means such as a CPU 103 that transmits a pattern designation command and a display result designation command),
The effect executing means executes a effect based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means, and selects one of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command. If one cannot be received normally, limit the execution of the production related to the special state (for example, the production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 059AKS090B, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute an effect while preventing a decrease in the interest in the game.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above,
determination means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 for executing the process of step S110);
variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111, etc.);
Command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means such as a CPU 103 that transmits a pattern designation command and a display result designation command),
The production executing means is
executing an effect based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means (for example, executing the processing of step S171);
When the variable display pattern command is normally received but the variable display result is not normally received, the special state effect can be executed when the received variable display pattern command is a specific variable display pattern. (for example, the processing of step 059AKS095 can be executed),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute an effect while preventing a decrease in the interest in the game.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above,
There are multiple types of the special display result,
The state control means can be controlled to the special state with a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can be controlled to the time saving state of the number of time saving times according to the time saving type),
It is possible to transmit a first command indicating the number of times of variable display executed during control to the special state, and after transmitting the first command, it is possible to transmit a second command different from the first command (for example, CPU 103, etc., which transmits a display result designation command at step S268 and sets transmission of a decorative symbol stop command at step 059AKS021),
The effect executing means determines the effect during variable display based on the received first command, and notifies the number of variable displays executed during control to the special state based on the received second command. , If the second command could not be received normally, limit the notification of the number of times of variable display executed during control to the special state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 059AKS139),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute an effect while preventing a decrease in the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 062AK)
The feature 059AK includes the following feature 062AK.
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 062AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 etc. for executing effect based on effect control command) capable of executing effect based on information from the game control means,
The game control means is
Determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) for determining to set the advantageous state;
Determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is reached before the determination by the determination means;
State control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025, etc.) capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control such as the CPU 103 that sends commands),
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
The determination means can determine that the state control means enters the special state before the state control means controls to the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed, etc.),
The information transmission means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determination means determines that the special state is reached (for example, display result designation of "loss (time reduction)" commands can be sent),
The production executing means is
When the determination result information is received, a prefetch effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed),
When the judgment result information is received after the special information is received, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the judgment result information is restricted (for example, if Yes is determined in step 059AKS082, the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304 ),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The production executing means is
When the determination result information is newly received after receiving the determination result information indicating the control to the advantageous state, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the newly received determination result information is further restricted ( For example, if a hold in which the variable display result is a "jackpot" is stored in the currently stored hold memory, it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, etc.),
During the limitation of the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect can be executed in the same manner as the look-ahead effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after the special information is received (for example, steps 059AKS084 and step S1304 process),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the presentation due to the state transition and prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The production executing means is
When the determination result information is newly received after receiving the determination result information indicating execution of a suggestive effect suggesting whether or not to be controlled to the special state, the newly received determination result information Further restricting the execution of the prefetch effect based on (for example, if the hold for executing the time-saving fan effect is stored in the currently stored hold memory, such as determining Yes in step 059AKS082),
During the limitation of the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect can be executed in the same manner as the look-ahead effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after the special information is received (for example, steps 059AKS084 and step S1304 process),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when an effect relating to the state transition is performed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The effect execution means does not execute the look-ahead effect in a manner indicating that the advantage controlled to the advantageous state is equal to or higher than a specific advantage (for example, FIG. 41-23 (B) (e.g., do not execute the pending display change effect of "green" or more),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the presentation due to the state transition and prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The effect execution means does not execute a specific type of the look-ahead effect during the restriction of the look-ahead effect (for example, as shown in FIG. For example, do not execute a type of pending display change effect that changes to a display mode such as "red"),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since execution of a specific type of advance notice effect is restricted, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of useless expectation.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 063AK)
The characteristic portion 063AK according to this embodiment will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 42-1, the game area 2 formed on the board surface of the game board includes a left game area 063AK1 on the left side of the top of the image display device 5 and a game area 063AK1 on the right side of the top of the image display device 5. A right game area 063AK2 is provided. The left game area 063AK1 and the right game area 063AK2 may be separated by, for example, the end surface of the image display device 5 inside the game area 2, the nail arrangement PL, or the like. The game ball (game medium) fired from the ball shooting device and hit into the game area 2 is guided to the left game area 063AK1, for example, by being guided along the nail array PL, and is guided to the right game area. It becomes impossible or difficult to induce to 063AK2. In addition, when the game ball fired from the hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area 2 is guided to the right game area 063AK2, it is guided along the nail arrangement PL, for example, to the left game area 063AK1. and becomes uninducible or difficult to induce.

The left game area 063AK1 is provided with a general winning hole 10 and a winning ball device 6A. On the other hand, the right game area 063AK2 is provided with a variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) and a special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B.

The general prize winning port 10 is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can always win prizes by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball wins (enters) the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which game balls can win by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball wins in the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and a first start condition, which is a condition for executing the first special game, can be established. . The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 32). When a game ball wins in the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started.

As shown in FIG. 42-2, the special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning door 063AK3 that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 32) for a large winning door (for special electric accessories), A large winning opening door 063AK3 has a large winning opening 063AK4 that changes between an open state (first state) in which game balls can easily win and a closed state (second state) in which game balls cannot or are difficult to win. ing. FIG. 42-2 shows a state in which the big winning gate 063AK3 closes the big winning gate 064AK4.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the OFF state, the big winning gate door 063AK3 closes the big winning gate 063AK4, and the game ball wins the big winning gate 063AK4. Impossible or difficult to win. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door 063AK3 opens the big winning gate 063AK4 so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning gate 063AK4. becomes. When game balls enter the big winning hole 063AK4, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole 063AK4, more winning balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole or the general winning hole 10, for example.

The big winning hole 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is derived and displayed (stopped display) as a determined special symbol in the special game, and the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit". , When controlled to a jackpot game state (advantageous state), it is controlled to an open state in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the passage of a predetermined period (29 seconds in this embodiment), and the timing until the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening 063AK4 reaches a predetermined number (9 in this embodiment). , whichever comes first. A single cycle in which the big winning port 063AK4 is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times in this embodiment).

In addition, in the special game, a small winning symbol (special display result) is derived and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the big winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and the display result of the variable display becomes "small winning". , When it is controlled to the small winning game state, it is controlled to the open state in a predetermined manner. Specifically, in the small winning game state, the open state and the closed state of the big winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 are repeated. For example, in the small winning game state, the open state of 0.1 seconds and the closed state of 1.0 seconds are repeated. The action of repeating the open state and the closed state of the large winning opening 063AK4 is also called opening and closing of the large winning opening. The opening and closing of the large winning opening is performed by repeating the open state of 0.1 seconds up to a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times in this embodiment), or by placing a game ball in the large winning opening 063AK4 to a predetermined upper limit winning number (this embodiment). Then, the game ends when one of the conditions is met, whether the prize is up to 10).

In the characteristic portion 063AK, the player is caused to launch a game ball in the left game area 063AK1 in the normal state (low probability low base state) (hereinafter referred to as "left hitting"). While aiming to win the general winning hole 10 or the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, in the time saving state (low probability high base state), the game ball is launched to the right game area 063AK2 ( hereinafter referred to as "right-handed hitting".

In addition, in the characteristic portion 063AK, when the player is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state, the player is made to hit to the right, and the special variable winning ball device 7 forms the big winning hole 063AK4. It is designed to aim for prizes.

In the characteristic part 063AK, a right-handed promotion performance is performed to encourage the player to hit right-handed during a period during which the time-saving state, the big-hit game state, and the small-hit-hit game state are controlled in which right handedness is advantageous.

A game ball that wins the big winning hole 063AK4 formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 passes through (enters) the big winning hole switch 063AK5, and after being detected by the big winning hole switch 063AK5, falls into the concave part 063AK6. The game ball that has fallen into the recess 063AK6 is guided backward by a guide piece (not shown) and passes through the passage opening 063AK7. Behind the passage port 063AK7, a sorting portion supply path 063AK8 extending downward to the left and a discharge path 063AK9 extending downward to the right are provided.

All the game balls that have entered the big winning hole 063AK4 in the big winning game state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, only one game ball among the game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state flows down to the distribution part 063AK18 described later through the distribution part supply path 063AK8, and the one game Balls other than the ball are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9.

Figures 42-3(a) to 42-3(c) are diagrams showing the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 in relation to the characteristic portion 063AK, viewed from the arrow II in Figure 42-2. shows the case. As shown in FIG. 42-3(a), the special variable winning ball device 7 moves the plunger 063AK11 in the left-right direction by switching between an on state and an off state with a substantially dogleg-shaped rotating piece 063AK10. and a solenoid 063AK12 for distributing portion supply. The rotating piece 063AK10 has a connecting protrusion 063AK13 connected to the plunger 063AK11, and rotates around a rotating shaft 063AK14 by switching the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the distribution portion between an on state and an off state.

As shown in FIG. 42-3(a), when the distribution portion supply solenoid 063AK12 is in the ON state, the bent surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10 faces forward. In addition, the lower surface of the distribution section supply path 063AK8 is positioned lower than the lower surface of the discharge path 063AK9 (provided below). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 42-3(a), the game ball A1 that first passes through the passage port 063AK7 falls into the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and its movement is restricted by the curved surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10. be done. As a result, the game ball A1 is held by the rotating piece 063AK10. Game ball A2, which has passed 063AK7 following game ball A1, is blocked by game ball A1 and cannot enter distribution section supply path 063AK8, as shown in FIG. change direction. The game ball A2 flows down the discharge path 063AK9 as it is. A discharge count switch 063AK16 is provided in the discharge path 063AK9, and game balls passing through the discharge path 063AK9 are detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16. The game ball passing through the discharge path 063AK9 is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. With the rotating piece 063AK10 holding the game ball A1, when the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the distribution section is controlled from the ON state to the OFF state, as shown in FIG. Solenoid 063AK12 jumps out from the main body. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 rotates around the rotating shaft 063AK14, and flips the game ball A1 toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8. The flipped game ball A1 flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8.

The game ball A3 flowing down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 passes through the distribution section passage switch 063AK17 and is detected by the distribution section passage switch 063AK17 as shown in FIG. Enter the section 063AK18.

The distribution unit 063AK18 is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, guides the game ball that has flowed down through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8, and the big hit area 063AK19 (specific area) and the time saving area 063AK20 (special area ) or the lost area 063AK21.

The big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21 are all areas (members) configured to allow passage of game balls, and are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21 are provided below the sorting section 063AK18.

After entering the big-hit area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the big-hit area passage switch 063AK22 and is detected by the big-hit area passage switch 063AK22. is discharged to A game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the jackpot area discharge path is detected by a jackpot area discharge count switch (not shown).

In a special game, a small winning pattern is led out and displayed to be controlled to a small winning game state, and when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big winning area 063AK19. Based on that, it is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state.

The game ball that has entered the time saving area 063AK20 passes through the time saving area passage switch 063AK23, and after being detected by the time saving area passage switch 063AK23, passes through the time saving area discharge path (not shown) outside the special variable winning ball device 7 is discharged to The game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the time saving area discharge path is detected by a time saving area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the normal state, a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special game and controlled to a small winning game state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to open, the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 is Based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20, over a predetermined period after the end of the small winning game state, time saving transition control to control to a time saving state (special state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state is performed. will be On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state, a small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the special game, the game ball is controlled to the small winning game state, and the game ball that wins the large winning opening 063AK4 when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state. However, when passing through the time saving region 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is configured not to be performed. That is, when it is already controlled to the time saving state, even if the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state passes the time saving region 063AK20, the period controlled to the time saving state by performing the time saving transition control is configured not to extend control.

In the present embodiment, in a normal state, when a small winning pattern is derived and displayed in a special game and controlled to a small winning game state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be open, the player wins the large winning opening 063AK4. When the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, after the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be closed and the small winning game state is finished, when the next variable display is started, the time saving transition control based on the passage. is performed, and is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state. That is, when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, if the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20, it is configured not to control to the time saving state until the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state. . According to such a configuration, after one game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20, another game ball passes through the big hit region 063AK19 or the losing region 063AK21, so that the game state after the end of the small hit game state It is possible to suppress the possibility of causing confusion between the control and the performance, confusing the player, and lowering the interest in the game. That is, according to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

After entering the losing area 063AK21, the game ball passes through the losing area passage switch 063AK24, and after being detected by the losing area passage switch 063AK24, passes through a losing area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. is discharged to A game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the losing area discharge path is detected by a losing area discharge count switch (not shown).

In a special game, a small winning pattern is led out and displayed to be controlled to a small winning game state, and when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the losing area 063AK21. In that case, after the end of the small hit game state, control to change the game state based on the passage is not performed.

A big hit area light emitting part 063AK25 is provided at the upper end and the lower end of the big hit area 063AK19. A time saving region light emitting portion 063AK26 is provided at the upper end and the lower end of the time saving region 063AK20. At the upper end and the lower end of the missing area 063AK21, the missing area light emitting section 063AK27 is provided. The jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 are configured to be visible to the player, and include a light emitting element such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) and are configured to be capable of emitting light. . Although the details will be described later, in the characteristic part 063AK, an effect is performed in which the big hit area light emitting part 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting part 063AK26 and the losing area light emitting part 063AK27 emit light in a predetermined manner. FIG. 42-4(a) shows a state in which the big hit area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26 and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 are all turned off.

The distribution unit 063AK18 has a distribution member 063AK28. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a left inclined surface 063AK29 directed diagonally upward to the right and a right inclined surface 063AK30 directed diagonally upward to the left. The game ball entering the distribution portion 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28, and passes through any one of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42-4(b), the distribution unit 063AK18 is provided with a big hit region entrance 063AK31, a time saving region entrance 063AK32, and a losing region entrance 063AK33. The big hit region entrance 063AK31, the time saving region entrance 063AK32, and the loss region entrance 063AK33 are all configured to allow the passage of game balls, and are arranged along the left-right direction. The big-hit area entry port 063AK31 communicates with the big-hit area 063AK19, and the game ball passing through the big-hit area entrance 063AK31 passes through the big-hit area 063AK19. The time saving region entrance 063AK32 communicates with the time saving region 063AK20, and the game ball passing through the time saving region entrance 063AK32 passes through the time saving region 063AK20. The losing area entrance 063AK33 communicates with the losing area 063AK21, and the game ball passing through the losing area entrance 063AK33 passes through the losing area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is arranged above the big hit area entrance 063AK31, the time saving area entrance 063AK32 and the losing area entrance 063AK33. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a passage opening 063AK34 through which game balls can pass. In order to facilitate understanding, the P coordinate axis shown in FIG. 42-4(b) is set below. The P coordinate axis is set parallel to the left-right direction. The distribution member 063AK28 is driven by a distribution member motor (not shown), and moves in the horizontal direction between a position P6 as the left end position and a position P3 as the right end position shown in FIG. 42-4(b). move back and forth along the FIG. 42-4(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 063AK28 is positioned at the position P0 as the center position (original position).

When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P0 shown in FIG. 42-4(b), the game ball A4 entering the distribution portion 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 42-5(a). It passes through the passage port 063AK34 formed in the member 063AK28, and passes through the time saving region entrance port 063AK32. The game ball A4 that has passed through the time saving area entry port 063AK32 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P3 shown in FIG. 42-4(b), the game ball A5 entering the distribution portion 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 42-5(b). It collides with the left inclined surface 063AK29 formed on the member 063AK28, moves leftward along the inclined direction, and passes through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 formed on the left side of the distribution portion 063AK18. The game ball A5 that has passed through the big hit area entry port 063AK31 passes through the big hit area 063AK19. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P6 shown in FIG. 42-4(b), the game ball A6 entering the distribution portion 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 42-5(c). It collides with the right inclined surface 063AK30 formed on the member 063AK28, moves to the right along the inclined direction, and passes through the lost area inlet 063AK33 formed on the right side of the sorting portion 063AK18. The game ball A6 that has passed through the loss area entry port 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is configured to be able to perform operations according to the distribution member operation pattern shown in FIG. 42-6. FIG. 42-6 shows the transition of the position of the distribution member 063AK28 over time when the distribution member 063AK28 is moving according to the distribution member operation pattern, and the time of the area through which the game ball passes. Transitions over time and are shown. Note that the distribution member 063AK28 is stopped at the position P0 shown in FIG. 42-4(b) when it is not operating according to the distribution member operation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 42-6, when the distribution member 063AK28 starts to operate according to the distribution member operation pattern, it stops at the position P0 for a predetermined central standby time, and then moves rightward from the position P0 at a constant speed. 42-4(b), passes through position P1 on the right side of position P0 shown in FIG. 42-4(b), passes through position P2 on the right side of position P1 shown in FIG. The position P3 shown in b) is reached. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P3 from the position P0 may be predetermined as the middle-right movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P3 stops at the position P3 for a predetermined right end waiting time. Subsequently, the distribution member 063AK28 moves leftward at a constant speed from position P3, passes position P2, passes position P1, and reaches position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 from the position P3 may be predetermined as the right center movement time. After reaching the position P0, the distribution member 063AK28 stops at the position P0 for the middle standby time. Next, the distribution member 063AK28 moves leftward from position P0 at a constant speed, passes through position P4 on the left side of position P0 shown in FIG. After passing through position P5 on the left side of position P4 shown, position P6 shown in FIG. 42-4(b) is reached. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P6 from the position P0 may be predetermined as the center left movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P6 stops at the position P6 for a predetermined left end waiting time. Thereafter, the distribution member 063AK28 moves rightward from position P6 at a constant speed, passes position P5, passes position P4, and reaches position P0. The required time for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the central position P0 from the position P6 may be predetermined as the middle-left movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P0 repeats the above-described operation again. In this way, the distribution member 063AK28 reciprocates in the horizontal direction between the positions P3 and P6 by operating according to the distribution member operation pattern.

When the distribution member 063AK28 is operating according to the distribution member operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 42-6, the game ball that has entered the distribution portion 063AK18 according to the change in the position of the distribution member 063AK28. However, it also changes which of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21. Specifically, during the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the position P2 and the position P3, the game ball entering the distribution portion 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through the big hit area 063AK19. It will be a jackpot area passing period. The period during which the sorting member 063AK28 is positioned between the positions P0 and P1 and the period during which the sorting member 063AK28 is positioned between the positions P0 and P4 are defined as It becomes the time saving area passage period passing through the time saving area 063AK20 by guiding the game ball to the distribution member 063AK28. During the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the position P5 and the position P6, the game ball that has entered the distribution portion 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 to pass through the losing region 063AK21. period. During the period during which the distribution member 063AK28 is positioned between the positions P1 and P2 and the period during which the distribution member 063AK28 is positioned between the positions P4 and P5, the distribution unit 063AK18 is entered. The game ball is guided to the distribution member 063AK28, so that it becomes a passage area uncertain period in which it is not decided which one of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21.

In the present embodiment, a small winning pattern is derived and displayed in a special game, and when controlled to a small winning game state, a small winning start effect (small winning fanfare effect), and the distribution member 063AK28 is configured to start an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern in response to the start of the small hit start effect. As shown in FIG. 42-6, the small winning start effect is started in response to the elapse of a predetermined special figure confirmation display time after the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and then the small winning start. It ends in response to the elapse of the presentation time.

In this embodiment, in the small winning game state, as shown in FIG. 42-6, the opening and closing of the big winning opening is started in response to the completion of the small winning start effect. As described above, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is performed by repeating the open state of 0.1 seconds up to the predetermined upper limit number of openings, or whether the game balls enter the large winning opening 063AK4 up to the predetermined upper limit winning number. It ends when one of the conditions is met.

In this embodiment, in the small winning game state, as shown in FIG. 42-6, in response to the end of the small winning start effect and the opening and closing of the big winning opening, the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the distribution portion is turned on. state, and the rotating piece 063AK10 enters a state in which it is possible to hold the game ball that has entered the distribution section supply path 063AK8. After the solenoid 063AK12 for distribution part supply is controlled to ON state, it is controlled to OFF state according to predetermined game ball retention time having passed. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 flips the held game ball toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the flipped game ball flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 and enters the distribution section 063AK18. . With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, only one of the game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state flows down to the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. Then, the game balls other than the one game ball are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot game state, the solenoid 063AK12 for distribution portion supply is not controlled to be ON. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, all the game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the big winning game state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. In the example shown in FIG. 42-6, at time t0 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the sorting portion is controlled to be turned on, the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the sorting portion is controlled to be turned off and rotated. The game ball repelled by piece 063AK10 enters distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 42-6, the time t0 when the game ball entered the sorting portion 063AK18 is included in the big hit area passage period. Therefore, the game ball entering the distribution portion 063AK18 at time t0 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28.

It should be noted that the game ball holding time is set longer than the time required for opening and closing the big winning opening only a predetermined upper limit number of openings in the small winning game state. That is, the game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18 after the opening and closing of the big winning opening is completed.

As shown in FIG. 42-6, the timing (time t0 in the example shown in FIG. 42-6) at which the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 is the special figure confirmation display time, the small hit start production time, and the game ball The retention time is specified by .

In this embodiment, when it is controlled to the small hit game state, the special figure confirmation display time and the game ball holding time are set to the same time regardless of the small hit type, while the small hit start production time is It is set to any one of a plurality of types of time according to the small hit type. With such a configuration, the timing at which the game ball enters the sorting section 063AK18 is configured to differ according to the type of the small hit.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when controlled to the small hit game state, the small hit start production time, depending on the small hit type, predetermined first specific time to third specific time shown in FIG. 42-7 Set to any of the hours. As shown in FIG. 42-7, the second specified time (eg, 12 seconds) is longer than the first specified time (eg, 11 seconds), and the third specified time (eg, 13 seconds) is longer than the second specified time.

As shown in FIG. 42-7, when the small hit start production time is set to the first specific time, after the small hit pattern is derived and displayed in the special game, according to the elapse of the special figure confirmation display time After the start of the small winning performance is started, the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the sorting portion is controlled to be turned on at the timing when the small winning start performance ends in accordance with the passage of the first specific time. After that, at time t1 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state, and the game repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the sorting section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 42-7, the time t1 is included in the losing region passing period, so the game ball entering the sorting portion 063AK18 at the time t1 is guided by the sorting member 063AK28 and loses. Pass through area 063AK21. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that wins the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small win game state passes through the losing area 063AK21.

When the small winning start performance time is set to the second specific time, the small winning start performance is started in response to the elapse of the special figure confirmation display time after the small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After that, the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the sorting portion is controlled to be in the ON state at the timing when the small winning start effect is completed in accordance with the elapse of the second specific time. After that, at time t2 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the sorting portion was controlled to be turned on, the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the sorting portion was controlled to be turned off, and the game repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the sorting section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 42-7, time t2 is included in the time-saving region passage period, so the game ball that entered the distribution portion 063AK18 at time t2 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28, thereby reducing the time. Pass through area 063AK20. That is, when the small hit start production time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20.

When the small winning start performance time is set to the third specific time, the small winning start performance is started according to the elapse of the special figure confirmation display time after the small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After that, the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the sorting portion is controlled to be in the ON state at the timing when the small winning start effect is completed in response to the elapse of the third specific time. After that, at time t3 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the sorting portion was controlled to be turned on, the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the sorting portion was controlled to be turned off, and the game repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the sorting section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 42-7, time t3 is included in the big hit region passing period, so the game ball that entered the distribution portion 063AK18 at time t3 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and hits the jackpot. Pass through area 063AK19. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state passes through the big winning area 063AK19.

As described above, depending on which of the first specific time to the third specific time the small hit start production time is set, the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state is placed in the big winning area 063AK19. , It differs in which of the time saving region 063AK20 and the losing region 063AK21 is passed. In the characteristic part 063AK, the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state by setting the small winning start performance time to any one of the first specific time to the third specific time according to the small winning type. Then, pass through the area corresponding to the small hit type among the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21.

In the characteristic part 063AK, a variable display (hereinafter referred to as "small hit variation") is executed in which a small hit pattern is derived and displayed in the special game and the display result of the variable display is "small hit". 42-8(a), as a production corresponding to the small hit variation, in addition to the above-described right-handed promotion production and small hit start production, a time-saving suggestive production, a passage fan production, and a passage notification It is configured to be executable.

In the present embodiment, as the right-handed promotion effect, an effect of displaying a right-handed promotion image showing an arrow pointing to the right on the screen of the image display device 5 is executed. As described above, the right-handed promotion effect is executed in the period controlled to the time saving state and the big hit game state, and as shown in FIG. 42-8 (a), it is controlled to the small hit game state Executed in a period.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an effect of displaying a right arrow image and a small win start image on the screen of the image display device 5 is executed as the small win start effect. The right arrow image is an effect image having the shape of an arrow pointing to the right and showing a message "Aim right!". The small winning start image shows the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7 and also shows a message ``put a ball here! It is an image. As described above, the small-hit start production is started in response to the fact that the small-hit pattern is derived and displayed in the special game and the control to the small-hit game state is started, and then the small-hit start production time elapses. Exit accordingly.

The time-saving suggestion performance is a performance that suggests being controlled to a time-saving state, and is configured to be executable during execution of the small hit variation. As described above, in the normal state, based on the fact that the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state has passed through the time saving region 063AK20, it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small winning game state. be. Correspondingly, in the characteristic part 063AK, in the normal state, when the small winning variation is executed, as an effect suggesting that the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, The time-saving suggesting performance is configured to be executable during execution of the small hit variation. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, in the variable display when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the game interest. can.

As shown in FIG. 42-8(a), when a normal reach performance that is a reach performance of normal reach, a super reach performance that is a reach performance of super reach, and a time saving suggestion performance are executed in the small hit fluctuation, time saving The suggestive effect is established after the reach is established, the normal reach effect is executed, and the super reach effect is executed. finish. Hereinafter, the details of the time-saving suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 42-9(a) and 42-9(b).

As shown in FIG. 42-9 (a), when the time saving suggestion effect is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the image display device 5 , a predetermined lost symbol ("767" in the present embodiment) is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner different from the derived display. Next, in the "middle" decorative design display area 5C, the decorative design is re-variably displayed. Temporary stop display of a time-saving suggesting pattern that suggests control to the time-saving state shown in -9(b) is performed. As for the time-saving design, a decorative design showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and "chance" is displayed in the "middle" decorative design display area 5C. This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a decorative pattern indicating a message is displayed. Returning to FIG. 42-9(a), after the time-saving suggestive pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design is re-variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is executed, the small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and the time saving suggesting performance is ended in response to the completion of the small winning variation.

Returning to FIG. 42-8(a), the passing fan effect suggests that the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state passes through either the big winning area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the losing area 063AK21. It is an effect that makes a suggestion about passing through the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21). After the passage fanning performance is started in response to the end of the small winning start performance and the opening and closing of the large winning opening is started, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state enters the big winning area 063AK19, and the time is shortened. It ends when either the area 063AK20 or the lost area 063AK21 is passed.

The passing notification effect is a effect of notifying which of the big winning area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21 the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state has passed. In the present embodiment, the passage notification effect is executed as a small-hit end effect (small-hit ending effect) for informing that the control to the small-hit game state ends. After the passing notification effect is started in response to the game ball winning the big winning hole 063AK4 in the small winning game state passing through the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20 or the losing area 063AK21, a predetermined passing notification effect time is reached. Terminate according to the elapsed time.

In this embodiment, the passing notification production time is a predetermined number depending on whether the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state has passed through the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20 or the losing area 063AK21. Any one of the 1st special time to the 3rd special time is set. Concretely, when the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21, the passage notification effect time is set to the first special time (for example, 5 seconds). In addition, in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20, in response to the fact that the time saving transition control is not performed based on the passage, the passage notification production time is set so that the game ball is lost region 063AK21. is set to the first special time as in the case of passing through In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20, the passing notification effect time is set to the second special time (for example, 20 seconds). When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the passage notification effect time is set to the third special time (for example, 10 seconds). According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

In the characteristic portion 063AK, as shown in FIG. 42-8 (b), when the small hit variation is executed in the normal state and when the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, the time saving suggestion production, the passing fan It is configured such that the presence or absence of execution of the effect and the passing notification effect or the effect mode is different.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42-8 (b), when the small hit variation is executed in the normal state, while it is possible to execute the time saving suggestion effect during the execution of the small hit variation, When the small winning variation is executed in the time saving state, the time saving suggesting performance is not executed during the execution of the small winning variation. That is, in the characteristic portion 063AK, when the small winning variation is executed in the normal state and the small winning pattern is derived and displayed, and when the small winning variation is executed in the time saving state and the small winning pattern is derived and displayed. It is configured to be able to execute different performances during the execution of small winning variations.

In the characteristic part 063AK, in the normal state, when the small hit variation is executed, by configuring the performance suggesting time saving to be executable, the player is informed that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. It is configured such that the time-saving transition control is performed to make the player feel expectations for being controlled to the time-saving state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed, so that when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 To prevent a player from having an expectation of being controlled to a time saving state based on the passage of a game ball through a time saving area 063AK20 even though the time saving transition control based on the above is not performed, It is configured so as to be able to suppress a decline in amusement.

Thus, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning variation is executed in the normal state and the small winning pattern is derived and displayed, and when the small winning variation is executed in the time saving state and the small winning pattern is derived and displayed , different effects can be executed during execution of the small hit variation, so that a suitable effect can be performed according to the state.

In the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 42-8(b), when the small hit variation is executed in the normal state, after the end of the small hit variation, it is controlled to the small winning game state and the opening and closing of the big winning opening is performed. At that time, as a passing effect, a normal passing effect (special effect) is executed, which is a performance suggesting passage through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21. On the other hand, when the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, when the small winning game state is controlled after the end of the small winning variation and the big winning opening is opened and closed, as a passing effect, it relates to the passage of the time saving area 063AK29. A time-saving passage fanning performance (specific performance), which is a performance of suggesting passage between the big hit region 063AK19 and the losing region 063AK21 without making a suggestion, is executed.

In the present embodiment, the normal time passage sway effect suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21. It is a performance to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the time saving time passage fanning effect is that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 without suggesting that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and the game ball is lost area 063AK21 It is a production that suggests passing through.

In the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning game state is controlled after the end of the small winning variation in the normal state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be opened, the player is encouraged to , The game ball is configured to be able to raise expectations for being controlled to the time saving state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving region 063AK20, and to improve the game interest.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning game state is controlled after the end of the small winning variation in the time saving state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game is played by executing the time saving passage fanning effect. Players expect to be controlled to a time saving state based on the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK20, although control based on the passage is not performed when the ball passes the time saving area 063AK20. It is configured so as to prevent the player from getting excited and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In this way, in the characteristic portion 063AK, when the small winning game state is controlled after the end of the small winning variation in the normal state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be opened, the normal passing effect is executed. , When the small winning game state is controlled after the end of the small winning variation in the time saving state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the time saving passage fanning effect is executed. Appropriate production can be performed according to the state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42-10(a), as a normal passing effect, a normal passing effect image AK1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. The jackpot area light emitting part 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting part 063AK26, and the losing area light emitting part 063AK27 are caused to emit light, and the normal time passage cheering voice indicating the message "Is it a big hit? Is it short? Is it a loss?" perform a performance.

The normal passing image AK1 shows the message "big hit", the big hit area passing image AK2 suggesting that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19, and the message "time saving", and the game ball shows the time saving area. It includes a time-saving area passing image AK3 suggesting that the ball passes through 063AK20, and a losing area passing image AK4 showing the message "losing" and suggesting that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21.

In the characteristic part 063AK, it is expected to be controlled to the big-hit game state after the small-hit game state ends based on the fact that the game ball has passed the big-hit region 063AK19 in the small-hit game state by the display mode of the normal passage fanning image AK1. degree (ratio) and, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving region 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state, and the game ball in the small hit game state It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation for passing through the failing region 063AK21. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the normal-time passage encouragement image AK1, thereby improving the game interest. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the normal passage image AK1, the big hit area passage image AK2 is the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state (the big hit after the small hit game state ends) is displayed in a display area corresponding to the degree of expectation to be controlled in the game state), and the time saving area passing image AK3 is the expectation that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063 AK20 in the small hit game state (end of the small hit game state The display area corresponding to the degree of expectation to be controlled later in the time-saving state), and the losing area passing image AK4 is displayed in the display area corresponding to the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21 in the small winning game state. displayed.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the second special game (special game using the second special), the first special game (the first special) The game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state at a higher rate than when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the special game used), and is controlled to the time saving state after the small winning game state ends. . Corresponding to this, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the first special game and is controlled to the small winning game state, in the normal passing effect, the normal 42-10(a), while displaying the time passage fanning image AK1 in the display mode shown in FIG. In the time-passing effect, the normal time-passing image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 42-10(b). In the display mode shown in FIG. 42-10(b), the display area of the time saving area passing tilt image AK2 is larger than the display mode shown in FIG. 42-10(a). It should be noted that, in the second special game, the normal passing effect shown in FIG. Except that the display mode of AK1 is different, the normal time passage shown in FIG. This is the same effect mode as the fanning effect.

In this embodiment, as a time-saving passing fan effect, a time-saving passing fanning image AK5 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The big hit area light emitting part 063AK25 and the losing area light emitting part 063AK27 are made to emit light without lightening the time saving area light emitting part 063AK26, and the time saving passage joking voice indicating the message "Is it a big hit or is it a loss?" Perform the production to output. The time saving passing image AK5 includes the big winning area passing feeling image AK2 and the losing area passing feeling image AK4, but does not include the time saving area passing feeling image AK3.

Returning to FIG. 42-8 (b), in the normal state, when the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state passes through the big winning area 063AK19, the game ball is a big winning area as a passing notification effect. 063AK19 is passed, and after the end of the small winning game state, the normal big winning area passing notification effect is executed for notifying that the game state is controlled to the big winning game state. In the present embodiment, as the normal-time jackpot area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a normal-time jackpot area passage notification image showing a message "V" on the screen of the image display device 5 is executed.

In the normal state, when the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 as a passing notification effect, and the small winning game state A time-saving area passage notification effect for notifying that the control is performed to the time-saving state after the end is executed. In the present embodiment, as the time saving region passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a time saving region passage notification image showing a message “Lucky!” is executed on the screen of the image display device 5 .

In the normal state, when the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state passes through the losing area 063AK21, the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21 as a passage notification effect and enters the small winning game state. After the game ends, a losing region passing notification effect is executed to notify that the control for changing the game state is not performed. In the present embodiment, as the failing area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a failing area passage notification image showing a message "I'm sorry!" on the screen of the image display device 5 is executed.

On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 42-8 (b), when the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hitting game state passes through the big hitting area 063AK19, as a passage notification effect , The game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19, and after the end of the small hit game state, it is notified that it is controlled to the big hit game state. be. In this embodiment, as the time-saving jackpot area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a time-saving jackpot area passage notification image showing a message "BONUS!"

In the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the passage notification performance is performed corresponding to the fact that the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. As a result, the above-described lost area passing notification effect is executed.

In the case of the time saving state, when the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state passes through the losing area 063AK21, the losing area passage notification effect is executed as the passage notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 42-8(a) and 42-8(b), in the characteristic portion 063AK, a small winning pattern is derived and displayed as a fixed special pattern in the special game, and the special variable winning ball device 7 forms. After the big winning hole 063AK4 is controlled to open state, when the big winning hole 063AK is controlled to closed state, the case where the game ball passes through the jackpot region 063AK19 and the case where the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 , are configured to be able to execute different productions. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect that is executed when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the closed state, thereby improving the game interest.

Further, in the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 42-8(b), when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to open. In addition, when the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20, by executing the time saving region passage notification effect, the player is notified that the game ball has passed through the time saving region 063AK20, and the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state. It is possible to make the player recognize that the player is being controlled by the player, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

On the other hand, in the characteristic portion 063AK, when a small winning pattern is derived and displayed as a fixed special pattern in the special game in the time saving state, and the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state. , By executing the loss area passing notification performance, the player is informed that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 although the time saving transition control based on the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK20 is not performed. It is possible to prevent the player from having a feeling of anticipation for being controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small winning game state based on , and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In this way, in the characteristic portion 063AK, a small winning pattern is derived and displayed as a fixed special pattern in the special game in the normal state, and when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. and when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game in the time saving state, and when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. By being configured to be able to execute different effects, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed.

More specifically, in the characteristic portion 063AK, when the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 in the time saving state, the game ball passes through the loss region 063AK21 in the time saving state, and passes through both the jackpot region 063AK19 and the time saving region 063AK20. It is configured to be able to execute the loss area passage notification effect which is the same effect as when it is not done. According to such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 when it is in the time saving state, although the control based on the game ball passing through the time saving region 063AK20 is not performed, the player In addition, it is possible to prevent a player from having a feeling of anticipation for being controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small winning game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving region 063AK20, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. can be done.

Further, in the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 42-8(b), when the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the time saving state, when the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the normal state, it is executed. It is configured to be able to execute a time-saving jackpot area passage notification performance different from the normal jackpot area passage notification performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect executed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, thereby improving the game interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, a small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the second special game that is likely to be executed in the time saving state, and when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball is in the big winning area. When passing through 063AK19, a small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the first special game which is likely to be executed in a normal state, and the game ball passes through the big winning area 063AK19 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be open. At a high rate, after the end of the small winning game state, the "big winning A" is controlled to have a higher advantage for the player than the "big winning B". With such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the big winning area 063AK19, the player is made to pay attention to which of the time saving big winning area passing notification performance and the normal big winning area passing reporting performance is executed, and the game is played. Interest can be improved.

FIG. 42-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process process as the special symbol normal process regarding the characterizing part 063AK.

When the special symbol normal processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step 063AKS101). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 063AKS101, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the second reserved storage number counter in the RAM 102 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read value is "0".

In this embodiment, a second special figure reservation storage unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, for example. The second special figure reservation storage unit stores a special figure game (second special The pending data of the special figure game using the second special figure in the symbol display device 4B is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), based on the establishment of the second start condition due to the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc., as pending data. It stores until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Thus, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (Special figure display result) Based on whether it is decided to control to the big hit game state, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, ready-to-win effect etc.) Hold to make it possible to determine memory information.

At step 063AKS101, when the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" (step 063AKS101; No), the CPU 103 is stored in correspondence with the pending number "1" in the second special figure pending storage unit. Numerical data representing random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out as pending data (step 063AKS102). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 063 AKS102, for example, by updating the second reservation storage number count value by subtracting 1, etc., the second special figure reservation storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reservation storage The pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries below the pending number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") are shifted upward by one entry. (Step 063AKS103). Further, in the process of step 063 AKS103, the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter in the RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting one. Thereafter, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 063AKS104).

When the second special figure pending memory number is "0" at step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 063AKS114). The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 063AKS114, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the RAM 102 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read value is "0". Thus, the process of step 063AKS114 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 063AKS101, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure (special figure 2) is started with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (special figure 1).

In addition, the special game using the second special is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special, for example, the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

In this embodiment, for example, a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is provided with a first special figure reservation storage unit. The first special figure reservation storage unit stores a special figure game (first special symbol The pending data of the special figure game using the first special figure in the display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc., as pending data. is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Thus, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (Special figure display result) Based on whether it is decided to control to the big hit game state, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, ready-to-win effect etc.) Hold to make it possible to determine memory information.

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; No), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit Then, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (step 063AKS115). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 063 AKS115, for example, by subtracting 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory and updating it, the number of the first special figure reserved memory is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved memory The pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries below the pending number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") are shifted upward by one entry. (Step 063AKS116). Further, in the processing of step 063 AKS116, the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter in the RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting one. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value to "1" (step 063AKS117).

After executing either of the processes of steps 063AKS104 and 063AKS117, the CPU 103 determines whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, should be any of "big win", "minor win", and "losing". Select and set the special figure display result determination table corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value as a table used for the purpose (step 063AKS105). For example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 42-12 (a) is set to the use table. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 42-12 (b) is set to the use table.

The first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 42-12(a) is derived and displayed as a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. before the variable display result is set as "big win" and whether or not to control to the big hit game state as the variable display result as "small win" or whether to be controlled to the small hit game state as the variable display result as "small hit" is determined. 4 is a table referred to for determination based on the random number MR1 for . The second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 42-12(b) is derived and displayed as a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. before the variable display result is set as "big win" and whether or not to control to the big hit game state as the variable display result as "small win" or whether to be controlled to the small hit game state as the variable display result as "small hit" is determined. 4 is a table referred to for determination based on the random number MR1 for .

In the first special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 42-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 42-12 (b), it is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result A numerical value (determined value) is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "losing".

In the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 42-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 42-12 (b), it is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result The table data indicating the determination value determines whether or not to control the special figure display result to the big win game state as "big win", or whether to control the special figure display result to the small win game state as "small hit". It is decision data assigned to the decision result.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 42-12 (b), a larger decision value than in the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 42-12 (a) is "small hit" is assigned to the special figure display result. That is, in the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 42-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 42-12 (b), the second special figure display result determination table Determining data is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small win game state increases.

Returning to FIG. 42-11, following the process of step 063AKS105, the CPU 103 stores the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation, the special figure selected in step 063AKS105. By comparing with the determined value assigned to "big hit" in the display result determination table, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "big hit" (step 063AKS106).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS106, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it has been determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" at step 063AKS106 (step 063AKS107). Then, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big win" (step 063AKS107; Yes), the big win flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to ON state (step 063AKS108). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 42-13(b) as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 063AKS109). The CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the jackpot type determination table set in step 063AKS109, so that the jackpot type is selected as the first special symbol ("fluctuation special figure") variably displayed in the special figure game. Depending on whether it is a special figure or a second special figure (variation special figure buffer value is either "1" or "2"), "jackpot A" shown in FIG. 42-13 (a) or "jackpot B" (step 063AKS110).

"Big win A" and "Big win B" shown in FIG. 42-13(a) are both "non-probability variable big wins" which are not controlled to the probability variable state after the big win game state is ended. When the "big win A" is controlled, after the end of the big win game state, the time-saving state is controlled over a period until the variable display is executed five times. When the "jackpot B" is controlled, after the jackpot game state is finished, the time-saving state is controlled until the variable display is executed once. A "jackpot A" whose period of control to the time-saving state after the jackpot game state is over is longer than a "jackpot B" has a higher advantage for the player than the "jackpot B". In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 42-13(b), when the variable special pattern is the first special pattern, the jackpot type is determined to be either "jackpot A" or "jackpot B". On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the jackpot type is determined as "jackpot A" and not determined as "jackpot B". With such a configuration, when the big win symbols are derived and displayed in the second special game, the ratio of the big win symbols to the players is higher than when the big win symbols are derived and displayed in the first special game. is controlled to "jackpot A" with a high degree of advantage.

Returning to FIG. 42-11, after executing the process of step 063AKS110, the CPU 103 corresponds to the jackpot type determined in step 063AK110, for example, the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (step 063AKS111) to store the determined jackpot type. For example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "jackpot B", it is set to "1".

In step 063AKS107, when it is determined that the variable display result was not determined to be a "jackpot" in step 063AKS106 (step 063AKS107; No), the CPU 103 determines the special figure display result determination stored in the variable random number buffer. By comparing the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 with the determined value assigned to the "small win" in the special figure display result determination table selected in step 063AKS105, the special figure display result is made "small win". (Step 063AKS118).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS118, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined that the special figure display result is a "small hit" in step 063AKS118 (step 063AKS119). Then, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 063AKS119; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to ON state (step 063AKS120). Thereafter, the CPU 103 selects and sets the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 42-14(b) as a table used for determining one of a plurality of small hit types (step 063AKS121). By performing a random number lottery using the small hit type determination table set in step 063AKS121, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit type is the first special figure or the second special figure (variation Depending on whether the special figure buffer value is "1" or "2"), it is determined to be one of "small hit A" to "small hit E" shown in FIG. 42-14 (a) ( step 063AKS122).

As shown in FIG. 42-14 (a), "small win A" and "small win B" are game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to be open in the small winning game state. It is a small hit type that passes through the big hit area 063AK19 by being guided to 063AK28. Concretely, in this embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start production time is set to the above-described third specific time. As described above, when the small-hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the game ball that has won the big-winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big-hit area 063AK19. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big winning area 063AK19. When the game ball that has won the big winning hole 063AK4 in the small winning game state of "small winning A" passes through the big winning area 063AK19, after the small winning game state is finished, it is controlled to the big winning game state of "big winning A". . On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the big winning hole 063AK4 in the small winning game state of "small win B" passes through the big winning area 063AK19, after the small winning game state ends, the big winning game state of "big win B" controlled by

"Small hit C" and "small hit D" are the time saving area 063AK20 by guiding the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small winning game state to the distribution member 063AK28. It is a small hit type to pass through. Concretely, in this embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start production time is set to the above-described second specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the game ball that has won the big winning hole 063AK4 in the small winning game state of "small winning C" passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the small winning game state ends. Controlled in a time-saving state. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the big winning hole 063AK4 in the small winning game state of "small winning D" passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the variable display is executed once after the small winning game state ends. It is controlled in a short-time state over a period of up to.

"Small hit E" is a small hit type in which a game ball that has won a large winning opening 063AK4 that is controlled to be open in a small win game state passes through a losing area 063AK21 by being guided by a distribution member 063AK28. be. Concretely, in this embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start production time is set to the above-described first specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that wins the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the losing area 063AK21. Therefore, when the small winning type is "small winning E", the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the losing area 063AK21.

In the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 42-14 (b), when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the small hit kind is, When the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19, the "small win A" controlled to the "big win A" having a higher advantage for the player than the "big win B" is determined. With such a configuration, when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the second special game, and the game ball passes through the big winning area 063AK19 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to open, in the first special game A small winning pattern is derived and displayed, and the game is played from ``big winning B'' after finishing the small winning game state at a higher rate than when the game ball passes through the big winning area 063AK19 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state. It is controlled to "jackpot A" which is highly advantageous for the player.

In the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 42-14 (b), the ratio of the small hit type is determined to be "small hit A" and the ratio of the small hit type to be determined to be "small hit B", the total The value corresponds to the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big-hit game state after the small-hit game state ends, based on the fact that the game ball has passed the big-hit area 063AK19 in the small-hit game state. In addition, the total value of the ratio of the small hit type determined to be "small hit C" and the ratio of the small hit type determined to be "small hit D" is the time saving area 063AK20 when the game ball is in the small hit game state. It corresponds to the degree of expectation to be controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small winning game state based on passing through. In addition, the rate at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit E" is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, and the control to change the game state after the small hit game state is completed. Does not meet expectations.

As shown in Figure 42-14 (b), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the ratio (15%) of the small hit type determined to be "small hit C" and the small hit type " The total value (30%) of the ratio (15%) determined as the small hit D" is determined as the small hit type "small hit C" when the variable special figure is the first special figure. It is larger than the total value (25%) of the ratio (15%) and the ratio (10%) in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D". That is, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the second special game, the ratio is higher than when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the first special symbol game, in the small winning game state. The game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20, and is configured to be controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as the fixed special symbol of the second special symbol game, thereby improving the game interest.

Returning to FIG. 42-11, after executing the processing of step 063AKS122, the CPU 103 corresponds to the small hit type determined in step 063AK122, for example, a small hit that is a stored value of the small hit type buffer provided in the RAM 102 By setting the type buffer value (step 063AKS123), the determined small hit type is stored. As an example, if the small hit type is "small hit A", the small hit type buffer value is set to "0", if it is "small hit B", it is set to "1", and if it is "small hit C", it is "2". , and if it is a "small hit D", it is set to "3", and if it is a "small hit E", it is set to "4".

In step 063AKS119, when it is determined that the special figure display result was not determined to be a "small hit" in step 063AKS118 (step 063AKS119; No), or after executing the processing of step 063AKS111 or step 063AKS123, the CPU 103 Confirmed special symbols are determined in accordance with the result of prior determination as to whether or not to control to the big win game state or the small win game state, the determination result of the big win type in the case of the big win game state, etc. (step 063AKS112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS112, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 063AKS113), and then terminates the special symbol normal process. When the first special figure pending memory number is "0" at step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; Yes), CPU 103 performs a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 063AKS124), and then terminates the special symbol normal processing.

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB5-3 shown in FIG. 42-15.

As shown in FIG. 42-15, in this embodiment, the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 correspond to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the case where the variable display result is "big hit". Variation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 and variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "minor hit" are set in advance.

In this embodiment, three types of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C are set as the types of super reach, and the normal reach effect is executed for the variation pattern shown in FIG. 42-15. Variation patterns PB2-1, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB5-1 in which reach effects of super reach C are executed along with variation patterns PA2-1, PA3-1, PA4-1, PA5-1, and Variation patterns PB2-2, PB3-2, PB4-2, and PB5-2 in which the ready-to-reach effect of super reach B is executed, and variation patterns PB2-3, PB3-3, and PB4 in which the ready-to-reach effect of super reach A is executed. -3, PB5-3 and, are included. In this embodiment, as the ready-to-reach effect of super reach A, the effect of displaying a character image showing character A is performed on the screen of the image display device 5, and as the ready-to-reach effect of super reach B, the screen of the image display device 5 is performed. Then, an effect of displaying a character image showing the character B is performed, and an effect of displaying a character image showing the character C is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a reach effect of the super reach C.例文帳に追加

In addition, the variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit" include variation patterns PA4-1, PB4-1 to PB4-3 in which time-saving suggestive effects are executed, Variation patterns PA5-1, PB5-1 to PB5-3 are included in which the time-saving suggestive effect is not executed.

FIG. 42-16 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S111 of the special symbol process processing as the variation pattern setting processing regarding the characteristic portion 063AK.

When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step 063AK201). When it is determined that the big hit flag is on (step 063AKS201; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Any one of the variation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 corresponding to the "big hit" is determined (step 063AK202).

As shown in FIG. 42-17, in the big hit variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern is a variation pattern PB3- in which the reach effect of super reach C is executed at a higher rate than the variation pattern PA3-1 in which the normal reach effect is performed. 1 is determined, and the ready-to-reach performance of super reach B is executed at a higher rate than the variation pattern PB3-1. is determined to be the variation pattern PB3-3 to be executed. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-reach A is executed than when to-win performance of super ready-to-reach B is executed, and ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-reach B is executed. The time is higher than when the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-reach C is executed, and is higher when the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-reach C is executed than when the normal ready-to-reach performance is executed.

Returning to FIG. 42-16, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not on in step 063AK201 (step 063AKS201; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS207). When it is determined that the small hit flag is not on (step 063AK207; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Any one of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case of "losing" is determined (step 063AKS208).

As shown in FIG. 42-18, in the losing variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern is a variation pattern PB2- in which the ready-to-win effect of super reach C is performed at a lower rate than the variation pattern PA2-1 in which the normal ready-to-win effect is performed. 1 is determined, and the ready-to-reach production of super reach B is executed at a rate lower than that of the fluctuation pattern PB2-1. is determined to be the variation pattern PB2-3 to be executed.

Returning to FIG. 42-16, in step 063AKS207, when it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (step 063AKS207; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state. Determine (step 063AKS209). A time saving flag is a flag which shows being controlled by a time saving state.

When it is determined that the time saving flag is not set to the ON state (step 063AKS209; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the normal state time saving variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42-19 (a). , Depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E", the variation pattern corresponds to the case where the variable display result is "small hit", and the time-saving suggestive effect is executed. Any one of the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PB4-3 is determined (step 063AKS210). Whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS209; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time saving variation pattern determination table for the time saving state shown in FIG. 42-19(b). By doing so, depending on which of the small hit types is "small hit A" to "small hit E", the variation pattern corresponds to the case where the variable display result is "small hit", and the time-saving suggestion production is performed. Any of the variation patterns PA5-1 to PB5-3 that are not executed is determined (step 063AKS211). With such a configuration, when the small hit variation is executed in the normal state, it is possible to execute the time reduction suggesting performance during the execution of the small hit variation, and when the small hit variation is executed in the time reduction state, the small winning variation Time saving suggestion production is not executed during execution.

In both the normal state time-saving variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42-19 (a) and the time-saving state time-saving variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42-19 (b), the small hit type is a game ball. is a "small hit A" or "small hit B" that passes through the big hit area 063AK19, the variation pattern is a higher rate than the variation patterns PB4-1 and PB5-1 in which the reach effect of super reach C is executed. The variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2 in which the ready-to-win performance of super reach B is executed are determined, and the variation pattern PB4 in which the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-reach A is executed at a rate higher than that of the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -3, determined to be PB5-3. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation for the game ball to pass through the big hit area 063AK19 (the degree of expectation for passing the big hit area) is higher when the ready-to-reach effect of super reach-A is executed, and the ready-to-reach effect of super reach-B is executed. It is higher when the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-reach B is executed than when the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-reach C is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win A to super ready-to-win C is to be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

In both the normal state time-saving variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42-19 (a) and the time-saving state time-saving variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42-19 (b), the small hit type is a game ball. is a "small hit C" or "small hit D" that passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the variation pattern is a variation pattern PB4-3, PB5-3 in which reach production of super reach A is executed at a higher rate than The variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2 in which the ready-to-win performance of the super reach B is executed are determined, and the variation pattern PB4 in which the ready-to-reach performance of the super ready-to-reach C is executed at a higher rate than the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -1, determined to be PB5-1. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 (expectation degree of passing the time saving region) is higher when the reach performance of super reach C is executed, and the reach performance of super reach B is executed. It is higher when the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-reach B is executed than when the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-reach A is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win A to super ready-to-win C is to be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

Returning to FIG. 42-16, after executing the processing of steps 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211, the CPU 103 sets the special figure variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern (step 063AKS203). The special pattern fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern, is the time required from the start of the special pattern fluctuation in the special pattern game to the derivation display of the fixed special pattern that is the variable display result (special pattern display result). is. By setting the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern, the CPU 103 can set the timing of deriving the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The setting of the special figure fluctuation time is performed, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time to a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the processing of step 063 AKS203, the CPU 103 performs a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start one of the special symbols games for which the start condition is satisfied (step 063AKS204). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", it is set to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", it is set to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. A special figure game is started by this. In addition, when the variable display using the first special figure is started, the CPU 103 controls the first reservation display device 25A to display the number of the first special figure reservation storage that has been subtracted by one. This may be performed by the pending indicator 25A (for example, the number of lit LEDs may be reduced by one). In addition, when the variable display using the second special figure is started, the CPU 103 controls the second reservation display device 25B to display the second special figure reservation storage number decremented by one. You may make it carry out to the reservation indicator 25B (for example, the number of lighting of LED is reduced by one).

After executing the processing of step 063 AKS204, the CPU 103 issues a command (variation start command) at the start of the variation of the special symbol in order to notify the effect control board 12 side of the special figure display result, the determination result of the variation pattern, and the like. Transmission settings are made (step 063AKS205). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 transmits the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command ( Step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211 Command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined), Display result specification command (Command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), 1st special figure pending storage number specification command (The first special figure reserved memory count value subtracted by 1, that is, the command containing the EXT data indicating the number of the first special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special game) Configure transmission settings for transmission. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the second fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command ( Step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211 Command containing EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined), Display result specification command (Command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), Second special figure pending storage number specification command (The second special figure reserved memory number count value subtracted by 1, that is, the command containing the EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special game) Configure transmission settings for transmission. In the present embodiment, in the display result designation command (variable display result notification command), the determination result (predetermined result) whether the variable display result is "loss" or "big hit" or "small hit" , the result of determining which one of the multiple types of jackpot types should be used when the variable display result is "big hit" (jackpot type determination result), multiple types of small hit types when the variable display result is "small hit" Different EXT data is set according to the determination result (minor hit type determination result).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS205, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 063AKS206), and then terminates the special symbol normal processing.

FIG. 42-20 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S113 of the special symbol process processing as the special symbol stop processing regarding the characterizing portion 063AK.

When the special symbol stop processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special symbol fixed display flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is ON (step 063AKS301). Here, the special figure fixed display flag is set to ON state by the process of step 063AKS305 described later in response to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the special figure confirmed display flag is off (step 063AKS301; No), the CPU 103 performs setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step 063AKS302), and sends a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12. Settings for transmission are made (step 063AKS303). The decorative design stop command is also called a design determination command, and is a command to end the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative design and derive and display the display result (stop design).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS303, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the special figure confirmation display time (step 063AKS304). In the process of step 063AKS304, the special figure confirmation display time timer value, which is the stored value of the special figure confirmation display time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined special figure confirmation display time. After that, the CPU 103 sets the special figure confirmation display flag to the ON state (step 063AKS305), and then terminates the special symbol stop processing.

In step 063AKS301, when the special figure confirmation display flag is ON (step 063AKS301; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step 063AKS306). For example, in the process of step 063AKS306, the special figure confirmation display time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, depending on whether the special figure confirmation display time timer value after the update is "0", the special figure confirmation It is sufficient to determine whether or not the display time has elapsed. If special figure decision display time has not passed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; No), it waits until special figure decision display time passes by ending special design stop processing.

When the special figure confirmation display time has passed at step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the special figure confirmation display flag and turns it off (step 063AKS307), Whether the jackpot flag is on It is determined whether or not (step 063AKS308). At this time, if the jackpot flag is ON (step 063AKS308; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a jackpot start effect waiting time (step 063AKS309). The jackpot start effect waiting time corresponds to the jackpot start effect time during which the jackpot start effect (jackpot fanfare effect) is executed. In the processing of step 063AK309, a big win start effect waiting time timer value, which is a stored value of a big win start effect waiting time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to a predetermined big win start effect time. After executing the process of step 063AKS309, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a winning start designation command (jackpot fanfare command) corresponding to the big win from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS310).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS310, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag to turn it off (step 063AKS311) and clears the time saving flag to turn it off (step 063AKS312). After that, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state (an effect control command designating the current game state in the pachinko game 1) from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS313).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the open number count value, which is the stored value of the open number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value ( In this embodiment, it is set to "15") (step 063AKS314).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS314, the CPU 103 clears the time saving number counter (063AKS315). A time saving frequency counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and counts the number of time saving times, which is the remaining number of variable displays controlled to the time saving state. In the process of step 063AKS315, the time saving number counter is cleared, so that the time saving number count value, which is the stored value of the time saving number counter, is set to "0" as an initial value. Thereafter, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step 063AKS316), and then terminates the special symbol stop processing.

In step 063AKS308, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not on (step 063AKS308; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317). When it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (step 063AKS317; No), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 063AKS318).

In step 063AKS317, when it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (step 063AKS317; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the waiting time for the small hit start effect to any one of the above-described first specific time to third specific time. (Step 063AKS319). The small winning start performance waiting time corresponds to the small winning start performance time. Specifically, in step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 refers to the small hit start effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. It is determined to be any one of the first specific time to the third specific time according to which of the small hits E", and the small value that is the stored value of the small hit start effect waiting time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 A winning start performance waiting time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the determined small winning start performance waiting time. Small hit classification should just be specified based on a small hit classification buffer value.

As shown in FIG. 42-21, in this embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start production time is set to the third specific time. Then, the waiting time for the small winning start effect is also determined at the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start production waiting time is also set to the second specific time corresponding to the small win start production time being set to the second specific time. determined by time. When the small win type is "small win E", the small win start performance waiting time is also determined to the first specified time corresponding to the small win start performance time being set to the first specified time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a win start designation command (minor win fanfare command) corresponding to the small win from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS320). .

After executing the process of step 063AKS320, the CPU 103 controls the distribution member 063AK28 to start operating according to the distribution member operation pattern (step 063AKS321). After that, the CPU 103 clears the small hit flag to turn it off (step 063AKS322), and sets the number of opening times count value to correspond to the upper limit opening number (10 times in this embodiment) of opening and closing the big winning hole in the small win game state. ("10" in this embodiment) is set (step 063AKS323). After executing the processing of step 063AKS323, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "8" which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step 063AKS324).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS318 or step 063AKS324, CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step 063AKS325). When determining that the time saving flag is not ON (step 063AKS325; No), the CPU 103 terminates the special symbol stop processing.

When it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (step 063AKS325; Yes), the CPU 103 updates the time saving number count value by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS326), and the time saving number count value after updating is "0". (Step 063AKS327). When determining that the time saving frequency count value is not "0" (step 063AKS327; No), the CPU 103 terminates the special symbol stop processing.

When it is determined that the time saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS327; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time saving flag and sets it to an off state (step 063AKS328), and transmits a game state designation command indicating a normal state. (step 063AKS329), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 42-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S118 of the special symbol process processing as the small hit opening pre-processing regarding the characteristic portion 063AK.

When the small hit opening preprocessing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the small hit start effect has passed (step 063AKS401). In the process of step 063AKS401, the small hit start effect waiting time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and depending on whether the small hit start effect waiting time timer value after the update is "0", the small hit start It is determined whether or not the performance waiting time has passed. When it is determined that the small hit start effect waiting time has not passed (step 063AKS401; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening pre-processing.

In step 063AKS401, when it is determined that the small hit start effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 063AK12 for distribution portion supply to the ON state (step 063AKS402). After that, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the game ball holding time (step 063AKS403). At step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 sets a game ball holding time timer value, which is a stored value of a game ball holding time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to a predetermined game ball holding time. After executing the process of step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "9", which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step 063AKS404), and ends the small hit opening pre-processing.

FIG. 42-23 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S119 of the special symbol process process as the small hit open process in relation to the characteristic portion 063AK.

When the small hit opening process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the opening count value is "0" (step 063AKS501). When it is determined that the open number count value is not "0" (step 063AKS501; No), the CPU 103 determines that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state is a predetermined upper limit in the small winning game state. It is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes (10 in this embodiment) is equal to or more (step 063AKS502). At step 063AKS502, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5 (the number of times the game balls are detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5) is equal to or greater than the upper limit winning number.

When it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 is less than the upper limit winning number (step 063AKS502; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is time to open the large winning opening 063AK4. (Step 063AKS503). When it is determined that it is time to open the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; Yes), the CPU 103 turns on the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, thereby opening the large winning opening 063AK4. (Step 063AKS504), and the setting for transmitting the designation command during opening of the big winning opening is performed (Step 063AKS505). After performing the process of step 063AKS505, the CPU 103 updates the open number count value by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS506).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS506, or when it is determined in step 063AKS503 that it is not the time to open the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is time to close the large winning opening 063AK4. (Step 063AKS507). When it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the big winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; No), the CPU 103 ends the small winning opening process. When it is determined that it is time to close the big winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; Yes), the CPU 103 turns off the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening 063AK4, thereby closing the big winning opening 063AK4. (Step 063AKS508). After executing the processing of step 063AKS508, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a designation command after opening the big winning opening (step 063AKS509), and ends the processing during small winning opening.

When it is determined at step 063AKS501 that the open number count value is "0" (step 063AKS501; Yes), or when it is determined at step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 is equal to or greater than the upper limit winning number. (Step 063AKS502; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510). At step 063AKS510, the CPU 103 updates the game ball holding time timer value by subtracting 1, and the game ball holding time elapses depending on whether the updated game ball holding time timer value is "0". determine whether or not When it is determined that the game ball holding time has not passed (step 063AKS510; No), the CPU 103 ends the minor hit opening process.

In step 063AKS510, when it is determined that the game ball holding time has passed (step 063AKS510; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 063AK12 for distribution portion supply to the OFF state (step 063AKS511).

After executing the process of step 063AKS511, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state has passed through any one of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the losing area 063AK21. (Step 063AKS512). In step 063 AKS512, the CPU 103, depending on whether any of the big hit area passing flag, the time saving area passing flag, or the losing area passing flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is ON, in the small hit game state It is determined whether or not the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 has passed through any one of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the losing area 063AK21.

When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the losing area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the big hit area passage switch 063AK22 has turned on (big hit area (Whether or not the passage switch 063AK22 has detected a game ball) is determined (step 063AKS518). When it is determined that the big hit area pass switch 063AK22 is turned on (step 063AKS518; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the big hit area pass flag to the ON state (step 063AKS519) and ends the small hit opening process.

In step 063AKS518, when it is determined that the jackpot area passage switch 063AK22 is not on (step 063AKS518; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving area passage switch 063AK23 is turned on (the time saving area passage switch 063AK23 detects a game ball ) is determined (step 063AKS520). If it is determined that the time saving region passage switch 063AK23 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521). When it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (step 063AKS521; No), the CPU 103 sets the time saving region passing flag to ON state (step 063AKS522), and ends the small hit opening process.

In step 063AKS520, when it is determined that the time saving area passage switch 063AK23 is not on (step 063AKS520; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the loss area passage switch 063AK24 is turned on (the loss area passage switch 063AK24 detects a game ball ) is determined (step 063AKS523). When it is determined that the losing area passage switch 063AK24 is not ON (step 063AKS523; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening process.

In step 063AKS523, if it is determined that the loss area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS523; Yes), or in step 063AKS521, if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (step 063AKS521; Yes), the CPU 103 is a failure The area passing flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS524), and the small hit opening process is terminated.

Thus, in the present embodiment, even if it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), it is determined that the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes) Occasionally, the loss area passage flag is set to the on state without the time saving area passage flag being set to the on state.

In step 063AKS512, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the losing area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; Yes), the CPU 103 enters the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state. It is determined whether or not all game balls have been ejected to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513). At step 063AKS513, the CPU 103 determines the number of game balls detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16 (the number of game balls detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16) and the number of game balls detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (jackpot The number of game balls detected by the area discharge count switch), the number of game balls detected by the time-saving area discharge count switch (the number of times the game ball was detected by the time-saving area discharge count switch), and the loss area discharge count switch (the number of game balls detected by the losing area discharge count switch) and the total number of game balls detected by the big winning opening switch 063AK5. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not all the game balls that have won the big winning hole 063AK4 have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7.

In step 063AKS513, when it is determined that all the game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 have not been discharged outside the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; No), the CPU 103 ends the small winning opening process. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the game balls that have won the big winning hole 063AK4 have been discharged outside the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; Yes), the CPU 103 follows the distribution member operation pattern of the distribution member 063AK28. Control is performed to terminate the operation according to the control (step 063AKS514).

After executing the process of step 063AKS514, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit end designation command (small hit ending command) corresponding to the small win from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS515).

In step 063 AKS515, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to be controlled to the big hit game state or the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state as a hit end designation command according to the small hit, and to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state. A performance control command indicating the jackpot type in the case of being controlled and the number of times of variable display controlled to the time saving state in the case of being controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small winning game state is transmitted.

Specifically, in step 063AK515, the CPU 103 refers to the hit end designation command determination table shown in FIG. According to , any one of the small winning end designation command 1 to the small winning end designation command 5 is selected as the winning end designation command corresponding to the small winning, and the setting for transmitting the selected command is performed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 42-24, when the big hit area passing flag is set to the ON state and the small hit type is "small hit A", "big hit A is selected. When the big hit area passing flag is set to ON state and the small win type is ``small hit B'', the small win showing that the big win game state of ``big win B'' is controlled after the end of the small win game state. End designation command 2 is selected. When the time-saving area passing flag is set to ON state and the minor winning type is "small winning C", control is performed to the time-saving state over a period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the small winning game state is finished. A small hit end designation command 3 is selected. When the time saving region passing flag is set to ON state and the small winning type is "small winning D", the control is made to the time saving state over the period until the variable display is executed once after finishing the small winning game state. A small hit end designation command 4 indicating that a small win will be made is transmitted. When the loss area passing flag is set to ON state, regardless of the small hit type, after the end of the small hit game state, a small hit end designation command 5 indicating that the control to change the game state is not performed is transmitted. be done.

Returning to FIG. 42-23, after executing the process of step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 sets the passage notification effect wait time to any one of the above-described first to third special times (step 063AKS516). The passage notification effect waiting time corresponds to the passage notification effect time. In step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 refers to the passage notification effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. Accordingly, any one of the first special time to the third special time is determined, and the passage notification effect waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the passage notification effect waiting time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is determined. Set to a value corresponding to the passing notification effect waiting time.

As shown in FIG. 42-25, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot area passage flag is set to the ON state, the passage notification effect waiting time is set to the third special time, and the time saving area passage flag is in the ON state. is set, the waiting time for passage notification effect is set to the second special time, and when the failing region passage flag is set to ON state, the waiting time for passing notification effect is set to the first special time. be.

Returning to FIG. 42-23, after executing the process of step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "10" which is the value corresponding to the small hit end process (step 063AKS517), and opens the small hit Terminate intermediate processing.

FIG. 42-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S120 of the special symbol process processing as the small winning end processing regarding the characteristic portion 063AK.

When the small hit end processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the passage notification effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS601). At step 063AKS601, the CPU 103 updates the passage notification effect waiting time timer value by subtracting 1, and waits for passage notification effect depending on whether or not the updated passing notification effect waiting time timer value is "0". Determine whether time has passed. When it is determined that the passage notification effect waiting time has not elapsed (step 063KS601; No), the CPU 103 terminates the small hit ending process.

When it is determined that the passage notification effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS617), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit area passage flag is ON (step 063AKS602). When it is determined that the big hit area passage flag is ON (step 063AKS602; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the big hit area passage flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 063AKS603).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS603, the CPU 103 sets the big hit type buffer value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS604). Specifically, in step 063 AKS604, if the small hit type is "small hit A" controlled to the big hit game state of "big hit A" after the end of the small hit game state, the big hit type buffer value is set to "big hit A". While the corresponding "0" is set, if the small hit type is "small hit B" controlled to the big hit game state of "big hit B" after the end of the small win game state, the big hit type buffer value is set to "big hit B". ” is set to “1”. Small hit classification should just be specified based on a small hit classification buffer value.

After executing the process of step 063AKS604, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as a waiting time for the big win start effect (step 063AKS605), and transmits a win start designation command corresponding to the big win from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A setting is made for this (step 063AKS606). After executing the process of step 063AKS606, the CPU 103 clears the time saving flag to turn it off (step 063AKS607), and transmits a game state designation command indicating a normal state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Settings are made (step 063AKS608). Next, the CPU 103 sets the open number count value to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot game state (step 063AKS609), and clears the time saving number counter (063AKS610). Thereafter, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "4" corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step 063AKS611), and then ends the small hit end processing.

In step 063AKS602, when it is determined that the big hit area passing flag is not ON (step 063AKS602; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving area passing flag is ON (step 063AKS612). When it determines with a time saving area passage flag being ON (step 063AKS612; Yes), CPU103 clears a time saving area passage flag, and sets it to an OFF state (step 063AKS613).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS613, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag to the ON state (step 063AKS614), and sets the time saving frequency count value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS615). Specifically, in step 063AKS615, if the small hit type is "small hit C" which is controlled to the time saving state over the period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the end of the small hitting game state, the time saving number count value is set to "5", while the small hit type is "small hit D" which is controlled to the time saving state over the period until the variable display is executed once after the end of the small winning game state If the time saving number of times is counted Set the value to '1'. Small hit classification should just be specified based on a small hit classification buffer value. After executing the process of step 063AKS615, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting the game state designation command indicating the time saving state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS616).

In step 063AKS612, when it determines with the time saving area|region passage flag not being ON (step 063AKS612; No), CPU103 clears a loss area|region passage flag, and sets it to an OFF state (step 063AKS617).

After performing the processing of step 063AKS616 or step 063AKS617, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 063AKS618), and then performs the small hit end processing. finish.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small winning end processing is started in response to the end of the small winning open processing in which the large winning opening is performed, and the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 (step 063AKS612 ; Yes), in the small hit end process, the time saving flag is set to ON state (step 063AKS614). With such a configuration, when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, when the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20, so as not to control to the time saving state until the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state It is configured.

In the characteristic part 063AK, in the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Similarly, the processing shown in the flow charts of FIGS. 41-36 is executed. With such a configuration, in the characteristic part 063AK, in the information output process of step S23, as in the characteristic part 059AK, the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is in progress, In addition to the jackpot signal 2 indicating that the pachinko game machine 1 is in a short-time state, a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the game is in a time-saving state is output to an external device such as a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

According to such a configuration, when the time-saving state is controlled based on the end of the big-hit game state, and in the normal state, the game ball that wins the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small-hit game state enters the time-saving region 063AK4. In any of the cases where it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small winning game state based on the fact that it has passed, the external device can preferably specify the time saving state and the consecutive game state.

FIG. 42-27 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing regarding the characteristic portion 063AK.

When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is ON (step 063AKS701). A sub side time saving flag is a flag which shows being controlled by a time saving state. When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS701; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 stores the sub-side time saving number counter value provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. The sub-side time saving number count value is It is updated by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS702). The sub-side time-saving counter counts the number of times of time-saving (remaining times of variable display controlled to the time-saving state).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS702, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the time saving number of times notification effect for notifying the number of time saving times (step 063AKS703). In the present embodiment, as the time saving frequency notification effect, an effect of displaying a time saving frequency notification image indicating the time saving frequency on the screen of the image display device 5 is configured to be executable. In the time saving frequency notification effect, the time saving frequency notification image is displayed in a display mode showing the current number of time saving times based on the sub-side time saving frequency count value. In the present embodiment, the number of times of reduced working hours notification effect is executed when the variable display is being executed in the reduced working hours state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS703, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the right-handed promotion effect flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is ON (step 063AKS704). When it is determined that the right-handed promotion effect flag is not ON (step 063AKS704; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the right-handed promotion effect flag to the ON state (step 063AKS705), and controls to start the right-handed promotion effect. (step 063AKS706).

After executing the processing of step 063 AKS706, the effect control CPU 120 sets for executing a time saving rush effect that notifies that the control to the time saving state has started (that it is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state). (Step 063AKS707). In this embodiment, as a time-saving rush production, the screen of the image display device 5 shows a first time-saving rush image showing the message “Time saving!” An effect of displaying a second rush image is executed. The second time-saving entry image is an effect image that prompts the player to win a game ball to the variable winning ball device 6B. In the present embodiment, the time-saving rush effect is executed when the variable display is first executed after being controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS707, or when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not ON in step 063AKS701 (step 063AKS701; No), when it is determined that the right-handed promotion effect flag is ON in step 063AKS704 (Step 063AKS704; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result is a "jackpot" based on the display result specifying command transmitted from the main board 11 (step 063AKS708). When it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit" (step 063AKS708; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects the final stop symbol that is the fixed ornament symbol that is the variable display result of the ornament symbol, and the decoration that will be the jackpot combination. A combination of symbols is determined (step 063AKS709). At step 063 AKS709, the effect control CPU 120 selects the decoration symbols of the big hit combination as the confirmed decoration symbols by performing a random number lottery with reference to the decoration symbol determination table of the big hit combination prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121, for example. decide.

In step 063AKS708, if it is determined that the special figure display result is not a "jackpot" (step 063AKS708; No), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, etc., to display the special figure. It is determined whether or not the result is a "small hit" (step 063AKS710). When it is determined that the special figure display result is not a "small hit" (step 063AKS710; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decoration symbols that will be a losing combination as a fixed decoration symbol (step 063AKS711). At step 063AKS711, the effect control CPU 120 selects the decorative symbols of the losing combination as the fixed decorative symbols by performing a random number lottery with reference to the decorative symbol determination table of the losing combination prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121, for example. decide.

In step 063AKS710, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 063AKS710; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is ON (step 063AKS712). .

When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not set to the ON state (step 063AKS712; No), the production control CPU 120 determines the normal state small hit time fixed decoration pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42-28 (b). By performing a random number lottery using, depending on which of the small hit types is "small hit A" to "small hit E", as a fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) that will be a small hit combination, FIG. Any one of the first to fifth small winning symbols shown in -28(a) is determined (step 063AKS713). Which of the "small hit A" to "small hit E" is the small hit type may be specified based on the display result specifying command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS712; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the time saving state small hit fixed decorative pattern shown in FIG. 42-28 (c). By performing a random number lottery using a table, depending on whether the type of small win is "small win A" to "small win E", as a fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) that becomes a small win combination, Any one of the first to fifth small winning symbols shown in FIG. 42-28(a) is determined (step 063AKS714).

The first small winning pattern shown in FIG. 42-28(a) is a decorative pattern indicating the number "7" in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and "middle". This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a red rectangular decorative pattern is displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C to indicate a message "V" suggesting that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. As the second small winning pattern, a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a big hit is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. This is a combination of decoration symbols in which blue rectangular decoration symbols indicating a message "V" suggesting control to a game state are displayed. As for the third small winning design, a decorative design showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and the "middle" decorative design display area 5C is time-saving. This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a rectangular decorative pattern is displayed in red indicating the message "time" suggesting that the state is controlled. As for the fourth small winning design, a decorative design showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and the "middle" decorative design display area 5C is time-saving. This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a rectangular decorative pattern is displayed in blue indicating the message "time" suggesting that the state is controlled. As for the fifth small winning design, a decorative design showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and " This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a rectangular decorative pattern is displayed in white to indicate the message "small". The first small-hit symbol and the second small-hit symbol are a combination of decorative symbols suggesting control to the big-hit game state. The 3rd small hit design and the 4th small hit design are combination of the decoration design which suggests that it is controlled to the time saving state.

42-28(b), in the normal state small hit fixed decorative pattern determination table, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" in which the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19. , the determined decoration pattern is determined to be the fourth small winning pattern at a higher rate than the fifth small winning pattern, is determined to be the third small winning pattern at a higher rate than the fourth small winning pattern, and is higher than the third small winning pattern. is determined to be the second small winning pattern at a high rate, and is determined to be the first small winning design at a rate higher than that of the second small winning design. With such a configuration, the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19, and the degree of expectation that the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small win game state is the degree of expectation when the first small win pattern is derived and displayed as the fixed decoration pattern. is higher than when the second small winning pattern is derived and displayed, and when the second small winning pattern is derived and displayed as a fixed decoration pattern, it is higher than when the third small winning pattern is derived and displayed. It is higher when the third small winning pattern is derived and displayed as the fixed decorative pattern than when the fourth small winning pattern is derived and displayed, and the fourth small winning pattern is derived and displayed as the fixed decorative pattern. is higher than when the fifth small winning symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which one of the first to fifth small winning symbols is derived and displayed as the final decoration symbol, thereby improving the game interest.

In addition, in the normal state small hit fixed decorative pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. It is configured so that it can be determined as a small winning pattern. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, by deriving and displaying the third small winning symbol or the fourth small winning symbol suggesting that the fixed decoration symbol is controlled to the time saving state, the player can Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving region 063AK20, the time saving transition control is performed to make the player feel expectation for being controlled to the time saving state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Specifically, in the normal state small hit fixed decorative pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 42-28 (b), the small hit type is "small hit C" or " In the case of a small hit D", the fixed decorative pattern is determined to be the first small winning design at a higher rate than the fifth small winning design, and is determined to be the second small winning design at a higher rate than the first small winning design. , the fourth small winning pattern is determined at a higher rate than the second small winning design, and the third small winning design is determined at a higher rate than the fourth small winning design. With such a configuration, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and the degree of expectation controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small winning game state is higher when the third small winning pattern is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. is higher than when the fourth small winning pattern is derived and displayed, and when the fourth small winning pattern is derived and displayed as a fixed decoration pattern, it is higher than when the second small winning pattern is derived and displayed. , when the second small winning pattern is derived and displayed as the fixed decorative pattern, the higher the value is higher than when the first small winning pattern is derived and displayed, and when the first small winning pattern is derived and displayed as the fixed decorative pattern. is higher than when the fifth small winning symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which one of the first to fifth small winning symbols is derived and displayed as the final decoration symbol, thereby improving the game interest.

On the other hand, in the time saving state small hit time fixed decorative design determination table shown in FIG. It is configured so as not to be determined as a winning pattern. According to such a configuration, in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, although the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed, it is controlled to the time saving state as the fixed decorative pattern. The third small winning pattern or the fourth small winning pattern is derived and displayed to suggest that the game ball has passed through the time saving region 063AK20, and the player has an expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the time saving state. It is configured so as to prevent the player from having a crush on the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Thus, in the present embodiment, while it is possible to derive and display the third small winning pattern or the fourth small winning pattern that suggests being controlled in the time saving state as the fixed decoration pattern in the normal state, the fixed decoration in the time saving state By constructing so that the third small winning symbol or the fourth small winning symbol is not displayed as a symbol, a suitable effect can be performed according to the state.

Returning to FIG. 42-27, after executing the processing of step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, step 063AKS713 or step 063AKS714, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect control pattern (step 063AKS715). At step 063 AKS715, the effect control CPU 120 selects a plurality of types of effect control patterns prepared (set) in advance according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11 (special figure variation effect control pattern ) and set it as the effect control pattern to be used. When the setting for executing the time reduction number of times notification effect is performed in step 063AKS703, in step 063AKS715, the effect control pattern (time reduction number of times notification effect control pattern) corresponding to the time reduction number of times notification effect is selected and used. set as a pattern. When the setting for executing the time-saving rush effect control is performed in step 063AKS707, in step 063AKS715, as the effect control pattern (time-saving rush effect control pattern) to be used by selecting the effect control pattern corresponding to the time-saving rush effect set.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS715, the effect control CPU120 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM122 according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11, etc. The initial value of the effect control process timer Set (step 063AKS716).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS716, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting variable display of decorative patterns and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 063AKS717). In step 063AKS717, the effect control CPU 120 is specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined in step 063AKS715. The decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" provided on the screen of the image display device 5 start to variably display decorative patterns.

After executing the processing of step 063 AKS717, the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for updating the display of the pending display and the active display displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the start of the variable display. (Step 063AKS718).

After executing the process of step 063AKS718, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is the value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 063AKS719), and starts the variable display start setting process. finish.

FIG. 42-29 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display regarding the characteristic portion 063AK.

When the production process during variable display is started, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has passed, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer. is determined (step 063AKS801). Specifically, in step 063AKS801, the effect control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the effect control process timer by, for example, subtracting 1, and the effect control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 (effect control pattern during special figure fluctuation ) to determine whether the end code corresponding to the updated timer value has been read out, thereby determining whether or not the variable display time has elapsed.

If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 063AKS801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the ready-to-win effect period in which the ready-to-win effect is executed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer. (Step 063AKS802). Reach production period, for example in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715, it may be determined in advance. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 063AKS802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the ready-to-win effect (step 063AKS803).

And after executing the process of step 063AKS803, when it is determined that it is not a reach effect period in step 063AKS802 (step 063AKS802; No), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, etc., the number of times of shortening time. It is determined whether or not it is the time reduction number of times notification effect period in which the notification effect is executed (step 063AKS804). The time saving number of times information production period should be predetermined in the production control pattern (time saving number of times information production control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715, for example. When it is determined that it is the time reduction number of times information production period (step 063AKS804; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the time reduction number of times information production (step 063AKS805).

After executing the process of step 063AKS805, or in step 063AKS804, if it is determined that it is not the time reduction number of times notification effect period (step 063AKS804; No), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, etc. It is determined whether or not it is the time-saving suggesting effect period in which the time-saving suggesting effect is executed (step 063AKS806). Shortening of working hours suggestion production period should just be beforehand defined in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715, for example. When it is determined that it is the time saving suggestive effect period (step 063AKS806; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the time saving suggestive effect (step 063AKS807).

After executing the process of step 063AKS807, or in step 063AKS806, if it is determined that it is not the time saving suggestion effect period (step 063AKS806; No), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, etc., time saving It is determined whether or not it is the time-saving rush effect period in which the rush effect is executed (step 063AKS808). The time-saving rush effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (time-saving rush effect control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715, for example. When it is determined that it is the time-saving rush effect period (step 063AKS808; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the time-saving rush effect (step 063AKS809).

And after executing the process of step 063AKS809, when it is determined that it is not the time saving rush production period in step 063AKS808 (step 063AKS808; No), the production control CPU 120 is set in the production control pattern determined in step 063AKS715. Based on this, control is performed to execute effects during variable display, including the variable display operation of decorative symbols (step 063AKS810), and the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

In step 063AKS801, when it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step 063AKS801; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a design confirmation command has been received from the main board 11 (step 063AKS811). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step 063AKS811; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect process during variable display.

When it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has been received (step 063AKS811; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123, thereby causing the “left”, “middle” ', 'Right' decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the determined decoration design as the final stop design determined at step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711 or step 063AKS712 is derived and displayed (step 063AKS812).

After executing the process of step 063AKS812, the production control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (step 063AKS813), and sets the value of the production process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process. is updated to "3" (step 063AKS814), and the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 42-30(a) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S173 of the effect control process processing as the special figure per waiting processing regarding the characteristic portion 063AK.

When the special figure hit waiting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the hit start designation command reception waiting time has passed (step 063AKS901). When it is determined that the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has passed (step 063AKS901; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is ON (step 063AKS902).

When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is ON (step 063AKS902; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving number count value is "0" (step 063AKS903). When it is determined that the sub-side time saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS903; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time saving flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS904), promoting right hitting After clearing the production flag and setting it to the OFF state (step 063AKS905), control is performed to end the right-handed promotion production (step 063AKS906).

And after executing the process of step 063AKS906, in step 063AKS902, if it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS902; No), in step 063AKS903, if the sub-side time saving number count value is not "0" If determined (step 063AKS903; No), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 063AKS907), and waits per special figure. exit.

In step 063AKS901, when it is determined that the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has not passed (step 063AKS901; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit has been received. (Step 063AKS908).

When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit has been received (step 063AKS908; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the big win start effect time (step 063AKS909). At step 063 AKS909, a value corresponding to a predetermined jackpot start performance time is set to a value corresponding to a predetermined jackpot start performance time, which is a stored value of a big win start performance time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . After executing the process of step 063AKS909, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the big hit start effect (step 063AKS910), and sets the value of the effect process flag to "6" which is the value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit. After updating (step 063AKS911), the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

In step 063AKS908, when it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit is not received (step 063AKS908; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received. Determine (step 063AKS912). When it determines with not having received the hit start designation|designated command according to the small hit (step 063AKS912; No), CPU120 for production|presentation control complete|finishes a special figure per waiting process.

When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit is received (step 063AKS912; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start effect time to any one of the first specific time to the third specific time. (Step 063AKS913). Specifically, in step 063AKS913, the effect control CPU 120 determines the small hit start effect time by referring to the small hit start effect time determination table shown in FIG. A” to “small win E”, it is determined to be any one of the first specific time to the third specific time, and the stored value of the small win start performance time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. is set to a value corresponding to the determined small winning start performance time. Small hit classification should just be specified based on the display result specification command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 42-30(b), in the present embodiment, when the minor hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start production time is set to the third specific time, When the minor hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start production time is set to the second specific time, and when the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start production A time is set to the first specific time.

Returning to FIG. 42-30 (a), after executing the process of step 063AKS913, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the small hit start effect (step 063AKS914), and sets the value of the effect process flag to After updating to "4" which is the value corresponding to the production process (step 063AKS915), the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

FIG. 42-31 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S174 of the effect control process process as the effect process during the small hit regarding the feature part 063AK.

When the effect processing during the small hit is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the small hit start effect time set in step 063AKS913 has elapsed (step 063AKS1001). In step 063AKS1001, the small hit start production time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and depending on whether the small hit start production time timer value after the update is "0", the small hit start production time elapses. determine whether or not When it is determined that the small hit start production time has not passed (step 063AKS1001; No), the production control CPU 120 ends the small winning medium production process.

If it is determined that the small hit start production time has elapsed (step 063AKS1001; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the small hit start production end flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on ( step 063AKS 1002). When it is determined that the small hit start effect end flag is not on (step 063AKS1002; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the small hit start effect (step 063AKS1004) and turns on the small hit start effect end flag. state (step 063AKS1005).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS1005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is ON (step 063AKS1006). When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not ON (step 063AKS1006; No), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start the normal passage fanning production (step 063AKS1007), and ends the production process during the small hit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the time saving passing fan effect (step 063AKS1008), and ends the effect processing during the small hit. do.

In step 063AKS1002, when it is determined that the small hit start production end flag is ON (step 063AKS1002; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a command for specifying the end of the hit corresponding to the small hit has been received ( step 063 AKS 1003). When it is determined that the command for specifying the end of the hit corresponding to the small hit is not received (step 063AKS1003; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect processing during the small win.

When it is determined that the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit is received (step 063AKS1003; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the small hit start effect end flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1009), and passes After performing the control to terminate the normal time passing performance or the short time passing performance being executed as the time stimulating performance (step 063 AKS1010), the value of the performance process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end performance processing. 5" (step 063AKS1011).

After executing the processing of step 063 AKS1011, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not any of the small hit end designation command 1 and the small hit end designation command 2 is received as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit. Determine (step 063AKS1012).

When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 is received (step 063AKS1012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passing notification effect time to the third special time ( step 063 AKS 1013). At step 063AKS1013, a value corresponding to the third special time is set to a value corresponding to the third special time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS1013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is ON (step 063AKS1014). When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not ON (step 063AKS1014; No), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start the normal jackpot area passing notification production (step 063AKS1015), and ends the production process during the small hit. do. When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the time saving big hit area passing notification effect (step 063AKS1016), and ends the effect processing during the small hit. do.

In step 063AKS1012, when it is determined that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 is received (step 063AKS1012; No), the effect control CPU 120 designates the end of the hit according to the small hit. As a command, it is determined whether or not any of the small-hit end designation command 3 and the small-hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017).

If it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 is received (step 063AKS1017; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passing notification effect time to the second special time ( step 063AKS 1018). At step 063AKS1018, the value of the timer for passage notification effect time is set to a value corresponding to the second special time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS1018, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the time saving region passage notification effect (step 063AKS1019), and ends the effect processing during the small hit.

In step 063AKS1017, when it is determined that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 is received (step 063AKS1017; No), the effect control CPU 120 is the first special passing notification effect time. Set to time (step 063AKS1020). At step 063AKS1020, the passage notification effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the first special time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS1020, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the losing area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1021), and ends the effect processing during the small hit.

FIG. 42-32 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S175 of the effect control process process as the small hit end effect process with respect to the feature part 063AK.

When the small hit end effect processing is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the passage notification effect time set in step 063AKS1013, step 063AKS1018 or step 063AKS1020 has elapsed (step 063AKS1101). In step 063AKS1101, the value of the passage notification presentation time timer is updated by subtracting 1, and whether or not the passage notification presentation time has passed depends on whether the updated passage notification presentation time timer value is "0". determine whether When it is determined that the passage notification effect time has not passed (step 063AKS1101; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small hit end effect processing.

When it is determined that the passing notification production time has passed (step 063AKS1101; Yes), the production control CPU 120 is a small hit end designation command 1 and a small hit end designation command 2 as a hit end designation command according to the small hit. It is determined whether or not any of them has been received (step 063AKS1102). When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 is received (step 063AKS1102; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command. Then (step 063AKS1103), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step 063AKS1104), and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

In step 063AKS1102, when it is determined that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 is received (step 063AKS1102; No), the effect control CPU 120 designates the end of the hit according to the small hit. As a command, it is determined whether or not any of the small-hit end designation command 3 and the small-hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105). When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 is received (step 063AKS1105; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time saving flag to the ON state (step 063AKS1106 ).

After executing the processing of step 063 AKS1106, the effect control CPU 120 receives a sub- Set the side time reduction count value (step 063AKS1107). When the small hit end designation command 3 indicating that the time saving state is controlled over the period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the end of the small hitting game state is received, in step 063 AKS 1107, the sub side time saving count value is set. Set to "5". When the small hit end designation command 4 indicating that the time saving state is controlled over the period until the variable display is executed once after the end of the small hitting game state is received, in step 063AKS1107, the sub-side time saving count value is set. Set to "1".

In step 063AKS1105, when it is determined that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 is received (step 063AKS1105; No), the effect control CPU 120 is on the sub side time saving flag. (Step 063AKS1108). When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is ON (step 063AKS1108; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving number count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109).

When it is determined that the sub-side time saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time saving flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1110), promoting right hitting After clearing the production flag and setting it to the OFF state (step 063AKS1111), control is performed to end the right-handed promotion production (step 063AKS1112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1107 or step 063AKS1112, or in step 063AKS1108, if it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not ON (step 063AKS1108; No), in step 063AKS1109, the sub-side time saving count value is "0" If it is determined that it is not (step 063AKS1109; No), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 063AKS1113), and End the end effect processing.

42-33 to 42-36, an example of the effect operation related to the characteristic part 063AK will be described below.

First, with reference to FIGS. 42-33 and 42-34, an effect operation example when a small hit variation is executed in the normal state will be described. Specifically, below, a small hit variation is executed in a normal state, and a reach performance of super reach A and a time-saving suggestive performance are executed during the small hit variation, and a third small winning pattern is executed as a fixed decorative pattern. is derived and displayed as an example.

FIG. 42-33(a) shows that in the normal state, the missing pattern (“135”) is displayed in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. It shows a stopped display state. Fig. 42-33 (b) shows that in the normal state, the small hit variation is started, and the variable display of the decorative design is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. This indicates that the

FIG. 42-33(c) shows a state in which reach is established and a character image AK6 showing character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a reach effect of super reach A. .

Fig. 42-33 (d) shows that the time-saving suggestion production is started, and a predetermined losing pattern ("767") is temporarily displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It shows a stopped display state. FIG. 42-24(e) shows a state in which the decoration design is re-variably displayed in the "medium" decoration design display area 5C in the time-saving suggestive effect. Fig. 42-33(f) shows a state in which the time-saving suggesting design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the time-saving suggesting production. there is Figure 42-33 (g), in the time-saving suggestion production, "left", "middle", "right" in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R the state in which the re-variable display of the decorative design is performed showing.

FIG. 42-33(h) shows that the third small winning design is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative design in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the small winning variation is finished.

FIG. 42-33 (i) shows that control to the small winning game state is started, and as a small winning start effect, the screen of the image display device 5 has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right, and "Aim right! and a small winning start image AK9 showing the message "Put the ball here!" It shows a state where In the state shown in FIG. 42-33(i), a right-handed promotion effect is started in response to the start of control to the small winning game state, and a right-handed promotion image AK7 showing an arrow pointing to the right is displayed. It is displayed on the screen of the device 5 .

In the normal state, the rendering operation shown in FIG. 42-33(i) is executed, and then the rendering operation shown in FIG. 42-34(a) is executed. FIG. 42-34(a) shows a state in which the normal passing effect is being executed. In the normal passing effect, as shown in FIG. 42-34 (a), the screen of the image display device 5 includes a big hit area passing image AK2, a time saving area passing image AK3, and a losing area passing image AK4. , The jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 are displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R emit “jackpot Is it time-saving?

Hereinafter, the effect operation in the case where the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 while the normal passing effect is being executed in the normal state will be described.

In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the effect operation shown in FIG. 42-34(a) ends and the effect operation shown in FIG. 42-34(b) is executed. FIG. 42-34(b) shows a state in which the normal jackpot area passage notification effect is executed and the normal jackpot area passage notification image AK10 showing the message "V" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. ing.

FIG. 42-34(c) shows that after the small winning game state is over, it is controlled to the big winning game state, and as a big winning start effect, the screen of the image display device 5 has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right. Aim right!” and a second jackpot start image AK12 showing the message “Put the ball into the attacker!” there is The second big win start image AK12 is a performance image that prompts the player to win a game ball to the special variable winning ball device 7 . In the state shown in FIG. 42-34(c), the right-handed promotion effect is executed continuously when the small winning game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is

Next, in the normal state, when the normal passing fan effect is being executed, the effect operation in the case where the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 will be described.

In the normal state, in response to the game ball passing through the time saving region 063AK20, the effect operation shown in FIG. 42-34(a) ends, and the effect operation shown in FIG. 42-34(d) is executed. FIG. 42-34 (d) shows a state in which the time saving region passage notification effect is executed and the time saving region passage notification image AK13 showing the message “Lucky!” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

FIG. 42-34 (e) is controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state in response to the start of the next variable display after the small hit game state ends, and the screen of the image display device 5 as a time-saving rush production , and a second time-saving rush image AK15 showing the message "Aim right and put the ball in the electric chew!" This indicates that the In the state shown in FIG. 42-34(e), the right-handed promotion effect is executed continuously when the small winning game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 42-34 (e), the time saving number of times notification effect is executed in response to being controlled to the time saving state. It is displayed in a display mode indicating that the number of times is four.

Next, in the normal state, when the normal passing effect is being executed, the effect operation in the case where the game ball passes through the losing region 063AK21 will be described.

In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21, the effect operation shown in FIG. 42-34(a) ends and the effect operation shown in FIG. 42-34(f) is executed. FIG. 42-34(f) shows a state in which the failing area passage notification effect is executed and the failing area passage notification image AK17 showing the message "Sorry!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

In FIG. 42-34 (g), after the small winning game state is finished, when the game state is controlled to the normal state without changing, the next variable display is started, and the "left", "middle", It shows a state in which variable display is performed in each of the "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 42-35 and 42-36, an effect operation example when a small hit variation is executed in the time saving state will be described. Specifically, hereinafter, the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, the reach performance of super reach A is executed during the small hit variation, and the third small winning pattern is derived and displayed as the fixed decorative pattern. An example will be used for explanation.

FIG. 42-35(a) shows that in the time saving state, the image display device 5 "left", "middle", "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the missing design ("135") It shows a stopped display state. In the state shown in FIG. 42-35(a), the right-handed promotion effect is being executed, and the screen of the image display device 5 displays a right-handed promotion image AK7. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 42-35 (a), the number of times of working hours notification effect is executed, and the number of times of working hours notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, indicating that the number of times of working hours is four times. displayed in the form.

Fig. 42-35 (b) shows that in the time-saving state, the small hit variation is started, and the variable display of the decorative design is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. This indicates that the In the state shown in FIG. 42-35 (b), the display mode of the time saving frequency notification image AK16 is updated according to the start of the variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time saving frequency is 3 times. It is

FIG. 42-35(c) shows a state in which a ready-to-win state is established, a ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win A is executed, and a character image AK6 showing character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

FIG. 42-35 (d) shows that the second small winning design is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative design in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the small winning variation is finished.

In FIG. 42-35 (e), the control to the small winning game state is started, the small winning start effect is executed, and the right arrow image AK8 and the start image AK9 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. state. In the state shown in FIG. 42-35 (e), the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed in response to the start of the control to the small winning game state, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is

In the time-saving state, after the effect operation shown in FIG. 42-35(e) is executed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 42-36(a) is executed. FIG. 42-36(a) shows a state in which the time-saving passage fanning effect is being executed. 42-36(a), the screen of the image display device 5 includes a time saving passing image including a big hit area passing image AK2 and a losing area passing image AK4. AK5 is displayed, the big hit area light emitting part 063AK25 and the losing area light emitting part 063AK27 are caused to emit light without emitting light from the time saving area light emitting part 063AK26 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and the speaker 8L, 8R says, "Is it a big hit? Kana?” is produced by outputting a time-saving taunting voice.

Hereinafter, in the time saving state, when the time saving time passage fanning effect is being executed, the effect operation in the case where the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 will be described.

In the time saving state, in response to the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19, the effect operation shown in FIG. 42-36(a) is completed, and the effect operation shown in FIG. 42-36(b) is executed. FIG. 42-36(b) shows a state in which the time saving jackpot area passage notification effect is executed and the time saving jackpot area passage notification image AK18 showing the message "BONUS!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. showing.

In FIG. 42-36(c), after the small winning game state ends, the game state is controlled to the big winning game state, the big winning start effect is executed, and the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first big winning start image AK11 and the second big winning. It shows a state in which a start image AK12 is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 42-36(c), the right-handed promotion effect is executed continuously when the small winning game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is

Next, in the time saving state, when the time saving time passage fanning effect is being executed, the effect operation in the case where the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 or the losing region 063AK21 will be described. In the time saving state, when the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 and when the game ball passes through the losing region 063AK21, the same effect operation is executed.

In the time saving state, in response to the game ball passing through the time saving region 063AK or the losing region 063AK21, the production operation shown in FIG. 42-36 (a) is completed, and the production operation shown in FIG. 42-36 (d) is executed be done. FIG. 42-36(d) shows a state in which the failing area passage notification effect is executed and the failing area passage notification image AK17 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

In FIG. 42-36(e), after the small hit game state is completed, when the game state is controlled to the time saving state without changing, the next variable display is started, "left", "middle", It shows a state in which variable display is performed in each of the "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the state shown in FIG. 42-36 (e), the display mode of the time saving frequency notification image AK16 is updated according to the start of the variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time saving frequency is two times. It is Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42-36(e), the right-handed promotion effect is executed continuously when the small winning game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. is displayed in

As described above, in the characteristic part 063AK, a small winning symbol (special display result) is derived and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and is formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). When the big winning hole 063AK4 is controlled to open state, when the game ball (game medium) passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (special area), time saving transition control is performed based on the passage, and time saving is performed from the normal state. While controlling to a state (special state), a small winning pattern is derived and displayed as a fixed special pattern in a special game in the time saving state, and when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball is time saving. When area|region 063AK20 is passed, time saving transition control based on the said passage is not performed. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 063AK, a small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the special game in the normal state, and when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and the time saving state When the small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the special game and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, different effects can be executed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. . According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 in the time saving state, and when the game ball does not pass through either the big hit region 063AK19 or the time saving region 063AK20 in the time saving state, the same effect is produced. configured to run. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, the characteristic portion 063AK is configured to be able to execute different effects when the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the time saving state and when the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the normal state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, different effects are variably displayed when the small winning symbols are derived and displayed in the special game in the normal state and when the small winning symbols are derived and displayed in the special game in the time saving state. Configured to run while running. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect according to the state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed in the special game in the normal state, it is controlled to the time saving state as an effect suggesting that the small winning pattern is derived and displayed as the fixed special pattern. It is configured to be able to execute the time-saving suggestion production that suggests that during the execution of the variable display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a variety of productions and improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characteristic portion 063AK, when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed as the fixed special pattern in the second special pattern game, it is higher than when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed as the fixed special pattern in the first special pattern game. It is configured to be controlled to a time-saving state at a rate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the second special symbol game, thereby improving the game interest.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

In the above-described embodiment, as the preview effect, the display mode of the pending display displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode during normal operation, so that the variable corresponding to the pending display is displayed. In the display, it is controlled to the small winning game state, and the game ball entering the big winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small winning game state is any of the big winning area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the losing area 063AK21. It may be configured to be able to execute a holding display change effect that foretells that the vehicle will pass through a car or the like.

For example, by changing the pending display change effect, the display color of the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started is changed to any one of blue, green, and red, which is different from the normal white color. The change in the display mode can be recognized, and the game ball entering the big winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small winning game state is controlled to the small winning game state, the big winning area 063AK19, the time saving area It may be configured to be able to suggest passing through either 063AK20 or failing area 063AK21.

Specifically, when the pending display change effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice, the pre-reading judgment is performed based on the occurrence of the starting prize in the starting winning judgment processing executed in step S101 of the special symbol process processing. I wish I could. In the look-ahead determination, for example, by performing a random number lottery with reference to the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 42-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 42-12 (b) 42-14, when the variable display result is a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "losing", or a process of prefetching whether the variable display result is a "small hit". By performing a random number lottery with reference to the small hit type determination table shown in (b), processing such as pre-reading determination of whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" is performed. Just do it. After that, in the starting winning determination process, setting for transmitting a starting winning command indicating the result of the look-ahead determination may be performed.

The start winning command set for transmission in the start winning determination process is executed by command control processing in step S27 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the performance control board 12 . The starting winning command transmitted from the main board 11 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 by performing command analysis processing in step S75 of the effect control main processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. It should be stored in the command buffer.

In this case, in the pre-reading notice setting process executed in step S161 of the effect control process processing, in response to receiving the start winning command from the main board 11, whether or not to execute the holding display change effect as the pre-reading notice effect and execution mode.

In the holding storage stored when determining whether or not to execute the holding display change effect and the execution mode, the holding that the variable display result is "big hit", the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is , When the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and holds "small hit C" or "small hit D", and if any of the above is included, after the end of the previously executed variable display, that is, the destination By changing from the normal state to the time-saving state before executing the variable display corresponding to the suspension of the reading notice target, variable display at the time of pre-reading and at the time of execution of the variable display corresponding to the suspension of the pre-reading notice target Results and variation patterns may vary. In such a case, a discrepancy occurs between the suggestive content of the pending display change effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect and the actual variable display result or change pattern, causing the distrust of the player and lowering the interest in the game. There is fear.

Therefore, among the stored reservations, the variable display result is "big win", the variable display result is "small hit", and the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D". and, when any of the above is included, the execution of the pending display change effect may be restricted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

For example, in the pre-reading notice setting process, in the stored suspension, the variable display result is "big hit", the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit C" or " If none of the holding to be a small hit D" is included, according to the determination ratio shown in the normal holding change determination table shown in FIG. , whether or not the pending display change effect is to be executed and the mode of execution may be determined. On the other hand, among the stored reservations, the variable display result is "big win", the variable display result is "small win", and the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D". If any of the holding and the holding is included, the variable display result and the small hit according to the determination ratio shown in the normal holding change determination table shown in the limit holding change determination table shown in FIG. 42-37 (b) Depending on the type, whether or not to execute the pending display change effect and the execution mode may be determined. Among the stored holds, a hold in which the variable display result is a "big hit", a hold in which the variable display result is a "minor win" and a small win type is a "small win C" or a "small win D"; is included may be determined by confirming the contents of the start winning buffer.

In the normal hold change determination table, as shown in FIG. 42-37 (a), if the variable display result is "big hit", hold at a higher rate than it is decided not to execute the hold display change effect (white) The display mode of the display is determined to be blue, the display mode of the pending display is determined to be green at a rate higher than that of blue, and the display mode of the pending display is determined to be red at a rate higher than that of green. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the pending display is displayed in red than when the pending display is displayed in green, and is higher when the pending display is displayed in green. It is higher than when it is displayed, and is higher when the suspension display is displayed in blue than when it is displayed in white (when the suspension display change effect is not executed). On the other hand, in the limit-time pending change determination table, as shown in FIG. 42-37(b), the execution of the pending display change effect in which the expected degree of big hit is green or higher is restricted. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 42-37(b), the suspension display change effect in which the suspension display is displayed in blue is executable, but it may be limited to only "no execution".

In addition, in the normal pending change determination table shown in FIG. 42-37 (a) and the restricted pending change determination table shown in FIG. An example is shown in which the display mode is determined in the same manner as when the result is a "big hit", but this is only an example, the variable display result is a "small hit", and the small hit type is a "small hit A" or Case of "small hit B" Specific display mode (such as "big hit?"), or when the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" There may be a unique display mode (“When?”). According to such a configuration, the variation of the pending display change effect is increased, and the player's attention can be attracted.

In the above embodiment, in the holding memory corresponding to the second special game stored after the end of the time saving state, the special figure display result is "small hit", the small hit type is the game ball is the time saving area 063AK20 Even if it is configured to be able to execute different performances in the case where the holding memory of "small win C" or "small win D" passing through is included and in the case where such holding memory is not included good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

For example, in the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game stored after the time saving state is completed, the special figure display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". ”, it is controlled to the time saving state again in any of the remaining second special game holdings (residual holding) after the time saving state ends (second special game The special figure display result is "small hit" in the holding storage corresponding to , and there is a hold where the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D"). Just do it. On the other hand, in the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game stored after the end of the time saving state, the special figure display result becomes "small win", and the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D". If the suspension that becomes is not included, the fact that it will not be controlled to the time saving state again in any of the remaining suspensions (the special figure display result in the suspension memory corresponding to the second special figure game will be a "small hit" , that there is no reservation where the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D"). As an example, both the return success production and the return failure production are productions in which a combination of different decorative patterns is stopped and displayed after executing a production to instigate whether or not to be controlled to the time saving state again as a common production. I wish I had.

In the above-described embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the small hit variation, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state does not suggest that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. passes through the jackpot region 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the loss region 063AK21, and the game ball passes through the time-saving region 063AK20 in the normal state. Based on this, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 after performing a losing effect suggesting that the game ball has not passed through the big hit area 063AK19, and based on the passage, the game ball enters the time saving state after the end of the small winning game state. A relief effect suggesting being controlled may be configured to be executable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

For example, as a jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 42-38(a), a message "jackpot" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to suggest that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. An image AK20 and a loss suggestive image AK21 showing the message "losing" and suggesting that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21 may be configured to be executable to display the big win fanning image AK19. In this case, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving region 063AK20, as shown in FIG. should be executed. In the state shown in FIG. 42-38(b), the frame line of the loss suggestive image AK21 is displayed thicker than the frame line of the non-highlighted jackpot suggestive image AK20, thereby highlighting the loss suggestive image AK21. there is After performing the effect operation shown in FIG. 42-38(b) as a loss effect, as a relief effect, as shown in FIG. A message "time saving" is displayed, and a time saving suggesting image AK22 suggesting that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 is displayed, and the highlighting of the failing suggesting image AK21 is ended, and the time saving suggesting image AK22 is highlighted. You have to do the performance. In the state shown in FIG. 42-38(c), the frame line of the time saving suggesting image AK22 is displayed thicker than the frame lines of the non-highlighted jackpot suggesting image AK20 and the losing suggesting image AK21, whereby the time saving suggesting image AK22 is displayed. is highlighted.

In the above embodiment, in the special symbol normal processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42-11, after determining whether or not the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS106), the special symbol display result is displayed at step 063AKS106. It has been explained that when it is determined that it is not determined to be a "big hit" (step 063AKS107; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is to be a "small hit" (step 063AKS118). However, this is only an example, and the process of determining whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" and the process of determining whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" are optional. can be executed in that order. For example, after executing the process for determining whether the special figure display result is a "small hit", when it is not determined that the special figure display result is a "small hit" in the process, the special figure display It may be configured to execute a process of determining whether or not the result is a "big hit". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" by determining whether the special figure display result is a "big hit", "minor win" or "losing" by a single process. It may be configured such that the process of performing and the process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" are executed at the same time.

In the above embodiment, only one game ball among the game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state flows down to the distribution part 063AK18 through the distribution part supply path 063AK8, and the one game ball It has been explained that balls other than game balls are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. However, this is only an example, and a plurality of game balls among the game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state enter the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. You may According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

When configured in this manner, one game ball enters the distribution portion 063AK18, and after passing through one of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21, at least one or more other game balls. may enter the sorting portion 063AK18 and pass through other areas among the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21. In this case, among a plurality of game balls that entered the distribution part 063AK18 in the small winning game state, the game ball that first entered the distribution part 063AK18 passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21. Based on this, the game state after the small hit game state is completed may be controlled. For example, when the game ball that first entered the distribution portion 063AK18 in the small winning game state passes through the big hit area 063AK19, even if other game balls pass through the time saving area 063AK20 or the losing area 063AK21 after the passage, game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19, after the small hit game state ends, the game state may be controlled to the big hit game state.

Alternatively, among a plurality of game balls entering the distribution portion 063AK18 in the small winning game state, the game ball that finally entered the distribution portion 063AK18 passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21. Based on, you may control the game state after the small hit game state is completed. For example, when the game ball that finally entered the distribution part 063AK18 in the small winning game state passes through the big hit area 063AK19, it is assumed that other game balls have passed through the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21 before the passage. Also, based on the fact that the last game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19, it may be controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state.

Alternatively, the priorities are set in advance between the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21, and a plurality of game balls entering the distribution section 063AK18 in the small hit game state are placed in the big hit area 063AK19. , When passing through a plurality of areas out of the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21, based on the passage to the area with the highest priority among the areas through which the game ball passes, the game after the small hit game state is completed You can control the state. For example, the priority of the big hit area 063AK19 may be set higher than the priority of the time saving area 063AK20, and the priority of the time saving area 063AK20 may be set higher than the priority of the losing area 063AK21. In this case, when a plurality of game balls entering the distribution unit 063AK18 pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21 respectively, based on the game balls passing through the jackpot area 063AK19 with the highest priority Then, after the end of the small winning game state, it is controlled to the big winning game state.

In the above-described embodiment, in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small winning game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is performed. described as irreversible. However, this is only an example, in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small winning game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, based on the passage By performing time saving transition control and controlling to the time saving state over a predetermined period after the end of the small winning game state, it may be possible to extend the period controlled to the time saving state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

In this case, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 063AK4 in the time-saving state has passed through the time-saving region 063AK20, an effect is provided to notify that the period controlled to the time-saving state has been extended. It may be configured to be executable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game. For example, as an effect for notifying that the period of time to be controlled to the time saving state has been extended, a time saving number recovery effect for increasing the number of time saving times indicated by the time saving number notification image AK16 may be performed.

In this case, when it is in the time saving state, the suggestion about passing the big hit area 063AK19 and the losing area 063AK21 is made without suggesting the passage of the time saving area 063AK20 (the game ball passes the time saving area 063AK20 without suggesting that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21) Instead of the time-saving passage fanning production, the jackpot area 063AK19 and the time-saving area 063AK20 and loss area 063AK21 (Suggestion that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 (Do) It may be configured such that the normal passage fan effect can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the small hit variation, the game ball entering the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to be open in the small hit game state is a big hit area 063AK19, a time saving area 063AK20, and a losing area 063AK21. , may be configured to be executable during execution of the small hit variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game. For example, if the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" in which the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19, an effect suggesting that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 is changed to the small hit variation. Executed during execution, if the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, an effect suggesting that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 Executed during the execution of the small win variation, and if the type of the small win is "small win E" in which the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21, a performance suggesting that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21 is given to the small win. It may be configured to be executed while the variation is being executed.

In the above-described embodiment, the normal time passing effect and the time saving time passing effect are started in response to the end of the small hit start effect after the end of the small hit fluctuation and the start of opening and closing the big winning mouth. explained as. However, this is only an example, and it may be configured such that the normal time passing performance and the short time passing performance can be started from the execution of the small hit variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game. In particular, when it is configured to be able to execute the normal passing performance during the execution of the small winning variation, the game ball wins the big win in the small winning game state by displaying the normal passing performance image AK1 during the execution of the small winning variation. Based on having passed through the area 063AK19, based on the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state, and the game ball in the small hit game state has passed through the time saving area 063AK20, the small hit game The degree of expectation to be controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the state and the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the losing region 063AK21 in the small winning game state can be suggested to improve the game amusement.

In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, the time saving area passage notification effect of displaying the time saving area passage notification image AK13 showing the message "Lucky!" While executing, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, sorry! is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. However, this is only an example, and the effect that is executed when the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 in the normal state is different from the effect that is executed when the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 in the time saving state. It may be a production of For example, when the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 in the normal state, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 is produced to emit light, and when the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 in the time saving state, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 may not emit light (turn off). Alternatively, when the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 in the normal state, while performing an effect of outputting the notification sound indicating the message "time saving!" An effect may be performed in which the notification voice is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the vehicle passes through.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has been described as having the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21, but this is only an example. The special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured not to include the big hit area 063AK19 and the losing area 063AK21 while the time saving area 063AK20 is provided. With such a configuration, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to include a plurality of time saving areas 063AK20. In this case, in the small winning game state, depending on which of the plurality of time saving areas 063AK20 the game ball has passed, it may be configured to be controlled to the time saving state over a different period after the small winning game state is completed. good. For example, as the time saving region 063AK20, it is configured to have a first time saving region and a second time saving region, and when the game ball passes through the first time saving region in the small hit game state, the small hit game state After the end of the game, the time-saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed five times, and when the game ball passes through the second time-saving area in the small winning game state, after the small winning game state ends. , the time-saving state may be controlled until the variable display is performed once. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which one of the plurality of time saving areas 063AK20 the game ball passes in the small winning game state, and improve the game interest.

In the above-described embodiment, when the low-probability base state as the normal state, based on the game ball has passed through the time-saving region 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the time-saving transition control is performed, the small-hit game state was explained as being controlled to the time-saving state after the end of However, this is only an example, when the high-probability-low base state, based on the game ball has passed through the time-saving region 063AK20 in the small hit game state, time-saving transition control is performed, the small-hit game state may be configured to be controlled to the time saving state after the end of.

Any part or all of the configurations described above can be combined with each other in any way.

Each configuration regarding the characteristic portion 063AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration regarding other characteristic portions. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

For example, the characteristic portion 079SG may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 063AK. Specifically, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 063AK, in the first period such as the normal time passing effect as the predetermined effect, the short time passing effect, the reach effect of super reach A to super reach C, etc. It is possible to display the effect moving image whose progress speed is the first speed on the image display device 5 as the display means, and in the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the progress speed of the effect is the first speed. It is possible to display the effect moving image at a second speed slower than the speed on the image display device 5, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed in both the first period and the second period. , may be configured to be output by the speakers 8L and 8R as sound output means at the same speed. According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the normal time passing effect, the short time passing effect, super reach A ~ as the predetermined effect. Since the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of super reach C does not change between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 063AK)
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 063AK is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko machine 1, etc.)
A state control means (eg, CPU 103, etc.) that can be controlled to a special state (eg, time-saving state, etc.) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state;
It has a special area (for example, time saving area 063AK20), a first state (for example, open state) in which game media (for example, game balls) can easily enter, and a second state in which game media cannot enter or is difficult to enter (for example, closed state, etc.), controllable variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7, etc.),
A production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120 etc.) capable of executing production corresponding to variable display,
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, FIGS. 42-6 and 42) when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result. -8, Figure 42-23, etc.),
The state control means is
In the normal state, when the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, and the variable means is controlled to the first state, when the game medium passes through the special area, based on the passage, the Control from the normal state to the special state (eg, FIGS. 42-23, 42-26, etc.),
In the special state, the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state and the game medium passes through the special area, control based on the passage is performed. (e.g. Figures 42-23, 42-26, etc.),
The effect execution means derives and displays the special display result as a variable display result in the normal state, and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state; When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a different effect can be executed when the game medium passes through the special area. (e.g., FIGS. 42-8, 42-23, 42-24, 42-31, 42-34, 42-36, etc.),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above relating to the characteristic portion 063AK,
The variable means has a specific area (for example, jackpot area 063AK19, etc.),
The state control means can control the advantageous state when the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, FIGS. 42-23, 42-26, etc.),
The effect execution means provides the same effect when the game medium passes through the special area in the special state and when the game medium does not pass through either the specific area or the special area in the special state. (eg, FIGS. 42-8, 42-23, 42-24, 42-31, 42-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above relating to the characteristic portion 063AK,
The effect executing means can execute different effects when the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 42 -8, Figure 42-23, Figure 42-24, Figure 42-31, Figure 42-34, Figure 42-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above relating to the characteristic portion 063AK,
The effect executing means performs different effects when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. 42-8, 42-9, 42-15, 42-16, 42-19, 42-33, 42-35, etc.)
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect according to the state.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above relating to the characteristic portion 063AK,
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, the effect execution means is configured to display the special display result in the special state as a performance suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests being controlled (for example, a time-saving suggestion effect, etc.) during the execution of the variable display (for example, FIGS. 42-8, 42-9, 42-15, 42-16, 42 -19, Figure 42-33, Figure 42-35, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a variety of productions and improve the amusement of the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above relating to the characteristic portion 063AK,
Variable display of the first identification information (e.g., first special game, etc.) and variable display of the second identification information (e.g., second special game, etc.) can be executed,
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the second identification information, the special state is at a higher rate than when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information. is controlled to (for example, FIG. 42-14),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second identification information, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 064AK)
The feature 063AK includes the feature 064AK shown below.
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 064AK,
In a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) advantageous to a player,
A state control means (eg, CPU 103, etc.) that can be controlled to a special state (eg, time saving state, etc.) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state;
It has a specific area (for example, jackpot area 063AK19, etc.) and a special area (for example, time saving area 063AK20, etc.), and a first state (such as an open state) in which a game medium (such as a game ball) can easily enter, and a game A second state in which the medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter (for example, closed state);
A production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120 etc.) capable of executing production corresponding to variable display,
The state control means is
Based on the game medium passing through the specific area, the advantageous state can be controlled (for example, FIGS. 42-23, 42-26, etc.),
Controllable from the normal state to the special state based on the game medium passing through the special area (for example, FIGS. 42-23, 42-26, etc.),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, a normal passing effect, etc.) that suggests passage between the specific area and the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state. Yes (e.g. Figures 42-8, 42-10, 42-31, 42-34, etc.),
When the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the state control means controls the variable means to the special state until the variable means is controlled to the second state. not (e.g. Figures 42-23, 42-26, etc.),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine (1) above relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The production executing means is
In the normal state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the special effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 42-8, 42-10, 42-31, 42-34, etc.),
In the special state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a specific effect that suggests passing through the specific area without suggesting passing through the special area (for example, a time-saving passing effect) ) (e.g., FIGS. 42-8, 42-10, 42-31, 42-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect according to the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine (1) or (2) above relating to the characteristic portion 064AK,
The effect executing means can execute different effects when the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 42 -8, Figure 42-23, Figure 42-24, Figure 42-31, Figure 42-34, Figure 42-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, FIGS. 8, Figures 42-23, etc.),
The effect executing means performs different effects when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. 42-8, 42-9, 42-15, 42-16, 42-19, 42-33, 42-35, etc.)
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect according to the state.

(5) In the gaming machine (3) or (4) above relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, the effect execution means is configured to display the special display result in the special state as a performance suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests being controlled (for example, a time-saving suggestion effect, etc.) during the execution of the variable display (for example, FIGS. 42-8, 42-9, 42-15, 42-16, 42 -19, Figure 42-33, Figure 42-35, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a variety of productions and improve the amusement of the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (3) to (5) above relating to the characteristic portion 064AK,
The effect executing means derives the special display result as a variable display result, and after the variable means is controlled to the first state, the game medium is controlled to the second state. Different effects can be executed when the specific area is passed and when the game medium passes the special area (for example, FIGS. 42-8, 42-23, 42-24, and 42-31 , Figures 42-34, Figures 42-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect that is executed when the variable means is controlled to the second state, thereby improving the game interest.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 065AK)
Characteristic portion 065AK will be described. In the characterizing portion 065AK, descriptions of portions (configuration, processing, etc.) common to the basic description will be omitted.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic explanation, after being controlled to the jackpot game state, it was controllable to the high base state (time saving state). In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the characteristic portion 065AK, in the low base state (normal state), the display result of the variable display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display device 20 is a predetermined "time saving pattern" out of "normal pattern loss". When it becomes, regardless of the display result of the variable display of the special design, it is designed to be controlled to the high base state (time saving state). As a result, since the low base state may be shifted to the high base state without going through the big win game state, it is possible to provide an unexpected game property.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, when the display result of the normal pattern is "time saving pattern", the low base state is shifted to the high base state even during execution of the variable display of the special pattern. It's like

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the characteristic portion 065AK, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of suggesting/notifying the display result of normal symbols or the display result of special symbols. It is possible to suggest/notify that the display result of the normal pattern will be ``normal pattern hit'' or ``short time pattern'' or that the display result of the special pattern will be ``big hit'' by the predetermined performance. With such a predetermined effect, the player can expect to see which display result is suggested/notified, and interest is improved.

(Structure of Characteristic Portion 065AK)
FIG. 43-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the characteristic portion 065AK, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. The pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK differs from the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic explanation shown in FIG. 31 will be mainly described, and the same numbers will be assigned to the same configurations, and the description will be omitted.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic portion 065AK shown in FIG. It is guided to the lower side of the game area via the second route, which is the route on the right side of the frame surrounding 5, and wins (enters) each winning port, or goes to the out port without entering any winning port. It is captured.

Shooting a game ball so that it passes through the first path on the left side of the image display device 5 is called left-handed hitting, and the game ball is shot so that the game ball passes through the second path on the right side of the image display device 5. Letting go is called right-handed hitting. A left-handed game ball can be guided to the left area, and a right-handed game ball can be guided to the right area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the characteristic portion 065AK, the winning ball device 6A is provided in the left area of the game area below the image display device 5 as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic description, while the variable winning The ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are provided in the lower right part of the image display device 5 and in the right area of the game area. Therefore, in a high base state in which the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is open, or a big win game state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning port) is in an open state, the game is started by hitting to the right. In a low base state in which the prize winning opening is not open, the game is played by hitting left.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, passage gates 41 are provided in the left area and the right area, so that even in the low base state in which the game is played by hitting to the left, the normal game can be easily executed. . As a result, in the low base state, it is possible to secure an opportunity to shift to the high base state when the display result of the normal pattern becomes the "time-saving design".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, the general prize winning openings 10 are provided in the left area and the right area. It should be noted that the general prize winning opening 10 may be provided in either one of the areas.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, as the game effect lamps 9, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c and a movable body lamp 9d are provided. The main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, the frame lamp 9b is provided so as to surround the game area, and the attacker lamp 9c is provided for special variable winning on the game board 2. It is provided near the ball device 7 . A movable body 32 is provided above the image display device 5 of the game board 2 , and the movable body lamp 9 is provided on the movable body 32 .

Next, the operation of the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic portion 065AK will be described. FIG. 43-2 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol process processing executed in step S26 of FIG. In the normal symbol process process, when the CPU 103 detects that the gate switch 21 has turned on, that is, the game ball has passed through the gate 41 (step S411; Yes), the gate switch passing process (step S412) is executed. do.

In the gate switch passing process of step S412, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the count value of the gate passing memory counter (gate passing memory number) has reached the maximum value ("4" in this example). If it does not reach the maximum value, the count value of the gate passing storage counter is incremented by 1, the value of the random number for judging the normal pattern, which is a software random number, is extracted and stored in a storage area corresponding to the value of the gate passing storage number. In addition, the lighting number of the normal pattern holding indicator 25C is increased by one. After that, according to the value of the normal symbol process flag, one of the processes of steps S400 to S404 as shown below is executed.

CPU103, in the normal design normal processing of step S400, the state that can start the variation of the normal design (for example, not the state in which the variation display of the normal design is being executed in the normal design display device 20, and the variable winning If the ball device 6B is not in the open state) and the number of gate passing storage is not 0, the value of the random number for determining per normal symbol stored in the storage area and the normal symbol shown in FIG. 43-3 Using a determination table, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop pattern of the normal pattern is to be a winning pattern) and whether or not to set the time saving pattern. If the game state is a low base state (if the time saving flag is not set), using the table shown in FIG. 43-3 (A), if the high base state (if the time saving flag is set example), use the table shown in FIG. 43-3(B). Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to a value ("1" in this example) indicating the normal design variation pattern setting process (step S401).

In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process of step S401, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variable display time (normal symbol variation time) until the normal symbol is variably displayed and derived and displayed in the normal symbol process timer. Start the symbol process timer. Moreover, the control which transmits the command which designates the fluctuation|variation start of a normal design to the production|presentation control board 12 is performed. Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to a value ("2" in this example) corresponding to the normal design variation process (step S402).

The CPU 103 normally executes variable display (variation) of the symbols in the normal symbol variation process of step S402. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the normal design process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, the value of the normal design process flag is updated to the value ("3" in this example) indicating the normal design stop processing (step S403). .

The CPU 103 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 20 in the normal symbol stop time process of step S403. Then, the normal design process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the design determination time (stop design display time) of the normal design to the normal design process timer, and when the timer times out, the stop design of the normal design is a winning design. Check if there is If it is not a winning pattern (if it is a losing pattern), if it is a time saving pattern, a process for starting a time saving state is executed. Also, if it is not a winning design (if it is a losing design), the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to a value ("0" in this example) indicating normal design processing (step S400). If the stop pattern of the normal pattern is a winning pattern, the normal pattern process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal pattern process timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value ("4" in this example) indicating the normal electric accessary product open process (step S404).

The CPU 103 puts the variable winning ball device (ordinary electric accessory) 6B into the open state in the normal electric accessory opening process of step S404. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, and the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value ("0" in this example) indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S400).

FIG. 43-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table in which determination values relating to normal symbol display results for determining normal symbol display results are set in the normal symbol normal process of step S400. In this embodiment, the normal symbol determination random number can take a range of 1 to 250, but the normal symbol determination table has a determination value that is compared with the normal symbol determination random number.

FIG. 43-3(A) shows a normal symbol determination table used in the low base state. As shown in FIG. 43-3(A), in the low base state, when the random number for normal design determination is 1 or 2, it is determined as a hit (normal design hit). When it is determined that the normal game hits, the variable winning ball device 6A is in an open state for 5 seconds. If the normal symbol determination random number is 3 to 230, it is determined to be a loss (normal pattern loss). When it is determined that the normal game is lost, the variable winning ball device 6A does not enter the open state. In the case of a normal pattern hit or a normal pattern loss, the normal pattern fluctuation time is 10 seconds, and the pattern fixing time is 0.5 seconds.

Also, when the random number for normal symbol determination is 231 to 240, it is determined to be a loss (time reduction symbol A). When the time saving pattern A is determined, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened, but is controlled to a high base state (time saving state). In the case of the time saving pattern A, the variation time of the normal pattern is 10 seconds, and the pattern fixing time is 10 seconds.

Also, when the random number value for normal symbol determination is 241 to 250, it is determined to be a loss (time reduction symbol B). When the time saving pattern B is determined, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened, but is controlled to a high base state (time saving state). In the case of the time saving pattern B, the variation time of the normal pattern is 15 seconds, and the pattern fixing time is 10 seconds.

In this way, the time saving pattern is part of the loss (normal pattern loss), and a part of the determination value corresponding to the normal pattern loss is assigned to the time saving pattern.

In addition, in the normal design normal processing of step S400, after performing the determination (decision) of whether or not the normal design hit, it is determined whether or not to be the time-saving design. By doing so, when it is determined to be a normal pattern and a time saving pattern due to a random number error or the like, it is possible to give priority to the normal pattern. In addition, in the low base state, it is more advantageous for the player to be a time-saving pattern than to be a normal pattern, so it is determined whether or not to be a time-saving pattern first. You may make it determine whether it is per figure.

In this embodiment, two types of time-saving patterns are provided, and the high-base state period (end condition, time-saving number of times) differs between the time-saving pattern A and the time-saving pattern B. , As shown in FIG. 43-4 (A), when the display result of the normal pattern in the low base state becomes "time saving pattern A", the high base state continues until the special pattern variation is executed 50 times (time saving number of times is 50 times). Further, when the display result of the normal pattern becomes "time saving pattern B" in the low base state, the high base state continues until the special pattern is changed 100 times (the number of times of time saving becomes 100 times). Therefore, the time saving pattern B is more advantageous for the player than the time saving pattern A.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether or not to use a time-saving design in the case of a general pattern loss, and the type of time-saving design are determined by a random number value for normal design determination, but different random numbers are used. You may make it determine whether it is set as a time-saving design, and the kind of time-saving design. Also, the number of types of time saving patterns is not limited to two types, and may be one type or three or more types. When there is only one type of time-saving design, determination processing of the display result is facilitated by determining whether or not to use the time-saving design with the random number value for normal design determination.

As shown in FIG. 43-3 (A), the pattern confirmation time for the normal pattern per and normal pattern loss is 0.5 seconds, while the pattern confirmation time for the time saving pattern is as long as 10 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the pattern confirmation time of the time saving pattern, in the pattern confirmation time, it is possible to transfer to a high base state (time saving state) or to execute notification of hitting to the right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or reduce the disadvantage of the player due to a sudden shift to the high base state due to lack of preparation. Incidentally, the pattern fixing time may be fixed regardless of the display result.

In addition, the variation time is 15 seconds in the case of the time saving pattern B, and the variation time in the case of other display results is 10 seconds. As a result, the display result can be predicted by the variation time of the normal symbol. Note that the variation time may be determined according to the display result, or the variation time for all display results may be the same (for example, 10 seconds).

FIG. 43-3(B) shows a normal symbol determination table used in the high base state. As shown in FIG. 43-3 (B), in the high base state, when the normal symbol determination random number is 1 to 229, it is determined as a hit (normal pattern hit). When it is determined to be a normal game hit, the variable winning ball device 6A is in an open state for 7.5 seconds. When the normal symbol determination random number value is 230, it is determined as a loss (normal pattern loss). When the normal symbol determination random number is 231 to 240, it is determined to be a loss (time reduction symbol A). When the normal symbol determination random number is 241 to 250, it is determined to be a loss (time reduction symbol B). In the high base state, even if it becomes a time saving pattern (time saving pattern A, B), as shown in FIG. It no longer affects the high base state while inside. That is, in the high base state, the time saving pattern is treated the same as the normal pattern loss. When it is determined that the normal game is lost, the variable winning ball device 6A does not enter the open state.

In the case of the high base state, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is 1.5 seconds, and the symbol fixation time is 0.5 seconds, regardless of the display result. As a result, it is possible to quickly repeat the variation of the normal symbol.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43-3, the variation time is determined according to the display result of the normal design, but the variation time (variation pattern) of the normal design is based on the determined display result of the normal design. may be determined. In this case, when the display result is a lost normal pattern, the determination ratio of the variable time may differ depending on whether or not the pattern is a time-saving pattern. By doing so, it is possible to suggest whether or not the time-saving design will be obtained by the variation time of the normal design.

As shown in FIGS. 43-3 (A) and (B), the pattern confirmation time of the time saving pattern in the high base state is 0.5 seconds, while the pattern confirmation time of the time saving pattern in the low base state is 10 seconds longer. In this way, by lengthening the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern in the low base state, in the pattern fixing time, the transition to the high base state (time saving state) and the notification of hitting to the right are executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent and reduce the disadvantage of the player due to lack of preparation due to sudden transition to the high base state. Also, in the high base state, even if the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern, such notification is not necessary, so by shortening the pattern fixing time, the variation of the next normal pattern can be quickly executed. can be done. Incidentally, the pattern fixing time may be fixed regardless of the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, even after the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit and the big win game state is controlled, the time saving state is controlled. As shown in FIG. 43-5(A), "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided as jackpot types when the display result of the first special figure is a jackpot, and "jackpot A" is a jackpot. After entering the game state, the high base state continues until the variation of the special symbol is executed 50 times (the number of times of time saving becomes 50 times), and after entering the big win game state of "big win B", 100 times. The high base state continues until the variation of the special symbol is executed (the number of times of time saving becomes 100 times). In addition, it is basically at the time of low base that the display result of the first special figure becomes a big hit. In addition, as shown in FIG. 43-5(B), "jackpot C" is provided as a jackpot type when the display result of the second special figure is a jackpot. After that, the high base state continues until the variation of the special symbol is executed 100 times (the number of times of time saving becomes 100 times). In addition, it is basically at the time of high base that the display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit.

Thus, in this embodiment, the condition for ending the high base state (time saving state) (the number of times of time saving) is that the display result of the second special figure is a big hit rather than the case where the display result of the first special figure is a big hit. It is more advantageous if it becomes. As a result, the normal pattern becomes the time-saving pattern and the transition to the high base state does not disadvantage the player, so that the disappointment of the player can be suppressed. In addition, when the high base state is reached, the end condition of the high base state (time-saving state) is more advantageous than the low base state when a big hit is achieved. can be done.

In addition, in the characteristic part 065AK, after being controlled to the jackpot game state, at least it should be controlled to the time saving state, and the number of rounds of "jackpot A" to "jackpot C" and the presence or absence of variable probability control are optional. good. Also, the jackpot types and the number of time saving times shown in FIG. 43-5 are examples, and the number of jackpot types may be more or less than in FIG.

FIG. 43-6 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol stop time processing in step S403 of FIG. 43-2. In the normal symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the normal symbol fixed display flag is set (step 065AKS001). The normal symbols are displayed until the symbol fixing time elapses after the display result is derived and displayed. That is, the symbol fixing time can be said to be a period from when the display result of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next normal symbol variation is started. When it is the pattern confirmation time, the general pattern confirmation display flag is set.

If the normal pattern fixed display flag is not set (step 065AKS001; No), the display result of the normal pattern (fixed normal pattern) is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20 (step 065AKS002), and the fluctuation of the normal pattern is stopped. The setting for transmitting the normal figure stop designation|designated command to the production|presentation control board 12 to designate is performed (step 065AKS003). At step 065AKS003, the normal pattern stop designation command is transmitted according to the display result so that the effect control board 12 can specify the display result of the normal pattern. Then, set the game state (high base state, low base state) and the pattern confirmation period (see FIG. 43-3) according to the normal pattern display result (step 065AKS004), set the normal pattern fixed display flag to ON state (step 065AKS005). After that, the process at the time of normal design stop is terminated.

If the normal pattern fixed display flag is set (step 065AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fixed period has passed (step 065AKS011). In the process of step 065AKS011, for example, it is determined whether or not the timer value corresponding to the symbol fixing period set in step 065AKS004 is subtracted to zero. If the design fixing period has not passed (step 065AKS011; No), the normal design stop processing is terminated.

If the design fixing period has passed (step 065AKS011; Yes), it is determined whether or not the display result is a normal pattern (step 065AKS012). When the display result is a normal pattern hit (step 065AKS012; Yes), the normal pattern process timer is set to the normal electric accessory opening time (step 065AKS013), and the value of the normal pattern process flag is set to the normal electric accessory opening. It is updated to a value indicating intermediate processing (for example, "4") (step 065AKS014), and the normal design stop time processing is terminated.

When the display result is not a normal pattern (step 065AKS012; No), it is determined whether or not the display result is a time saving pattern (step 065AKS015). If the display result is the time saving pattern (step 065AKS015; Yes), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set to determine whether or not the high base state is established (step 065AKS016). If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS016; No), for example, by checking the value of the special figure process flag, it is determined whether or not it is in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS017). In this embodiment, in the case of the jackpot game state, since it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, the shift to the time saving state based on the time saving pattern is not performed. there is It should be noted that, during the fluctuation of the special pattern, if the display result of the fluctuation is a big hit, it is controlled to the time saving state after the big hit game state based on the big hit is finished, so that it has become a time saving pattern. You may not perform the transition to the time-saving state based on.

If it is not a big hit game state (step 065AKS017; No), the time saving flag is set to ON state (step 065AKS018), and the time saving number of times corresponding to the time saving pattern is set to the time saving number counter (see FIG. 43-4 (A)) (Step 065AKS019). Thereby, it can be made to shift to a high base state (time saving state). Also, according to the transition to the time saving state, the setting for transmitting the game state designation command designating the time saving state to the effect control board 12 is performed (step 065AKS020).

If the display result is not a time-saving pattern but a normal pattern losing (step 065AKS015; No), if it is in a high base state (step 065AKS016; Yes), if it is in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; Yes), or step 065AKS020 After executing the process, the value of the normal design process flag is updated to a value (for example, "0") indicating normal design normal processing (step 065AKS021), and the normal design stop time processing is terminated.

FIG. 43-7 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control process (step S76) shown in FIG. 38 of the characteristic portion 065AK. In the production control process processing of the characteristic part 065AK, in addition to the production control process processing of the basic explanation shown in FIG. Notification setting processing (step 065AKS2) is executed.

Figure 43-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal figure interlocking effect control process (step 065AKS1) executed in the effect control process process of Figure 43-7. The general pattern interlocking production is a production that suggests and informs the display result of the normal pattern in conjunction with the execution of the variation of the normal pattern. The normal figure interlocking production is included in the predetermined production. In the general figure interlocking production control process, control for executing the general figure interlocking production is performed.

In the normal pattern interlocking effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the normal pattern interlocking effect execution flag is set (step 065AKS031). The general pattern interlocking effect execution flag is set when execution of the general pattern interlocking effect is started as a predetermined effect. When the normal figure interlocking production execution flag is not set (step 065AKS031; No), it is checked whether the special figure interlocking production execution flag is set (step 065AKS032). The special figure interlocking effect running flag is set when execution of the special figure interlocking effect is started. In this embodiment, it is also possible to execute a special symbol interlocking effect that suggests and notifies the display result of the special symbol in conjunction with the execution of the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) as the predetermined effect. The special figure interlocking production will be described later. If the special figure interlocking effect execution flag is set (step 065AKS032; Yes), that is, if the special figure interlocking effect is being executed as the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect (general figure interlocking effect) is newly executed. Since it does not, it ends the normal figure interlocking effect control processing.

When the special figure interlocking effect execution flag is not set at step 065AKS032 (step 065AKS032; No), it is checked whether or not the normal symbol variation start designation command is received (step 065AKS051). When the normal symbol variation start designation command is not received (step 065AKS051; No), the normal symbol interlocking effect control process is terminated.

When the normal symbol variation start designation command is set (step 065AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the sub time saving flag is on, thereby determining whether it is in a high base state. (Step 065AKS052). If it is in the high base state (step 065AKS052; Yes), the normal pattern fluctuation frequency is high and the display result is almost a normal pattern. exit.

If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS052; No), it is checked whether it is in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053). Whether or not the jackpot gaming state is confirmed by the value of the effect control process flag, for example. In that case, when the value of the production control process flag is 6 or more, it is assumed that the game state is a big hit. In the case of the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; Yes), since the performance during the jackpot is not hindered and the control is performed to the high base state after the jackpot game state ends, the normal figure interlocking performance is not executed. The figure-linked effect control process is terminated.

If it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; No), it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super reach is being executed (step 065AKS056). Here, it is the time when the variation is being executed according to the variation pattern with super reach, and the determination may be made based on whether or not the elapsed time from the start of variation exceeds the start timing of super reach. When the ready-to-win effect of super reach is being executed (step 065AKS056; Yes), the normal-to-normal pattern interlocking effect control processing is terminated without executing the normal to interlocking effect in order to draw attention to the ready-to-win effect of super reach. It should be noted that even during the execution of effects other than the ready-to-win effect of super reach (announcement effect on the image display device 5, action effect of the movable body 32, effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, etc.), even if the normal figure interlocking effect is not executed. good.

If the ready-to-win effect of super reach is not being executed (step 065AKS056; No), a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to the effect mode in the case of executing or not executing the normal figure interlocking effect is determined (step 065AKS059). In step 065AKS059, as shown in FIG. 43-8(B), according to the display result of the normal design specified from the normal design fluctuation start designation command, the execution presence or absence of the normal pattern interlocking effect and the predetermined effect pattern are determined.

FIG. 43-8(C) is a diagram showing a predetermined effect pattern. The predetermined performance is a performance of suggesting/announcing the display result of the normal symbols or the display result of the special symbols, the predetermined performance pattern SP1 is a pattern suggesting that both the normal symbols and the special symbols are lost, and the predetermined performance pattern SP2. is a pattern for notifying that the pattern will be "normal", and the predetermined effect pattern SP3 is a pattern for notifying that it will be a "time saving pattern". Predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5 are patterns suggesting that the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol, and the degree of expectation that the predetermined performance pattern SP5 will result in a big hit is higher than that of the predetermined performance pattern SP4. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the predetermined effects of all the predetermined effect patterns are started in a similar manner, and after that, the result corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern is notified. Therefore, even if it is the predetermined effect pattern SP1 suggesting that the game will be lost, it can be expected that another predetermined effect pattern will be used when the effect is started.

In addition, after suggesting the display result or the display result of the special symbol, a false pattern may be provided to suggest that the game will be lost. For example, after executing an effect suggesting that the display result of the normal pattern will be a time-saving pattern by displaying an image such as "Maybe it will be a time-saving pattern?" may be provided.

The predetermined production pattern corresponding to the general pattern interlocking production is SP1 to SP3, and in step 065AKS059, at the determined ratio as shown in FIG. is determined. As shown in FIG. 43-8 (B), when the display result of the normal pattern (normal pattern display result) is "normal pattern hit", the ratio of being determined to the predetermined production pattern SP2 is high, "normal pattern If it is "losing", the ratio of being determined to the predetermined production pattern SP1 is high, and if it is "time saving pattern A" or "time saving pattern B", especially if it is "time saving pattern B" with a large number of time saving times , the ratio of determination to the predetermined effect pattern SP3 is high. As a result, it is possible to suggest/notify the general pattern display result by the general pattern interlocking production (predetermined production). It should be noted that the determination ratio shown in FIG. 43-8 (B) is an example, and by the general pattern interlocking production (predetermined production), any ratio may be used as long as the general pattern display result can be suggested and notified. In addition, as the predetermined effect pattern of the universal figure interlocking effect, a predetermined effect pattern other than the predetermined effect patterns SP1 to SP3 may be provided.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the normal pattern interlocking effect (step 065AKS064). When it is not decided to execute the normal pattern interlocking effect (step 065AKS064; No), the normal pattern interlocking effect control process is terminated.

If it is determined to execute the general pattern interlocking effect (step 065AKS064; Yes), the general pattern interlocking effect timer is set to the execution time of the general pattern interlocking effect according to the determination result (predetermined effect pattern) in step 065AKS059 (step 065AKS078). Then, based on the performance control data corresponding to the predetermined performance pattern, etc., the normal pattern interlocking performance (predetermined performance) is started (step 065AKS079). Then, in response to the start of the general pattern interlocking effect, the general pattern interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS080), and the general pattern interlocking effect control process is terminated.

If the general pattern interlocking effect running flag is set (step 065AKS031; No), the value of the general pattern interlocking effect timer is subtracted by 1 (step 065AKS034), and whether the value of the general pattern interlocking effect timer has become 0 It is determined whether or not (step 065AKS035). If the value of the general pattern interlocking production timer is not 0 (step 065AKS035; No), the general pattern interlocking production control process is terminated.

When the value of the general pattern interlocking production timer becomes 0 (step 065AKS035; Yes), the general pattern interlocking production is terminated (step 065AKS036), and the general pattern interlocking production execution flag is reset to the off state (step 065AKS037 ), end the normal figure interlocking production control process.

FIG. 43-9(A) is a flowchart showing an example of a special figure interlocking effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a special figure interlocking effect as a predetermined effect and a predetermined effect pattern in the case of execution. The special figure interlocking effect determination process is executed within the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. 43-7 before starting the variation of the decoration pattern. In the special figure interlocking effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the normal figure interlocking effect execution flag is set (step 065AKS091). When the general pattern interlocking effect execution flag is set (step 065AKS091; Yes), that is, when the normal pattern interlocking effect is being executed as a predetermined effect, a new predetermined effect (special pattern interlocking effect) is executed. Since it does not do, it ends special figure interlocking production decision processing. When the normal figure interlocking effect execution flag is not set (step 065AKS091; No), it is checked whether it is a high base state by determining whether the sub time saving flag is on state (step 065AKS092 ). In the case of the high base state (step 065AKS092; Yes), the average special figure fluctuation time is short, and the period for executing the special figure interlocking production cannot be secured, so the special figure interlocking production is not executed, so the special figure interlocking Terminate the effect determination process.

In addition, since the special figure interlocking performance determination process is a process executed when the variation of the decoration pattern is started, the special figure interlocking performance is not determined and executed in the case of the big win game state or the small win game state. If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS092; No), it is checked whether or not the variation to be started this time is a variation pattern that results in a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093). It should be noted that whether or not it is a super reach loss or a super reach big hit variation pattern can be specifically determined by confirming the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. If the variation pattern is not super reach or super reach big hit (step 065AKS093; No), the special figure interlocking effect determination process is terminated. Thus, in this embodiment, when it is not a variation pattern with super reach, the special figure interlocking effect is not executed, but even when it is not a variation pattern with super reach, a special figure interlocking at a predetermined rate An effect (for example, a predetermined effect of the predetermined effect pattern SP1) may be executed.

If the variation pattern is super reach loss or super reach big hit (step 065AKS093; Yes), a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to whether or not the special figure interlocking effect is executed and the effect mode in the case of execution is determined (step 065AKS094). In step 065AKS094, as shown in FIG. 43-9(B), execution/non-execution of a special figure interlocking effect and a predetermined effect pattern are determined according to the display result of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

The predetermined effect patterns corresponding to the special figure interlocking effect are SP1, SP4, and SP5, and in step 065AKS094, the execution presence or absence of the special figure interlocking effect and the predetermined effect pattern SP1 are determined at a determined ratio as shown in FIG. 43-9(B). , SP4, or SP5. As shown in FIG. 43-9 (B), when the special figure display result is "big hit", the ratio of being determined to the predetermined effect pattern SP5 is high, and when the special figure display result is "losing" , the ratio of determination to the predetermined effect pattern SP4 is high. As a result, the degree of expectation (reliability) for a big hit is higher in the predetermined effect pattern SP5 than in the predetermined effect pattern SP4. Predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5 are determined when they are variation patterns accompanied by super reach, so that super reach can be notified when the special figure interlocking performance of these predetermined performance patterns is executed. Also, with the determination ratio shown in FIG. 43-9, there is a possibility that a big hit will occur even in the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP1, so an unexpected effect can be executed. The determination ratio shown in FIG. 43-9 (B) is an example, and the special figure interlocking production (predetermined production) may be any ratio as long as it can suggest and notify the special figure display result. Further, as the predetermined effect pattern of the special figure interlocking effect, a predetermined effect pattern other than the predetermined effect patterns SP1, SP4 and SP5 may be provided.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is determined not to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095). When it is decided not to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095; Yes), the special figure interlocking effect determination process is terminated. When it is determined to execute the special figure interlocking production (step 065AKS095; No), the setting for executing the special figure interlocking production corresponding to the determined predetermined production pattern is performed (step 065AKS096). At step 065AKS096, for example, effect control data corresponding to a predetermined effect pattern is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as use data. Then, the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set to ON state (step 065AKS097), and the special figure interlocking effect determination process is terminated.

FIG. 43-10 is a flow chart showing an example of time saving notification setting processing (step 065AKS2) executed in the effect control process processing of FIG. 43-7. The time-saving notification setting process is a process for notifying the shift to the time-saving state when the control is performed to the high base state (time-saving state) corresponding to the display result of the normal pattern becoming the time-saving design. .

In the time reduction notification setting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a general pattern stop designation command that designates that the time reduction design has stopped (step 065AKS101). If the normal pattern stop specification command specifying that the time saving pattern has stopped is not received (step 065AKS101; No), the time saving notification setting process is terminated.

If the normal pattern stop designation command that designates that the time saving pattern has stopped is received (step 065AKS101; Yes), by determining whether the sub time saving flag is on or not, whether it is a high base state Confirm whether or not (step 065AKS102). If it is in the high base state (step 065AKS102; Yes), the control based on the time saving pattern is not executed, so the time saving notification setting process is terminated.

When not in a high base state (step 065AKS102; No), a sub time-saving flag is set to ON state (step 065AKS103). It should be noted that the sub time-saving flag is also set to the ON state when the jackpot game state ends and the time-saving state is controlled.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the player is in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS104). If it is in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS104; Yes), since it is controlled to the time saving state after the jackpot game state, the time saving notification setting process is terminated without notifying that it has shifted to the time saving state.

If it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS104; No), a right hitting display is displayed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 to instruct right hitting (step 065AKS105).

Then, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is being executed (step 065AKS106). If the reach effect of super reach is not being executed (step 065AKS106; No), setting for starting notification of transition to time saving state (time saving transition notification) and notification of hitting to the right (right hitting notification) (step 065AKS107).

Also, when the ready-to-win effect of super-reach is being executed (step 065AKS106; Yes), setting is made to start right-handed notification at the start of the next variation (step 065AKS108). Thus, in this embodiment, when the reach effect of super reach is being executed, in order to draw attention to the reach effect of super reach, the time-saving transition notification and hitting to the right are not executed, and hitting to the right in the next variation It is designed to perform notification. By doing so, it is possible to prevent impeding the reach effect of the super reach. It should be noted that even during the execution of effects other than the reach effect of super reach (announcement effect in the image display device 5, action effect of the movable body 32, effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, etc.), the time-saving transition notification and right-handed notification should not be executed. can be Moreover, although it may have already transitioned to a time saving state at the time of the next fluctuation start, you may make it perform time saving transition alerting|reporting in the next fluctuation|variation.

In addition, although the time-saving transition notification and the right-handed notification are not executed, the right-handed display is displayed, so it can be shown that the transition to the time-saving state is made at least, so the player cannot grasp the game state, which is disadvantageous. can be reduced.

After executing the process of step 065AKS107 or step 065AKS108, the time reduction notification setting process is terminated.

FIG. 43-11 is a timing chart showing the contents of the presentation at the time of transition to time saving. In FIG. 43-11, ON of "special symbol variation" indicates that the special symbol is fluctuating, and OFF indicates that the special symbol is stopped. ON of "normal pattern fluctuation" indicates that the normal pattern is fluctuating, and OFF indicates that the normal pattern is stopped. ON of the "right hitting image" indicates that the right hitting image is displayed on the image display device 5, and OFF indicates that the right hitting image is not displayed.

FIG. 43-11(A) is a timing chart when the ready-to-win effect of super-reach is not executed when the time saving symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 43-11(A), when the time-saving design stops as a result of displaying the normal design during the variation of the special design, the time-saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are executed. In addition, a right hitting image is displayed at the timing when the time saving pattern stops. Then, the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern elapses, and the time saving control is started when the fluctuation of the normal pattern is started next time. In this way, in the design determination time of the time saving pattern before the time saving control is actually started, by executing the time saving transition notification and the right hitting notification, even if it shifts to the time saving state during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving It is possible to appropriately notify that the state is changed and that the game is played by hitting to the right.

FIG. 43-11(B) is a timing chart when the ready-to-win effect of super-reach is not executed when the time-saving symbols are stopped. As shown in FIG. 43-11 (B), when the special symbol is changed to super reach, and the time reduction symbol stops as a result of normal symbol display during the reach production of super reach, at the timing when the time reduction symbol stops Although the hitting-to-the-right image is displayed, the time-saving transition notification and hitting-to-the-right notification are not executed. Then, at the start of the next fluctuation after the end of the fluctuation accompanied by super reach, the right-handed information is executed. It should be noted that, if the next fluctuation start timing is after the pattern confirmation time of the time saving pattern, it is already in the time saving state, so in this embodiment, when the time saving pattern stops during the reach production of super reach, the next time It is designed not to notify time reduction at the start of fluctuation. On the other hand, you may make it perform time reduction alert|reporting at the time of the next fluctuation|variation start. For example, as shown in FIG. 43-11(B), if the time-saving design fixed time elapses after the start of the next fluctuation, the time-saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation.

In addition, when the time saving design stops, the end timing of the fluctuation of the special design being executed is before the time saving design design confirmation time elapses, which is the timing when the time saving control is actually started, this special design Since there is no need to execute time-saving transition notification or right-handed notification in a hurry during the fluctuation of the next special pattern, after the start of the next special pattern fluctuation may be executed.

Next, an example of the performance operation of the characteristic portion 065AK will be described. FIGS. 43-12 to 43-14 show an example of the effect operation of the predetermined effect of the characteristic portion 065AK. FIG. 43-12(A) shows, with downward arrows, that the decorative patterns are being varied in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. there is At the upper left of the image display device 5, small patterns that are always visible to the player are also varied. In addition, a predetermined rendering area 65AK11 is provided in the central lower portion of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, predetermined effects (general figure interlocking effect, special figure interlocking effect) are executed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Note that the predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be always displayed on the image display device 5, or may be displayed when a predetermined effect is executed. For example, the predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be deleted in a high base state or a jackpot game state in which a predetermined effect is not executed.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 43-12(B), the effect image is scroll-displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started. In FIG. 43-12(B), a downward arrow indicates that the effect image is scrolled. After that, an effect result corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern is notified.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP1, as shown in FIG. 43-12(C), an effect image of "x" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the game is stopped. As a result, it is informed that the predetermined effect fails and the expectation that the display result of the normal symbol or the special symbol is a hit is low.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP2, as shown in FIG. 43-12(D), the effect image of "○" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the game is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful and that the normal symbol is a hit.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP4, as shown in FIG. 43-12(E), the effect image of the musical note is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the game stops. As a result, it is informed that the predetermined performance is successful, that the special symbol is expected to be a big hit, that the super reach is executed, and the like.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP5, as shown in FIG. 43-12(F), the effect image of characters "Heat" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the game is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful, that the degree of expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit is higher, that super reach is executed, and the like.

In the case of the predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5, for example, as shown in FIGS. 43-12 (E) and (F), decorative patterns with the same numbers are stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a ready-to-win pattern is displayed. After that, the effect result of the predetermined effect (the effect image of the musical note and the character "heat") is displayed. By doing so, when the predetermined effect is executed during the ready-to-win state, it is possible to make the player expect that the game will become a super ready-to-win state.

In addition, the predetermined production patterns SP1 and SP2 are executed as a normal figure interlocking production, and the predetermined production patterns SP1, SP4 and SP5 are executed as a special figure interlocking production. Since the general pattern interlocking effect is executed regardless of the fluctuation of the special pattern (decorative pattern), it can be executed at any timing during the fluctuation of the special pattern (decorative pattern).

FIG. 43-13 is an example of an effect operation when a predetermined effect (general figure interlocking effect) of the predetermined effect pattern SP3 is executed. FIG. 43-13(A) shows that the decorative design is varied in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At the upper left of the image display device 5, small patterns that are always visible to the player are also varied. In addition, a predetermined rendering area 65AK11 is provided in the central lower portion of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 43-13(B), the effect image is scroll-displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 43-13(C), the effect image of "hour" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the game is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect succeeds and the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol.

When the time saving pattern stops, as shown in FIG. 43-13 (D), a right hitting display for instructing right hitting is displayed in the lower right part of the image display device 5, and the central part of the image display device 5 "Time saving plunge !” is displayed, and time-saving transition notification is executed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 . Here, "100 times" is displayed corresponding to the time saving pattern B.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43-13(E), right-handed notification is executed by displaying an image of characters "Aim right!" Then, as shown in FIG. 43-13(F), the image of the notification of hitting to the right is erased, and the notification of hitting to the right ends. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also erased from the predetermined effect area 65AK11. As described above, in this embodiment, even when the special symbols (decorative symbols) are fluctuating, when the display result of the normal symbols becomes the time-saving design, the game shifts to the time-saving state. In that case, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of notifying that the time saving pattern stops, and time saving transition notification and right hitting notification as shown in FIGS. 43-13 (D) and (E) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the transition to the time saving state. As a result, the player can continue the game without being confused.

FIG. 43-14 is an example of the effect operation when the predetermined effect (normal figure interlocking effect) of the predetermined effect pattern SP3 is executed during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach. In FIG. 43-14(A), the decorative design showing the number "7" is stopped in the left and right decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the decorative design is changed in the middle decorative design display area 5C. It shows that it is a reach. At the upper left of the image display device 5, small patterns that are always visible to the player are also varied. In addition, a predetermined rendering area 65AK11 is provided in the central lower portion of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 43-14(B), the effect image is scroll-displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started. At this time, the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is started on the image display device 5 .

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 43-14(C), the effect image of "hour" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the game is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect succeeds and the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol.

When the time saving pattern stops during the super reach production, as shown in FIG. The time-saving transition notification and the right-handed notification are not executed, and the reach performance of super reach is continuously executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43-14(E), the decoration design showing the number "6" stops in the middle decoration design display area 5C, resulting in a loss. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also erased from the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Then, as shown in FIG. 43-14(F), as the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, an image of characters "Aim right!" is executed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 . Here, "49 times" is displayed corresponding to the time saving pattern A. In addition, here, the number of times of time saving is subtracted from 50 times to 49 times in accordance with the shift to the time saving state during the previous change and one change being digested.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the display result of the normal pattern becomes the time saving pattern during the reach production of super reach, the reach production of super reach is given priority without executing the time saving shift notification or the hitting right hand notification. is executed. When a big win is achieved as a result of super reach, the game is controlled to the time saving state after the big win game state corresponding to the big win. Therefore, even if the time reduction transition notification is executed during the reach performance of super reach, the notification may be wasted or the performance may be disappointing, so the reach performance of super reach is given priority. Then, when the display result is lost, right-handed information is executed at the time of the next fluctuation, so that it is possible to suitably inform that the shift to the time-saving state or right-handed hitting is performed. In addition, when the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving design during the reach production of the super reach, and the display result of the fluctuation accompanying the super reach becomes a big hit, the display result of the normal design becomes a time-saving design. Corresponding information (time-saving transition information, right-handed information) may not be executed, and information corresponding to the fact that the display result of the normal symbol has become a time-saving symbol at the first fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game state may be executed.

(Modified example of characteristic part 065AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. The processing contents, determination ratios, and various effects determination methods of the flowcharts shown in the above embodiments and modifications are examples, and the same effects as those in the above embodiments can be obtained, and the effects shown in the above embodiments can be achieved. It is optional as long as it can be suitably executed. Also, the example of the production operation shown in the above embodiment is an example, and can be changed as appropriate if the same production effect can be achieved. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate.

In the case where the display result of the special pattern is read in advance and the pre-reading notice performance is executed, the execution of the pre-reading notice performance may be restricted when the display result of the normal pattern is the time saving pattern. For example, when the display result of the normal pattern becomes the time saving pattern, the pre-reading notice effect may not be executed until the time saving pattern stops and shifts to the time saving state. In addition, the display result of the normal pattern before the start of the fluctuation is read in advance, and if there is reserved data of the normal pattern that will be the time-saving pattern, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the display result of the special pattern may be limited. good. By doing so, by changing the game state after executing the pre-reading notice effect, the variation pattern changes between the time of pre-reading and the time of actual fluctuation execution, and is consistent with the content of the pre-reading notice effect. You can prevent it from disappearing.

In addition to the jackpot signal (output during the jackpot), the special prize signal (output during the jackpot and during time saving), and the time saving signal (output only during time saving) as external output signals to the hall computer and data display machine good too.

In the above-described embodiment, when the display result of the normal pattern becomes the time-saving pattern in the jackpot game state, the control to the time-saving state is not performed. In the corresponding jackpot game state, it may be controlled to the time saving state based on the time saving pattern. In this case, the order is the start of the big win game state→the start of the time saving control based on the time saving pattern→the end of the big win game state, and the base changes before and after the big win game state. Therefore, the setting of the number of time reductions based on the control to the big win game state may be performed at the start of variation after the end of the big win game state. For example, if the number of times of time saving in the case of a big win in the low base state is 50 times or 100 times, and if the number of times of time saving in the case of a big win in the high base state is 100 times, the number of times of time saving in the big win game state is reduced. When the symbols stop, the number of times of time saving after the end of the jackpot game state is set to 100 times. By setting the number of time reductions at the start of variation after the end of the big win game state, the state transition can be preferably performed even if the game state changes during the big win. In addition, regardless of the game state when the jackpot game state is reached, the number of times of time saving may be constant, or the number of times of time saving may be determined at a constant rate.

In the above-described embodiment, the predetermined effect (general pattern interlocking effect, special symbol interlocking effect) for suggesting and announcing the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol is displayed by scrolling the effect image in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. (FIGS. 43-12 to 43-14), but any effect may be used as long as it can suggest/inform the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol. Further, the predetermined effect may be at least an effect indicating whether or not the normal symbol becomes a time saving symbol, or suggesting/notifying the display result of the special symbol.

Also, in the above embodiment, when the display result of the normal pattern is the time saving pattern in the high base state, the number of time saving times is not updated, but the display result of the normal pattern is the time saving pattern in the high base state. When it becomes, you may make it update and add the number of times of shortening of working hours. Also, if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in the low base state, and if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in the high base state, the number of times of working hours and the number of times of working hours will be determined differently. can be

In the above embodiment, the execution of time-saving transition notification and right-handed notification was restricted in a predetermined case, such as during the reach performance of super reach, but the time-saving pattern was displayed regardless of the content of the performance during execution. When shifting to the time saving state according to the situation, time saving shift information and right hitting information may be executed. For example, when the time-saving transition notification and the right-handed notification are executed in a display means different from the image display device 5, the time-saving transition notification and the right-handed notification are executed regardless of the effect content in the image display device 5. good.

(Means related to characteristic part 065AK)
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 065AK is
Special identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and based on the result of the variable display of the special identification information becoming a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol), special variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 ( A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 65AK1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) in which game media are likely to enter the big winning opening),
The normal identification information (for example, normal pattern) is variably displayed, and when the variable display result of the normal identification information becomes a predetermined result (for example, normal pattern), normal variable means (for example, variable winning ball device 6B (first 2 start winning opening))) variable control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S404) to change to a predetermined state (for example, open state) where game media can easily enter;
State control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 065AKS018) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state) in which the normal variable means is more likely to change to the predetermined state than the normal state,
A production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The state control means is controllable from the normal state to the special state (for example, step 065AKS018 process),
The effect executing means provides a specific effect suggesting that the variable display result of the special identification information will be the specific display result (for example, a predetermined effect of the predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5, a special figure-linked effect), and a variable display of the normal identification information. A special effect that suggests that the display result will be the special result (for example, a predetermined effect of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, a general figure interlocking effect) can be executed,
The state control means can control from the normal state to the special state even if variable display of the special identification information is being executed when the variable display result of the normal identification information becomes the special result ( For example, the process of step 065AKS018 is executed).
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be suitably performed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Predetermined notification means for performing predetermined notification (for example, time-saving transition notification, right-handed notification) based on the normal variable means changing to the predetermined state;
Predetermined notification limiting means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of steps 065AKS106 and step 065AKS108) for limiting the predetermined notification according to the effect content during variable display of the special identification information may be provided. .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from interfering with the performance during the variable display of the special identification information.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Said effect executing means, in said normal state, sets the variable display result of the normal identification information to the predetermined result, sets the variable display result of the normal identification information to the special result, and sets the variable display result of the special identification information to the predetermined result. (For example, it is possible to execute predetermined effects of predetermined effect patterns SP1 to SP5. FIGS. 43-12 and 43-13). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the display results of both the normal identification information and the special identification information.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The state control means can be controlled to the special state based on being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 43-5),
When starting variable display of the special identification information after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled based on being controlled to the advantageous state depending on whether it is the normal state or the special state. The termination conditions of the special states may be made different.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the state transition.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
When the variable display result of the normal identification information is the special result, the time from the display of the variable display result to the determination is longer than when the variable display result of the normal identification information is the predetermined result (for example, FIG. 43-3(A)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the state transition.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
In the case of the normal state, it takes longer than in the case of the special state from when the special result is displayed as the variable display result of the normal identification information until it is confirmed (for example, FIG. 43-3 (A), ( B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the state transition.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic portions)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 079SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 44-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 079SG. As shown in FIG. 44-1, the sound control board 13 in the feature part 079SG includes a sound synthesizing board 13 for generating sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. An IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 for amplifying the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and a voice data ROM 079SG133 are mounted. Sound number data is output to the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 based on the performance control command to cause the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG 132 generates voices and effect sounds corresponding to the input sound number data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 079SG 134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesizing IC079SG132, and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R.

The sound data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting sounds corresponding to the effects executed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data are the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including voice data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 44-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature part 079. FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decoration patterns, a ready-to-win effect, an operation promotion effect and a still image display effect, which will be described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved storage by the number of the reserved display of the white circle, and the number of the second special figure reserved storage A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second reserved storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of circular reserved displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, of the entire display area of the image display device 5, the portion excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

In addition, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display information related to the game (holding display, telop display, fourth symbol) at the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than the first display area 079SG005F. , and the number of reserved memories). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the characteristic portion 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of first special figure pending storage, and the number of second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5 . The third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and lateral width are formed extremely shorter than the height H and lateral width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. there is

Therefore, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F that occupies the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the total area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 44-2(B), in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 performs a reserved display operation process (see FIG. 44-13) which will be described later. As a result, each hold display can be rotated around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 44-2 (C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 executes a telop operation process (see FIG. 44-13) described later, so that the game state and the effect being executed are displayed. A message (for example, if a specific ready-to-win effect is in progress, a message corresponding to the state of the effect, such as "In XX mode!") is moved from left to right at a constant speed (e.g., movement speed V3). It is possible to display one

It should be noted that the characters included in the message corresponding to the game state are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time when the display reaches the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and is displayed again from the left to the right. is moved in the direction Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is easy to recognize the current game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the suspension display in the first storage display area 079SG005D and the second storage storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to rotate and move with

As shown in FIG. 44-2(D), the fourth pattern 079SG005J has an upper pattern 079SG005Ja and a lower pattern 079SG005Jb, and these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb alternately blink at a constant cycle. , to indicate that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are both extinguished (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display when the variable display result is lost, while the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. In this case, both are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

It should be noted that the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing when a new pending memory is generated and the timing when a new variable display is started. is the only display whose number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure reserved memory number and the display of the second special figure reserved memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth pattern 079SG005J, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 44-3(A) to 44-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 44-3(A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa. Data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display the small pattern of the image data 1 decoration pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 44-3(B), the image data 2 is data drawn to display images of a chance-up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 44-3(C), the image data 3 is data drawn for displaying the variable display of decorative patterns and the ready-to-win effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 44-3(A) to 44-3(C), the image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. is set. The highest display priority is set for image data 1, and the lowest is set for image data 3 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as an image in a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 44-3(D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are preferentially displayed.

When the image based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 3 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partly invisible or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is

In this characteristic portion 079SG, although the details will be described later, the images based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is always constant, while the image data 3 Based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance, the images are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images and still images of a plurality of advancing speeds.

In particular, in this feature part 079SG, although the details will be described later, the display of the animation of the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach can be executed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It has become. This is because the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V1 and the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect animation to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on the data, part of the effect animation for the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be possible to display

In this way, in the present characteristic section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the effect moving image changes, to V1, the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player becomes the first speed, and during the non-slow motion period, the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player is the second slow speed. In other words, the slow-motion moving image, which is the effect moving image whose rendering progress speed is slow in this characteristic portion 079SG, is displayed before the slow-motion moving image, and the image progressing speed is V1 compared to the non-slow-motion moving image. Anything with a slow speed is fine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the form in which the slow motion period is provided in all the super reach effects is exemplified (see FIGS. 44-18 to 44-25), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the contents of the effect animation itself displayed on the image display device 5 are the same as the contents of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. does not change from V1 to V2, that is, by executing a super reach effect that does not become a slow motion period, in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 44-18 to 44-25, the slow motion period may be made easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, in the case of executing the super ready-to-win effect in which the content of the effect moving image is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect moving image is set to the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention. means that the effect moving image of the same content is displayed at a video progressing speed V2 that is slower than the video progressing speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach effect, so that the duration is longer than that of the non-slow motion super reach effect. The effect moving image to be displayed corresponds.

In addition, as described above, in this feature part 079SG, by slowing down the image progress speed of the effect moving image, a slow motion effect is configured in which the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect that the player feels is slow, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R , does not change from the playback speed V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. By accelerating the reproduction speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission cycle of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion may be constructed in which the player feels that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG is provided with a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying effect moving images, and among these effect output means, at least one effect output means advances the effect is different between the slow-motion period and the non-slow-motion period so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is the slow-motion during the slow-motion period.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is always displayed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may change the progress speed of the display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases and decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 44-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characteristic portion 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 44-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 44-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 44-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is "loss", "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 44-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

It should be noted that the commands shown in FIG. 44-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and these commands may be used instead of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 44-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 44-5, in this characteristic portion 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 44-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this feature part 079SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 079SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 44-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 079SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 44-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in this characteristic part 079SG is based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in this feature part 079SG will be described with reference to FIG. 44-7 (B). ``Probability variable jackpot A'', ``probability variable jackpot B'', and ``probability variable jackpot C'' which are executed and shifted to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is completed to a low probability high base state. The "non-probable variable jackpot" to be shifted is set.

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win A" is a big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win B" is a big win in which 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. In some cases, the “non-probability variable jackpot” is referred to as a 2-round (2R) non-probability variable jackpot.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in this characteristic portion 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic part 079SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

High-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A, the variable probability big win B, and the variable probability big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. . Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 44-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the big hit type as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C" to a big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 44-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 44-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic portion 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present characteristic portion 079SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "minor winning".

As shown in FIG. 44-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 079SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present feature unit 079SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 44-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic part 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (super reach β3 big hit variation pattern). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 44-9, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table have different allocation numbers of determination values for PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach β type variation patterns PB1-3 and PB1-4 are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern determination table, and use the special winning variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern as PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). do.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), PA2-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 loss) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β2) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β3).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 079SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the fact that it is in a time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 44-8, the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α1 (the ready-to-reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first ready-to-reach effect described later is executed. This is a ready-to-win effect in which the display result is a big hit, and the ready-to-win effect of super reach α2 (ready-to-win effect executed by variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-2) is executed in the first half and the latter half of the first ready-to-win effect described later. This is a ready-to-reach effect in which the variable display result is lost after the change, and the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α3 (ready-to-reach effect executed by variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach to be described later. This is a ready-to-win effect in which a second ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the latter half of the effect are executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a loss.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 44-8 and 44-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit after being executed up to the second ready-to-win effect is the first ready-to-win effect to be executed. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, the reach effect of super reach β1 (reach effect executed by variable display of fluctuation patterns PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a big hit after the first half of the third reach effect described later is executed. Yes, the reach effect of super reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-4) is changed after the first half and the second half of the third reach effect described later are executed. It is a ready-to-reach production, and the ready-to-reach production of super reach β3 (ready-to-reach production executed with variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third ready-to-reach production described later. After that, a fourth ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed, and the result of the variable display is a big win or a losing effect.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 44-8 and 44-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. That is, for the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit after being executed up to the fourth ready-to-win production is the third ready-to-win production. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the second ready-to-win effect is always executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect is always executed after the third ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect may be executed alone.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, each ready-to-win effect can be executed by combining the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect during the variable display, and by combining the third ready-to-reach effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ready-to-reach production is a combination other than these combinations (for example, the first ready-to-reach production and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production and the third You may provide a case where it is executed in a combination of ready-to-win effects, etc.).

In addition, in this characteristic portion 069SG, as shown in FIG. 44-9, the variation patterns of the super reach β system (variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally super reach α system The ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (jackpot expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), but the present invention is based on this Not limited, part of the super reach β system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is super reach α system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may be lower than any of the big hit expectations.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 079SG, there is a game control data holding area 079SG 150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 44-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , a game control timer setting unit 079SG153, a game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is a special feature that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 079SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 079SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 33, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the production operation, for example, production control data holding as shown in FIG. 44-11 (A) Area 079SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 44-11(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 079SG191, a production control timer setting unit 079SG192, a production control counter setting unit 079SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 079SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 079SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (second 1 pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with these starting entrance winning designation commands and reservation storage number notification commands. , A storage area (entry) for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the pending storage number notification command.

The commands stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 44-11(B) are the entries (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 44-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination processing of the characteristic portion 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. 44-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 079SG154, it should be able to specify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" ( step 079 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 079 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" ( step 079 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 079SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, storage storage for the effect control board 12 Settings for sending the number notification command are made (step 079 SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 079SGS115), the processing of step 079SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 079SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 44-13 is part of a flow chart showing the effect control process processing in this feature part 079SG. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prefetching notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and these first Suspended display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotated display) the suspended displays displayed in the suspended storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation processing (step 079SGS163) and the fourth design display processing (step 079SG164) for executing the variable display of the fourth design 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect control process flag process.

FIG. 44-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

Also, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of start winning, 1 buffer number each Shift up (step 079 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decoration design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit B or the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small win, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chances. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y) executes a chance-up effect determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect in the second half of the first ready-to-win effect or the second half of the third ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44-15, when the variable display result is lost, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 80%, and non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the characteristic portion 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation of big hit is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 44-27 and 44-32, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, only one production pattern is provided as the production mode of the chance-up production, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as a performance mode of the chance-up performance, and the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. A plurality of performance start timings for performance may be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining execution/non-execution of the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079 SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss A still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect for displaying the still image displayed at the end of the second ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 during the period until the notification effect is started. A determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 44-16(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100% when the variable display result is a failure. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 44-16(B), the pattern SG-1 of the still image display effect is to freeze the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second ready-to-win effect. In the pattern SG-2 of the still image display effect, the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , is an effect pattern for changing the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), proceed to step 079SGS283. ), an operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect prompting the player to operate the push button 31B during execution of the fourth ready-to-win effect, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 44-17(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to the pattern SS at a rate of 80% when the variable display result is a failure. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance at a rate of 20%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 44-17(B), the pattern SS-1 of the operation prompting effect is a pattern of displaying the image of the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is a effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

In other words, as the operation promotion effect in the present characteristic portion 079SG, when the image of the push button 31B of a large size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2). ), the ratio is higher than when the image of the normal size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since there is a high probability that the variable display result is a big win (a big win notification performance is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion performance is executed. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

At step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect processing is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. determine whether or not Then, when the process timer after subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and when the process timer after subtraction has timed out, the process data is processed. As soon as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the production device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

Next, description will be given of the effect modes of the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in this characteristic portion 079SG with reference to FIGS. 44-18 to 44-35.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, the effect animation such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be. Hereinafter, the flashing or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the characteristic portion 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all synchronized and flashed or lit. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 44-18, 44-19, 44-26(A) to 44-26(C), when the development timing of the ready-to-win effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

During the period when friendly character A attacking enemy character A is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, when the first half of the first reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after displaying a moving image in which the ally character A succeeds in attacking and the enemy character A falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped in combination with the big win, and the game state is controlled to a big win game state. to be notified. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 44-26(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the jackpot notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the friend character A succeeds is executed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 44-26 (E)), and then the enemy character The moving image of the falling portion is displayed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 44-26(F)). Then, the moving image of the part in which it is announced that the decorative symbols are stopped in the combination of the big wins and is controlled to the big win game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 44-26 (G) applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach α2 or super reach α3 variable display, when the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 44-19 and 44-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the second half of the first ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 44-19 and FIGS. 44-27(A) to 44-27(B), when the transition is made to the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the battle effect between the friendly character A and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

It should be noted that during the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-win effect, when the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similarly to the effect animation of the battle effect.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect progresses as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

During the period when friendly character A attacking enemy character A is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α2, when the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Secondly, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the friendly character A's attack fails and is knocked down by the enemy character A, the variable display result is stopped with a combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. is reported.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the part where the friendly character A's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

In addition, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 44-27(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, a stop display with a combination of the decorative pattern and the small pattern during the design confirmation period, and a non-display of the fourth pattern (both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are extinguished). ) is performed.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of super reach α3, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character A succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, it shifts to the execution period of the first half of the second ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 44-20, 44-21, and 44-28(A) to 44-28(B), when the transition is made to the first half execution period of the second reach effect, the friend character A and the enemy character B The battle production of progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

As the battle effect progresses, when the second half of the second ready-to-win effect first half execution period is reached, as shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, display of concentration lines is started, and in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character B is started. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

During the period in which the friendly character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-described effect rendering is gradually increased.

In other words, during the execution period of the latter half of the second ready-to-win effect, the progress speed of the moving image of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the number of concentration lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 flashes violently. Therefore, the increase in the number of concentration lines and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 can effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the big win notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed). It is possible.

Then, after the second reach effect latter half execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. The image that was being played (in this characteristic portion 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of the friend character A hits the enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the pending display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and the BGM, effect sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the animation of the battle production. Return to the period before the speed drops to V2.

Incidentally, when the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the end of the still image display effect in which the color is reversed, as a big win notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B falls down, the game state is controlled to the big win game state. be notified. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 44-29(F), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

As a jackpot notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. However, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, a moving image in which the decoration patterns stop with a winning combination after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect. ) to FIG. 44-30 (D), the case where the big hit notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in FIGS. In some cases, production is executed.

The jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the big hit notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the advancing speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. After the enemy character B has fallen down, it is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 44-30(E), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

In addition, as a failure notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the attack of the friendly character A does not hit the enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of the enemy character B hits the friendly character A. After the ally character A hits and falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped by a combination of missing symbols, and it is notified that the big win game state is not controlled.

As the failure notification effect, as shown in FIG. 44-21, a moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1 until the enemy character B is knocked down by the enemy character B without being hit by the attack of the friend character A. FIG. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 44-30(I), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

44-22, 44-23, and 44-31(A) to 44-31(H), when the variable display is started, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, the effect moving image such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progressing speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 44-22, 44-23, and 44-31(A) to 44-31(C), when the development timing of the ready-to-win effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third ready-to-win effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the third ready-to-win effect progresses as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character B attacks the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle presentation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach β1, when the execution period of the first half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after a moving image of a successful attack by the ally character B and the enemy character A falling down is displayed, it is reported that the game will be controlled to the big win game state. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 44-31(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character B succeeds is executed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 44-30 (E)), and then the enemy character The display of the moving image of the falling portion is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 44-30 (F)). Then, the moving image of the part in which it is announced that the decoration symbols are stopped in the combination of the big wins and is controlled to the big win game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 44-30 (G)). applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach β2 or super reach β3 variable display, when the third reach effect first half execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 44-23 and 44-31 (D) , the attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 44-23 and FIGS. 44-32(A) to 44-32(B), when the second half of the third reach effect is executed, the battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

It should be noted that during the execution period of the second half of the third ready-to-win effect, when the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similarly to the effect animation of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, while the small patterns are displayed with priority over the chance-up production effect animation, the chance-up production production animation is displayed in the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 44-32 (B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the left and right upper parts of the display device 5). Therefore, in this characteristic part 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbols, and the effect animation of the chance-up effect is displayed. By giving priority to display over the pattern, it is possible to reliably secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chang-up effect on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the animation of the chance-up production is displayed with priority over the decoration pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration pattern is displayed rather than the production animation of the chance-up production. may also be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which combination of decorative symbols the ready-to-win effect in execution has developed from, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect progresses as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach β2, when the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the ally character B's attack fails and the enemy character A defeats him, it is notified that the variable display result is a miss as a miss notification effect.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the portion where the attack of the friend character B fails and the portion where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

Further, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 44-32(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the super reach β3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character B succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, it shifts to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 44-24, 44-25 and 44-33(A) to 44-33(B), when the transition is made to the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the friend character AB and the enemy character B Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect first half execution period is approached due to the progress of the battle effect, as shown in FIGS. Display of a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster).

That is, in the second half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect decreases to V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the big hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed).

Then, when the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect progresses, the operation promoting effect is executed. When the pattern SS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 along with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the shape of the push button 31B. display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of , and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 are started. Incidentally, as described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 44-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 44-33(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be informed of the operation reception period of the push button 31B by updating the display of the meter 079SG005M, while enlarging the effect image 079SG005E. Update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E. The visibility of the battle production is lower than that. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 44-33 (D) and 44-33 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the operation reception end timing of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed until it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44-34(A) to 44-34(E), when pattern SS-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the first display of the image display device 5 is performed. In the center of the region 079SG005F, display of an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger in size than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba as an operation prompting image imitating the shape of the push button 31B and a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B start. and the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. Incidentally, as described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 44-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 44-34(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B by updating display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb Most of the images in the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than in the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 44-34 (D) and 44-34 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the button 31B operation reception end timing), the progress does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is When finished), the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect is executed from the timing when the player operates the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

As the big hit notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 44-24 and FIGS. Although the moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 44-35(D), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

In addition, as the failure notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. On the contrary, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is informed that the big winning game state is not controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed.

Incidentally, as the failure notification effect, as shown in FIG. 44-25, a moving image is displayed at the progressing speed V1 until the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped without the attack of the ally character B being hit. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 44-35 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

44-26 (H), 44-27 (H), 44-29 (F), 44-30 (E), 44-30 (I), 44-31 (H), As shown in FIGS. 44-32(H), 44-35(D), and 44-35(H), in this characteristic portion 079SG, at the end timing of variable display, a telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the telop display area 079SG005T itself is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. is performed, the display of the telop (message) itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be performed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during the slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Also, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during a part of the period (non-slow motion period) during which the display of the effect moving image of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. During the execution period of the first half part, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the second half of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect. During the partial execution period, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progressing speed V2, the degree of empathy of the player for the teammate character displayed during the ready-to-win effect is enhanced, and a big win is announced. Since it is possible to heighten the sense of expectation for the execution of the performance, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. On the other hand, during the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, and during the execution period of the latter half of each, the BGM, effect sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R are played. Since the output is unchanged at V4, which is the normal reproduction speed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, since the sound output hand in this characteristic part 079SG includes the voice synthesizing IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, reproducibility in variable display including the execution of the ready-to-win effect and the execution of the jackpot game, etc. It is possible to output high-quality background music (music) and sound effects such as sound effects at an appropriate volume from the speakers 8L and 8R, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 44-20, 44-21, 44-24, and 44-25, during the execution period of the second reach production latter half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, the game effect Since the lamp 9 blinks at a period shorter than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a short period in the period when the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In addition, in this characterizing part 079SG, a form in which the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect or during the period of the second half of the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the player can recognize from the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 079SG, an example is given in which the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect or during the period of the second half of the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing of the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 44-19 to 44-25, during each execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the effect animation of the reach effect progresses. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, both the rotation speed of the pending display and the movement speed of the telop are constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example is given in which both the rotation speed of the suspension display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement display speed of the telop are set to V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 44-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the total area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-win effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby improving the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 44-18 to 44-25, in the period other than during the ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the suspended display is rotated at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspended memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspended memory display area 079SG005U. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is performed at the moving speed V3. It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 44-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and at the same time when the display ends, the characters appear in the telop display area 079SG005T. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from left to right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the form in which the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop is moved in the telop display area 079SG005T. A portion of the displayed telop may be invisible to the player at some point.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 44-20, 44-21, and 44-28, in the second half of the reach effect execution period, the display of the effect animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 and the image By executing the effect performance of displaying the concentration line on the display device 5, the effect performance can be enhanced during the execution period of the latter half of the second ready-to-win performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 44-28(C) and 44-28(D), the number of concentration lines displayed increases as the battle effect progresses. The increase in the number makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second ready-to-win performance ends and the big hit notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example of a form in which the effect production in the present invention is displayed as a concentrated line is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle production progresses, the degree of effect of the effect production is gradually increased (for example, the range of movement of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, the stick Alternatively, the vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, or the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 44-26 (G), 44-29 (E), 44-30 (D), 44-31 (G), and 44-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect When the decoration pattern stops with a combination of a big hit, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the big win notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the big win notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further enhanced, and the player is made to recognize that it is controlled to the big win game state. It can be done easily.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the big hit notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa In a state where the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the second In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the big hit notification effect may be displayed overlapping the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T.

At this time, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed transparently or reduced, or the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U are displayed. The visibility of the big hit notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the reserved displays displayed in the reserved display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 44-28 and 44-29, in the second reach effect latter half execution period, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while FIGS. As shown in 44-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the second display area 079SG005Sa rotates the suspended display in the first suspended memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspended memory display area 079SG005U, and Since the movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that the suspension display is being displayed or the telop movement is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the telop due to the stop of the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 44-16 and 44-29(A) to 44-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the still image display effect, the form of reversing the color of the still image is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to this, but the forms of changing the color of the still image include changing the color of the still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of the still image, and adding new colors to the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the color of the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth pattern displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can easily see the colors displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the pending display, telop, fourth pattern, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

Also, in each variable display of super reach in this characteristic part 079SG, a pattern of shifting to a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect after execution of a first reach effect and a third reach effect, and a pattern of shifting to a first reach effect and a third reach effect Since there is a pattern in which the variable display is terminated by shifting to the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect after the performance is executed, the display of the ready-to-win effect animation progresses during the first ready-to-reach effect and the third ready-to-reach effect. Whether or not to shift to the second ready-to-win effect or the fourth ready-to-win effect after being executed at the speed V2, and display of the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect during the second ready-to-reach effect or the third ready-to-win effect are executed at the progress speed V2. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not it is reported that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state after the game is played, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 44-19, 44-20, 44-21, 44-23, 44-24, and 44-25, during the first reach production and the third reach production, the third During the execution period of the second half of the first reach production and the second half of the execution period of the second half of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and the second half execution period of the first reach production or the latter half of the third reach production are carried out at the same time. Since it is executed at the speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the second half of the first half of the ready-to-win performance or from the first half of the execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. is different from the progress speed of the performance in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance. You can prevent it from getting lost. 44-18, 44-20, 44-22, 44-24, 44-25 and 44-26 (E) to 44-26 (G), 44-29 (C) ~ Figure 44-29 (E), Figure 44-30 (B) ~ Figure 44-30 (D), Figure 44-31 (E) ~ Figure 44-31 (G), Figure 44-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 44-35(C), in the big hit notification effect of this characteristic part 079SG, while the animation when the enemy character falls down due to the attack of the friend character being hit is displayed at the progress speed V2, Figure 44-19, Figure 44-21, Figure 44-23, Figure 44-25 and Figure 44-27 (E) to Figure 44-27 (G), Figure 44-30 (F) to Figure 44-30 (H) ), FIGS. 44-32(E) to 44-32(G), and FIGS. 44-35(D) to 44-35(F), in the failure notification effect, animations when the ally character falls down is executed at the progress speed V1, when the loss notification performance is executed, the display of the performance moving image of the loss notification performance is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. can be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the result of the variable display of super reach is executed and the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in part of the variable display of super reach, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect may be executed at a progress speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to produce variations in the production of the failure notification production, and to improve the game interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the third speed in the present invention is set as the progressing speed V1 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect, and the progress speed V2 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect is set as the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the advancing speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 44-24 and 44-25, during the execution period of the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the operation promotion effect is executed when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is being displayed at the progress speed V2. Therefore, the effect of the fourth ready-to-win effect can be enhanced by the operation promoting effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, while the operation promoting effect is being executed, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promoting effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-win effect may be performed at the progress speed V1. Further, a suggestive performance suggesting that the operation promoting performance is executed can be executed before the operation prompting performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestive performance, the display of the performance animation of the fourth ready-to-reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. may be executed.

In addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG. While the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display of the effect animation of the fourth ready-to-win effect is continuously executed at the progress speed V2, but does not proceed until the notification effect. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. , the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the end of the operation accepting period of the push button 31B (until the end of the operation promotion effect), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation reception period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, a configuration in which the push button 31B is used as the detection means in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is a stick controller 31A or the like other than the push button 31B. In addition to the operating means, sensors capable of detecting the actions of the player, such as motion sensors and touch sensors, may be used.

44-18, 44-20, 44-22, 44-24 and 44-26 (E) to 44-26 (G), 44-29 (C) to 44-29 (E), Figures 44-30 (B) to Figures 44-30 (D), Figures 44-31 (E) to Figures 44-31 (G), Figures 44-35 (A) to Figures 44-35 (C) ), in the big hit notification effect in this characteristic portion 079SG, the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the moving image of the part where the enemy character falls down progresses. Displayed at speed V2. 44-19, 44-21, 44-23, 44-25 and 44-27 (E) to 44-27 (G), 44-30 (E) to 44- 30 (G), Figures 44-32 (E) ~ Figure 44-32 (G), Figure 44-35 (D) ~ Figure 44-35 (F), as shown in Figure 44-35 (D) ~ Figure 44-35 (F), the deviation notification production of this feature portion 079SG A moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is never displayed at the progress speed V2. In other words, when the big win notification effect is executed, a part of the effect animation of the big win notification effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby impressing the player that it is controlled to the big win game state. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which colors are reversed). As a still image display effect, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is exemplified as a special effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , an effect other than the static image display effect of the pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.) may be executed.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG includes a pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating a push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. It can be executed in any of the pattern SS-2 in which the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44-17, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2 is Since the variable display result is lower than the ratio of the big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to which pattern SS-1 or SS-2 the operation promoting performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 44-24, 44-25, and 44-33(C) to 44-33(E), when an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation prompting effect, the operation prompting image During the display of 079SG005Ba, the display of the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb shows the progress speed V2 (slow motion ) has been exemplified in which the visibility of the fourth reach effect animation (battle effect) being displayed is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is pattern SS -2, in addition to the display of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the fourth reach effect (battle production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period in which the effect video (battle effect) of the fourth reach effect is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to pattern SS-2 of the operation promotion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this characterizing portion 079SG, as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the second ready-to-win effect can be executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect can be executed after the third ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, the variable display of super reach α1 for announcing a big win after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and the variable display of super reach β1 for notifying a big win after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach performance execution period after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and notifies of a failure, and second half of the third reach performance after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Variable display of super ready-to-reach β2 for executing partial execution period and informing loss, variable display of super ready-to-win α3 to shift to second ready-to-win performance after first ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period, third ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period After that, it is possible to execute variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach production, and as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , When shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period, the performance animation of each ready-to-win performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first ready-to-win performance first half execution period to the first When shifting to the second half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the first half of the second half of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. , BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4 without changing from the other periods when shifting from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach performance. Therefore, when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first reach performance to the second half of the execution period of the first ready-reach performance, when shifting from the second half of the execution period of the first reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the second ready-reach performance, the third reach. To give a player a sense of incongruity when shifting from the performance first half execution period to the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period, and when shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period. You can prevent it from slipping. Furthermore, the display of the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the branch of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player can be easily recognized.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more A ready-to-win effect may be executable, or only one ready-to-win effect may be executable.

Although the characteristic part 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention, the present invention can be applied. included.

For example, in the characteristic part 079SG, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effect of the super reach. Although the display of is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion), the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern ( A pattern in which the effect moving image is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect motion image is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the content of the effect may be different between the ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect moving image is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the ready-to-reach effect in which the effect moving image is not displayed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether or not the display of the effect moving image is executed at the progress speed V2. Although the form to be output is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, as a modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, the fourth reach In the first half of each ready-to-reach effect second half execution period of the performance, the playback speed is V4 from the speakers 8L and 8R in the same manner as the first-reach effect, second ready-to-reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth ready-to-reach effect first half execution period. While outputting the effect sound at, in the second half (slow motion period) of each reach effect second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect What is V4? The effect sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the reproduction speed V4). In this manner, the performance effect of the performance sound for the ready-to-win performance can be improved by varying the reproduction speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance animation of the ready-to-win performance is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 44-33 and 44-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect by displaying an effect image 079SG005E, displaying an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, or the like. While it is possible to reduce the visibility, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, as shown in FIGS. , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 44-36 (A) to 44-36 (D), when the second ready-to-win effect is being executed, when the second ready-to-win effect ends along with the still image display effect, A circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as a part of the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. In this way, it is necessary to notify that it is controlled to the big hit game state as the big hit notification effect, or that it is not controlled to the big win game state as the loss notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 44-37(A) to 44-37(D), when the fourth reach effect is executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes When the operation promoting effect is finished without operating the button 31B, as a part of the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed secondly. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 44-37(E) and 44-37(F) As described above, it is necessary to notify that it is controlled to the big hit game state as the big hit notification effect, or that it is not controlled to the big win game state as the loss notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 44-36 and 44-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. Thus, it is possible to reduce the visibility of only the first display area 079SG005F and not to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

As described above, in this modification 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. After the end of the ready-to-win effect or after the end of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, the change in the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect is to be performed, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb increases. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth symbol, and the like.

The effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image drawn as the image of the second image data shown in FIG. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is not changed, and the first display area 079SG005Sb is displayed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be appropriately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be performed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

In addition, in the present modification 079SG-2, the mode of executing the operation promotion effect during the fourth ready-to-win effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. Can be run as part.

In addition, when the operation promotion effect is executed as part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in FIG. 44-38(D), an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and a meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation prompting effect. do.

By displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or based on the end of the operation promotion performance without the player operating the push button 31B, the game is controlled to the big win game state, or the big win game state. is notified that it is not controlled by

As described above, in the modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data are reduced. Since the visibility of is not lowered, the operation promoting effect can be emphasized with respect to the fourth ready-to-win effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, when the static image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, the variable display result always becomes a big hit. It is not limited to this, and as a modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always The variable probability big win (furthermore, the variable probability big win A that is most advantageous to the player) may be achieved. Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, control is performed again to the jackpot game state after the failure notification effect is executed. It may be possible to execute a resurrection effect that notifies of. In addition, in the case where the resurrection effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 in this way, the case where the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot and a non-probability variation jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) A case where it is controlled to the big hit game state and a case where it is controlled to the big hit game state of probability variable big hit) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big win notification performance is executed after the still image display performance is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the game interest can be improved. .

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, as an example of displaying a message indicating the gaming state as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T As the displayed telop, it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the ready-to-win effect being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, the mode in which a telop can be displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T according to the state of the effect being executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T. The telops displayed in , are those that can specify the game state, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable display during execution (jackpot expectation), the explanation of the production during execution (especially the reach production), the reach production It may be an announcement effect or the like that can be executed from the timing before.

44-33 and 44-34, in the characteristic portion 079SG, during the period in which the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, an operation promoting effect (an operation promoting image 079SG005Ba or an operation promoting display of the image 079SG005Bb) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 44-33 and 44-34, the image display device 5 displays an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb as an operation prompting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is not limited to simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B are moved toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are overlapped and displayed to form an operation prompting image. An effect in which 079SG005Ba and an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb are displayed may be executed.

In addition, when the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the central portion of the image display device 5 is executed as an indication effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B The movement display speed may decrease as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5 . By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation prompting effect will be executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (light emitting colors) of the game effect lamps 9 differs from that when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. may For example, when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image display of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.例文帳に追加

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the moving image of the ready-to-win effect and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 44-26, 44-29, 44-30, 44-31, and 44-35, as the production mode of the jackpot notification production, the end of the ready-to-win production Later, an example is given in which the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win. The timing may be during the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that the player can operate. may be applied to By doing so, when the player has set the output of the effect sound that suits his/her preference, the speaker 8L is displayed when the moving image of each reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. , 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without change, the effect sound is faster than the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself/herself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement due to low speed reproduction.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as the end suggestion effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute the effect in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect. is executed, the variable display result is always lost, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second half of the first reach effect execution period and the second half of the third reach effect, After the effect of defeating the ally character by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect, and then the variable display result shows the big win. (For example, a case of executing a resurrection effect) may be provided.

When executing the resurrection effect in this manner, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and blinked prior to the display of the moving image of the resurrection effect on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is given to the player. may be made to recognize that is executed. Furthermore, as the effect mode of the resurrection effect, for example, the effect may be such that the ally character attacks the enemy character again and defeats the enemy character. In particular, when the resurrection effect is executed, a part of the moving image of the resurrection effect (for example, the moving image of the scene in which the enemy character falls down) is displayed at the progress speed V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. good too.

In addition, although a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications are disclosed in the present specification, the game machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more characteristic portions and modifications from these plurality of characteristic portions and modifications. You may

For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 079SG may be a pachinko gaming machine capable of changing the jackpot probability by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are not displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set to a high setting value (eg, 6) that is advantageous for the player. is set, even if the variable display results of super reach α1 and super reach β1 are out of range at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in the pachinko game machine 1 good. By doing so, it is possible to use the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the variable display result is wrong while suppressing the player's interest in the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It becomes possible.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic portions)
Each configuration regarding the characteristic portion 059AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration regarding other characteristic portions such as the characteristic portion 063AK, the characteristic portion 065AK, and the characteristic portion 079SG. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate. For example, in addition to controlling the time saving state by stopping and displaying the time saving pattern like the feature part 059AK, based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20 like the feature part 063AK, the small hit game state ends After that, it may be controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined period. In addition to this, like the characterizing portion 065AK, even when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the normal pattern, it may be controlled to the time saving state. According to this, the opportunity to be controlled to the time saving state increases, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, for example, the time saving production in the feature part 059AK, the normal time passage production and the time saving production in the feature part 063AK, the predetermined production in the feature part 065AK, and the reach production of super reach A to super reach C etc. It may be a predetermined effect in 079SG. Then, during the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as the display means, and the predetermined effect after the first period can be displayed. In the second period, the effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is produced during the first period. and the second period, the speed of the effect sound may be output at the same speed from the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound output means. According to this, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent giving a sense of incongruity.

1 pachinko game machine 2 game board 3 game machine frame 11 main board 12 performance control board 200 payout device 202 first guide passage forming part 201 ball tank forming part 203 first passage forming body 210 terminal board 220 cover bodies 271A to 271H hole Part 314, 324, 334 Cover part 340 Ball stop member N1-6, 11-16 Screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result,
a game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
a play frame ;
a starting region;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiter provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
with
The game control means is
a determining means for determining to set the advantageous state;
a determination means for determining that the advantageous state is reached before the determination by the determination means;
an information transmitting means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information capable of specifying that control to be in the advantageous state is performed when the determining means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved,
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and the information can be transmitted based on entry of the game medium into the start area,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents the game medium falling on the screw drop-limiting portion from staying and the screw member dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to drop into the guide passage forming portion. It is configured to be able to stay on the restriction part,
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members,
A screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame is attached so as to drop outside the guide passage forming portion even if the screw member is disengaged from the game frame.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images